Home

Ground Loop DesignTM

1. Fig 4 27 Hourly Data Results in Expanded User Interface The third subsection of the report lists the heat pump peak inlet and peak outlet temperatures of the circulating fluid These green numbers are absolute peak temperatures and not average peak temperatures By presenting absolute peak temperatures it makes it easier for the designer to compare Hourly Data results with Design Day and Monthly Data Results Note that these peak temperatures are not influenced by changes in the hours at peak control which can be seen in figure 3 13 This is because of the inherent detail in hourly loads profiles The fourth subsection lists the total unit capacity the peak loads and demand of all the equipment the calculated seasonal heat pump efficiency the calculated design day efficiency and the calculated average annual power consumption The peak load is the maximum and is determined from whichever time period across all the zones has the highest load The peak demand includes all pumps and external energy requirements including those listed in the Extra kW panel 106 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module In GLD Premier 2010 the calculated seasonal cooling and heating heat pump efficiency values over the design lifetime are quite useful for lifecycle cost and C02 emissions analyses in the Finance Module The design day efficiency is the predicated heat pump performance on the cooling and heating design day The average annual power consumption
2. Radial Pipe Placement Borehole Diameter co C Close Together Borehole Diameter 5 50 in U Tube Configuration pi D Peet ue Backfill Grout Information 63 Along Outer Wall Thermal Conductivity 1 08 Btu h ft eF ao Fig 4 10 U Tube Panel Contents Pipe Parameters The pipe parameters are entered in the Pipe Parameters section They include the pipe resistance and pipe outside diameter followed by the configuration and placement of the pipe in the bore GLD calculates the convective resistance using the Dittus Boelter correlation for turbulent flow in a circular tube Incropera and DeWitt 1990 The calculations use average values of the Reynolds number to represent the different types of flow with values of Re 1600 3150 or 10000 for laminar transition and turbulent respectively The calculations also use average values of viscosity and the Prandtl number for water taken at a temperature of 70 F Using the standard expression for resistance of a hollow cylinder Incropera and DeWitt 1990 the program can calculate an approximate 84 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module value for the pipe resistance It assumes HDPE pipe with a conductivity of 0 225 Btu h ft F The pipe resistance varies with the pipe style and flow The user can select the size and type of pipe from the appropriate selection boxes If another pipe diameter is required it can be entered directly i
3. 1 Supply Return Runout Information Extra One Way Length ft 200 0 0 0 Pipe Size SDR11 2 in 50 mm OK Cancel Fig 11 69 The GHX Module Builder The GHX Module Builder is broken into five sections Group Name Return Piping Style Circuit Information Supply Return Pipe Information and the OK Cancel buttons Each section is addressed below Group Name The group name is a parameter applied to every component in a design The user can use the default group name or select one of his or her choosing The group name becomes important during the design review process so it is therefore critical that each GHX Module has a unique group name 280 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Return Pipe Style The designer can choose to build a reverse return GHX Module or a direct return GHX Module Because the flow characteristics of the two options are very different it is critical that the designer selects the correct return piping style Circuit Information In this section the user enters details pertaining to the circuits themselves Details include the number of GHX Circuits the separation between circuits the one way length of each circuit the circuit pipe size circuits per parallel loop and circuits per one way length Because these last two parameters circuits per parallel loop and circuits per one way length may sound unfamiliar they are described below Circuits Per Parallel Loop
4. Automatic Entry Mode by Weight by Volume Fluid Type 100 water Design Temperature 32 0 F Specific Heat Cp 1 00 Btu F lbm Density rho 62 4 Ib ft 3 Dynamic Viscosity u 3 738E 5 Ibf s ft 2 Check Fluid Tables Fig 11 15 Solution Properties Data Entry Note Since solution properties vary considerably and non linearly with temperature type and percentage of additive GLD does not include detailed automatic antifreeze information for all conditions Generalized tables of data may be found in the Fluid Properties tables For all designs it is recommended that the designer manually enter the desired values in the input text boxes to ensure that fluid properties match the design requirements Layout The Layout panel is the heart of the CFD module This is the panel in which the designer builds piping systems explores their fluid dynamics implications and then modifies the design manually or automatically as necessary The Layout panel can be seen in figure 11 16 223 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Layout Fluid Automation Circulation Pumps Layout Design and Optimization Calculate B E Purge Alphabetic Categorized Fig 11 16 Layout Panel Contents In Purge Mode The Layout panel is broken into five primary sections including the Calculate and Results Display Buttons the Layout Manager Workspace the big white space on the left the Flow Type D
5. Cooling 850 F Heating 50 0 F Design System Flow Rate Flow Rate 3 0 gpm ton Solution Properties v Automatic Entry Mode Fluid Type 4129 Propylene Glycol Specific Heat Cp 0 9 Btu F lbm Density rho 53 2 bfft 3 Check Fluid Tables Fig 4 15 Fluid Panel Contents Optimized systems generally operate in the range from 2 5 to 4 0 gpm ton while the ideal system flow rate is somewhere around 3 0 gpm ton Again if the flow rate is changed the selected heat pumps are updated in the loads modules Solution Properties Solution properties are also included in the Fluid panel These include the specific heat and density of the circulating fluid Also a reference label is included so that the designer knows the percentage of antifreeze and antifreeze type however this reference label is not currently linked to the other input parameters The specific heat and density values of the antifreeze are used for the calculation of the heat pump outlet temperature which in turn is used for the bore length calculation 90 AN CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module Additionally the viscosity of the solution may affect the flow type in the pipe which was selected on the U Tube panel The designer must be aware of any changes made The new CFD module models the impact of viscosity changes on system performance In automatic entry mode the user first selects the fluid type and then selects
6. F 100 1 Total Unit Capacity kBtu Hr 763 2 Peak Load kBtu Hr 730 5 Peak Demand kW 57 3 Heat Pump EER COP 13 4 System EER COP System Flow Rate gpm Optional Cooling Tower Boiler Condenser Capacity kBtu hr Cooling Tower Flow Rate gpm Cooling Range F Annual Operating Hours hr yr Boiler Capacity kBtu hr Load Balance ELTT Fig 4 17 Results Panel Contents Fixed Temperature Design Day 93 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module The third subsection of the report lists the heat pump inlet and outlet temperatures of the circulating fluid The fourth subsection lists the total unit capacity the peak loads and demand of all the equipment and the calculated heat pump and system efficiencies The peak load is the maximum and is determined from whichever time period across all the zones has the highest load The peak demand includes all pumps and external energy requirements including those listed in the Extra kW panel Finally the system flow rate is listed in its own subsection The system flow rate is calculated from the peak load divided by 12 000 Btu ton and then multiplied by the flow rate in gpm ton chosen on the Fluid panel It represents the flow rate from the installation out to the buried pipe system Calculation results for lengths and temperatures are always available in the expanded user interface as well as seen in figure 4 18 Calculations can be performed at any time in the ex
7. For example at one time a designer may want to quickly see all of the zones with their loads and corresponding equipment At other times the designer may only need to see a list of the equipment for each zone GLD offers five different zone report options including A concise zone report A detailed zone report An equipment list report A loads report A zone names report Lifecycle Cost and C05 Reports A print button in the finance module allows the designer to print the finance related information in various formats GLD offers four different finance report options including A concise finance report A detailed finance report A concise inputs report A detailed inputs report A financial analysis report Thermal Conductivity Reports A print button in the thermal conductivity module allows the designer to print out a detailed professional report The designer can also print out large color graphs to include in the report Computational Fluid Dynamics Reports An export button in the CFD module allows the designer to export user specified design details into a text file for further processing in a spreadsheet program 22 CHAPTER 1 GLD Overview Reports are described in detail in Chapter 7 Data Reference Files To access the data reference files the user must have an internet browser present in the GLD enabled computer The program will work without the browser but the data reference files may
8. General Features To aid in the piping optimization process the CFD module in Ground Loop Design consists of a set of panels grouped by subject through which the designer can enter and edit the input variables efficiently For example parameters related to fluids are listed on the Fluid panel while options related to the automation of the pipe building process are listed in the Automation panel The idea is that everything related to a single piping optimization project is presented simultaneously and is easily accessible at any time during the design process The tabbed panels can be seen in figure 11 1 below Layout Fluid Automation Circulation Pumps Fig 11 1 CFD Module Panel List The CFD module includes several additional features e GHX AutoBuilder o Direct or reverse return systems More than one bore per parallel circuit option Double GHX Circuit systems Manifold Vault builder Ultra Manifold Vault builder Pipe size exclusion control Flow rate determination for purge velocity Auto supply return headering for purge velocity optimization o Integration with design modules o Circulation pumps Fluids database Fittings database for manual fittings selection A range of wizards for design and modification Customizable design workspace Customizable results displays 000000 0 203 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Detailed properties window Metric and English unit conversions Printed reports
9. Here the user enters the number of GHX Circuits he or she desires per parallel loop Put another way if a designer wants to have two GHX Circuits in series on one parallel loop the designer can enter a 2 here A sample system with 2 circuits per parallel loop can be seen below in figures 11 70 and 11 71 GHX Module Runout A A GHX Header Section 1 C C TOUT Pipe Pair 1 B B Pipe Pair 2 D D E Circuit 1 Circuit 2 Circuit 3 Circuit 4 Fig 11 70 An Example of Two Circuits Per Parallel Loop 281 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Layout Design and Optimization Calculate B GHX Module Supply Return Runout U Circuit 01 E Pipe Pair U Circuit 02 2S GHX Header Section 01 Eh U Circuit 03 Pipe Pair U Circuit 04 Fig 11 71 An Example of Two Circuits Per Parallel Loop Circuits Per One Way Length Here the user enters the number of GHX Circuits he or she desires per one way length Put another way if a designer wants to have two GHX Circuits in parallel or in series for example in a single borehole the designer can enter a 2 here Examples of GHX Circuits in parallel and series can be seen in figures 11 72 and 11 73 below Layout Design and Optimization Calculate B Sheets GHX Module Supply Return Pipe U Circuit 01 U Circuit 02 Fig 11 72 Two Circuits Per One Way Length Parallel Flow Layout Design and Optimizat
10. Optional Cooling Tower section of the Calculate panel Although clicking the slider control can initiate a valid calculation or recalculation the slider 102 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module control generally is employed after initial calculations have been conducted The Load Balance is a slider based control that represents a percentage of the total cooling load both instantaneous peak and annual For example a 100 Load Balance would be equivalent to saying that the entire cooling load of the system would be handled by the cooling tower Conversely a 0 Load Balance would mean that no cooling tower is employed In a typical design it is difficult to predict exactly how much load balance or what size of cooling tower is necessary to match the cooling and heating lengths However using the Load Balance slider control the designer can optimize the system to the lengths desired by directly controlling the amount of cooling load to be handled by the cooling tower In the case where the designer desires the shortest length possible the design requires a perfect balance of the heating and cooling loads to the ground The length from this perfect balance would be the minimum length required to adequately cover the heating load requirement To accomplish this the Load Balance slider needs to be adjusted to the percentage value where the calculated cooling and heating bore lengths are approximately equivalent Note As expected t
11. command found in the Design Studio Loads menu Select Import Loads and an Import Loads window similar to that in Fig 3 17 will appear GLD expects the Excel data to be in the above order and format To import the Excel data simply highlight the four columns in the Excel spreadsheet and copy them onto the clipboard Ctrl C Note highlight only the numeric data DO NOT highlight the column and row descriptions Then in the Import Loads window click on the Excel icon The data will be imported The data can be modified directly in the Import Loads window or by hitting the Modify button the user can open the file in the Equivalent Hours Calculator where the data can be edited as well The user can transfer the modified data into the Average Block Loads module by pressing the Transfer button When both the Calculator and the Import Loads windows are open the program first will ask the user from which window the Calculator or the Import Loads window he or she wishes to transfer data The 63 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones program then prompts the user to decide to which loads heating or cooling the data should be transferred Note that it is possible to import a single column of data Following the column order listed above put the single column of data in the correct position Fill the remaining columns with zeros and then copy all four columns to the clipboard Hourly Loads Data There is only one way of importing hour
12. Headers Number of Circuits 8 Extra One way Circuit Length ft 300 0 0 0 Circuit Pipe Size SDR11 1 in 25 mm Circuits Per Parallel Loop 1 Circuits Per One Way Length 1 Fig 11 6 Basic Circuit Information Panel Contents Number of Circuits Here the user enters the number of GHX Circuits desired in a single GHX Module Circuit Separation 211 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Here the user enters the center to center separation between GHX Circuits This separation distance dictates the GHX Header length between adjacent GHX Circuits One Way Circuit Length Here the user enters the one way length of a single GHX Circuit Circuit Pipe Size Here the user enters the circuit pipe size for a single GHX Circuit Circuits Per Parallel Loop Here the user enters the number of GHX Circuits he or she desires per parallel loop Put another way if a designer wants to have two GHX Circuits in series on one parallel loop the designer can enter a 2 here Figure 11 30 is an example of 2 circuits per parallel loop Circuits Per One Way Length Here the user enters the number of GHX Circuits he or she desires per one way length Put another way if a designer wants to have two GHX Circuits in parallel or in series in the same borehole the designer can enter a 2 here Headers Information The Header tabbed panel stores parameters related to the basic headering system including
13. e average Broc Loads we e e zone manager toads moa e 9 R rosiaonar ceno Prus moase 9 E A _ B _ e_ coz emissions arabes _ Economie Paranas __ Presssure Drop Catculator vient Pump aawecn ewe e 1000 Prooeaed Pumps e _ aescoomo owrsourmyorcs 9 _ Femances veustzaton Toos anacan e e mwsmweeuwscewmo o 3ra Party Bsrecionai communication 9 9 _1esiGoogie senumas e 9 __ SanaaraRepors O e e namen e e Enanos user meas e 9 C e 9 9 mamewmere 9 e customiaton onions f 9 e e memes a 9 wmpmimpss e END USER SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT PLEASE READ THIS END USER SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT End User Agreement CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE BY USING THIS SOFTWARE YOU ARE AGREEING TO USE THE SOFTWARE SOLELY IN ACCORDANCE WITH ITS INTENDED USE AND YOU ARE CONSENTING TO BE BOUND BY THIS END USER AGREEMENT IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO ALL OF THE TERMS OF THIS END USER AGREEMENT PROMPTLY RETURN AND DO NOT USE THE SOFTWARE Single User License Subject to the terms and conditions of this End User Agreement Celsia LLC doing business as Gaia Geothermal Gaia and its suppliers grant to you Customer a non exclusive non transferable dongle based license to use the GROUND LOOP DESIGN software
14. s unique linking system In addition loads data including design day monthly and 8760 hourly loads data from external energy simulation programs as well as from Excel files conveniently can be imported into the loads modules The Premier version also includes a financial module for conducting financial CO emissions and energy costs analyses of various HVAC systems The Thermal Conductivity analysis module an optional module performs soil thermal conductivity and borehole thermal response analyses using in situ thermal conductivity response test data Because of the extensive customization and override features included in the software GLD is suited ideally for both standard and non standard applications which can involve significant variations in equipment loads and operational parameters for each zone in the design The user who may prefer to add his or her specific images or data sheets has the freedom to customize the data reference files With instant direct metric English unit conversions and foreign language capabilities GLD is a truly international program With GLD communicating project parameters equipment requirements and loads data with coworkers partners and vendors anywhere in the world is efficient and easy The program provides a framework for international standardization System Requirements for Running GLD This section lists the hardware and software requirements for running GLD Hardware Requirements
15. 755 9 Peak Load kBtu Hr 755 9 Peak Demand kW 46 0 Seasonal Heat Pump EER COP 18 7 S Heat Pump EER COP 16 4 3 9 Avg Annual Power kWh 2 56E 4 2 51E 4 System Flow Rate gpm 202 7 Optional Cooling Tower Boiler Condenser Capacity kBtu hr i Cooling Tower Flow Rate apm EEEE Cooling Range F Boiler Annual Operating Hours hr yr m 0 Boiler Capacity kBtu hr ESO AES Cooling Tower 0 oO Fig 4 21 Results Panel Contents Fixed Length Monthly Data Results 99 er CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module Lengths Temperatures COOLING HEATING COOLING HEATING Total Length ft 15180 0 15180 0 Peak Unit Inlet F 81 6 43 9 Borehole Length ft 253 0 253 0 Peak Unit Outlet F 90 0 37 8 Fig 4 22 Monthly Data Results in Expanded User Interface The third subsection of the report lists the heat pump inlet and outlet temperatures of the circulating fluid Note that in GLD Premier 2010 these purple numbers are absolute peak temperatures and not average peak temperatures In previous versions of GLD reported results for inlet and outlet temperatures were average peak temperatures By presenting absolute peak temperatures it makes it easier for the designer to compare results from the Design Day cylindrical source theory and the Monthly Data line source theory Some designers enjoy making this comparison because seeing similar results from two divergent heat transfer theories calculation me
16. Calculate button used to refresh the calculations A system to monitor header and branch piping head losses Opening Projects There are two ways to open Surface Water Design projects One is by using the New Surface Water command from the Design Studio File menu and the other is by opening an existing Surface Water Design project gld file Files cannot be opened if other modules with the same name are already open As many files can be opened as the system s memory permits 131 CHAPTER 6 The Surface Water Design Module New Projects New projects may be opened at any time from the Design Studio by choosing New Surface Water from the Design Studio File menu or the toolbar New projects open with standard parameter values that must be edited for new projects In new projects no loads files zon are loaded The user must create a new loads file or open an existing loads file into one of the loads modules Links may be established using the Studio Link system described in Chapter 3 t Existing Projects Existing projects may be opened at any time from the Design Studio by choosing Open from the Design Studio File menu or toolbar The file automatically opens into a new Surface Water Design Project module If a loads file zon is associated with the loaded project the loads file will be loaded automatically into the appropriate loads module and opened along with the project file However if the associate
17. GHX Circuit Note that the Properties Window also contains fluid dynamics results for each circuit These will be reviewed later 236 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module b Piping Module Layout Fluid Automation Circulation Pumps Layout Design and Optimization Calculate El Peak Load M U Alphabetic Categorized Fittings End Fittings Pipe 1 Fittings Pipe 2 How Rate General Pipe 1 Pipe 2 Pressure Drop Reynold s Number Velocity Volume Fig 11 26 The basic GHX Circuit The Supply Return Pipe Pair An individual Supply Return Pipe Pair consist of the following four subcomponents Ag Supply side fitting generally before the supply side pipe A Supply side pipe A Return side pipe A Return side fitting generally after the return side pipe 237 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Note arrows indicate supply return flow directions Also the space between sections is intentional to illustrate the individual subcomponents Each of these subcomponents has a large number of user definable characteristics associated with it including Fittings Ar and A r Fitting type socket tee branch butt tee branch etc Fitting pipe size Fitting equivalent length Fitting name Fitting volume Pipe A and A Pipe size Pipe type Pipe inner diameter Pipe outer diameter Pipe length Extra pipe length Pipe name Pipe volume Note that ea
18. Geothermal Project Power Summary Below the modeling time period the user can see the program s annual energy usage estimate for the geothermal system Results are listed in heating cooling and total columns for ease of review Energy usage is divided up into the following constituent parts e geothermal power the power consumed by the geothermal system e hybrid power the power consumed by the hybrid system if any e total annual power a summation of geothermal and hybrid power e water the amount of water if any consumed by the system on an annual basis e other other fuel sources natural gas fuel oil etc and the annual amount consumed Calculated energy usage values are updated as soon as a change is made in system parameters see below Geothermal System Details The bottom two thirds of the Geothermal panel displays system details related to the geothermal and hybrid system Details of the geothermal and hybrid system if any can be found on separate tabbed panels The geothermal system tabbed panel can be seen below in figure 9 8 and the hybrid component tabbed panel can be seen in figure 9 9 178 CHAPTER 9 The Financial Module Primary Geothermal Hybrid Component COOLING HEATING Eqv Full Load Hours 255 fO 4023 hr Peak Capacity 197 7 kBtu hr 373 5 kBtu hr Average Heat Pump Efficiency 22 0 EER 3 8 COP Circulation Pump Input Power du kw 12 kw Pump Power 15
19. Head Loss per 100 feet Cooling 7 0 ft hd Heating 28 ft hd Fig 6 5 Piping Header Panel Contents Header Parameters The GLD Surface Water module assumes that a standard supply and return line design will consist of mains followed by a Manifold that splits the mains into the headers Headers are generally the first pipes to enter the ground or water They can then branch off once more if necessary branch lines For small systems the mains may be the headers and there may not be branches For larger systems there may be many headers and multiple levels of branches In the Piping panel the model employed allows for multiple headers and multiple first level branches off of those headers If further branching is required the head loss calculations will need to be calculated and added separately Their effect on the calculated piping length which cannot be included will depend on their length All headers are assumed to have an identical pipe size and an approximately equivalent flow The same is true for the branch lines If there are no branches the number of branches should be set to zero The Surface Water Design module starts with only a single primary header 138 CHAPTER 6 The Surface Water Design Module GLD uses the header information so that the heat transfer losses or gains are taken into account The software then uses this corrected value iteratively to modify the length of the circuit loop piping so th
20. Headering System 245 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module For the GHX Header system described in figure 11 32 the GHX circuits are described in figure 11 33 Notice how the Reynold s Numbers decrease from 5801 in circuit 1 down to 4403 in circuit 8 a reduction of nearly 25 It is quite clear that the different length flow paths in direct return systems result in unbalanced systems Reverse Return Systems Reverse return GHX Headers generally are more complex to design although not with the CFD module take more effort to build and can require more total pipe and hence offer a higher total pressure drop compared to direct return GHX Headers The return pipe of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout may be longer in the reverse return case compared to the direct return case This is easily visualized look at return pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout in both figure 34 and figure 30 it is longer in the reverse return case Of course if a reverse return GHX Header system follows the horseshoe approach the length of return pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout in it could be more or less the same length as return pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout in the direct return system This would reduce the lower pressure drop benefit associated with shorter direct return systems It all depends on the particular design GHX Module Supply Return Runout A A GHX Header Section 42 C C GH
21. IV Show Legend 3 4 6 6 8 9 149 14 17 43 Time Months Fig 3 15a Graphed Monthly Loads Data Pump Selection Although the selection process is identical to selection in the Zone Manager loads module the results are slightly different Figure 3 16 shows the result after selecting a pump and then modifying the partial load factor to 0 9 on the dominant load Heat Gains side Design Day Loads Design Day Loads 7 0 Days Week Time of Day Heat Gains Heat Losses kBtujHr kBtujHr Transfer 8am Non 0 0 300 0 Noon p m 500 0 200 0 Calculate H _ Calculate Hours 4pm 8pm 2000 0 0 Monthly Loads 8pm 8am OO 00 Annual Eqivalent Full Load Hours mHeat Pump Specifications at Design Temperature and Flow Rate Custom Pump Pump Name Cooling Heating Select Capacity kBtu Hr 665 6 5663 Details Power kW 44 45 41 01 EERJCOP 125 ae Flow Rate gpm 125 0 75 0 Clear Partial Load Factor 0 90 0 53 Fig 3 16 Average Block Loads Pump Selection 56 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones In this case an average pump was selected for the zone and that pump was given a partial load factor of 1 00 for the dominant cooling side Since the partial load factor the ratio between the peak loads and the total equipment capacity varies depending on designer preference it can have any value of 1 0 or less Additionally the partial load factor will remain constant as the contin
22. It assumes that the temperature should not decrease with constant heat input The default is 5 Flow Rate The flow rate test checks the standard deviation of the flow rate If the standard deviation exceeds the threshold as a percentage of the average it fails The default is 5 Slope Stability The slope stability test divides the total range of interest into 5 sections and then calculates the slope for each section where each section is defined as the range from the starting point to each section s end point With an ideal data set all slopes would be the same The slopes of each section are compared to the overall slope If the slope varies by more than the user defined threshold the test fails The default value is 25 Water Flow Test The water flow test is similar to the above test but checks to see if consecutive slopes are decreasing which would suggest water movement and an invalid thermal conductivity measurement The default is 10 Graphs The Thermal Conductivity module automatically graphs conductivity test data after the CSV data file from a conductivity test is imported into the module These graphs are displayed in a new stand alone Graphing Module that enables designers to review graphs and calculated results simultaneously Note that in the new Graphing Module users can left click the mouse and drag a box around an area of interest in the graph Users can then release the mouse button to zoom
23. The typical operation of the Thermal Conductivity module would include the following steps Open a new Thermal Conductivity module Choose metric or English units Enter soil parameters in the Diffusivity Panel if desired On the Bore Panel enter the borehole depth Import the in situ data set Review the graphs that appear in the Graphing Module On the Results Panel hit the Calculate button Modify calculation interval if necessary to maximize overlap of raw data and best fit lines in Temp vs LN Time graph Save and or print the conductivity test report oet ae See Entering Data into the Tabbed Panels Ground Loop Design s tabbed panel system provides for easy organization of and direct access to the relatively large number of design parameters associated with a particular project This section describes the Diffusivity Flow Bore and Results panels Diffusivity Information pertaining to diffusivity estimate calculations can be found in the Diffusivity panel as seen in figure 10 2 below Users can enter estimates of soil specific heat density and moisture content By pressing the Check Soil Tables button users can quickly access reference files that may contain some of these data After the user calculates the thermal conductivity on the Results tab the program automatically estimates the diffusivity based on the calculated conductivity and user input soil values The estimated diffusivity is displayed on this panel and
24. U Circuit 03 E198 GHX Header Section 03 General U Pipe 1 Ej GHX Header Section 04 Pipe 2 U Circuit 05 E Pressure Drop E S GHX Header Section 05 End Fitting 1 Pressure Drop ft hd 0 00 U Circuit 06 Pipe 1 Fitting 1 Pressure Drop ft hd 0 00 Eb GHX Header Section 06 Pipe 1 Pressure Drop ft hd 1 3 U Circuit 07 Pipe 2 Fitting 1 Pressure Drop ft hd 0 00 EE GHX Header Section 07 Pipe 2 Pressure Drop ft hd 1 3 U Circuit 08 Total Branch Pressure Drop ft hd 2 5 Total Child Pressure Drop ft hd 0 0 Total Local Pressure Drop ft hd 2 5 Reynold s Number Pipe 1 Reynold s Number 4997 Pipe 2 Reynold s Number 4997 Velocity Pipe 1 Velocity ft s 0 88 Pipe 2 Velocity ft s 0 88 Volume Fig 11 82 A Sample Property Window Results For An Eight GHX Circuit Reverse Return GHX Module Note that the user can expand and contract the details in the Properties Windows as necessary to optimize his or her interpretive space Also note that total pressure drop for an entire nested component family such as a GHX Module can be seen by clicking on the top parent component GHX Module Supply Return Pipe in fig X and viewing the Total Branch Pressure Drop in the Pressure Drop section of the Properties Window Also note that while the detail available in the Properties Window is unsurpassed it is not the fastest way to review a system For a faster system review designers can use the Layout Mana
25. borehole design the Average Block loads module is a better option than the Zone Manager and in the case of monthly and hourly inlet temperatures the only option The required input consists of only a single set of loads which represents the entire installation This single set of loads data optionally can be entered in a new month by month loads screen for inlet temperature calculations Hourly loads data can be imported using a csv file or a proprietary file type from one of several energy simulation tools that now interact bi directionally with GLD Premier 2010 The pump matching model in the Average Block module is slightly different from the model for the individual zones A single pump type is selected from the GLD Heat Pump Database to approximate the average pump characteristics of the installation For example if the designer is planning to use the highest efficiency pumps a pump in a series with a higher coefficient of performance COP might be chosen over a lower efficiency pump If specific pump characteristics are required they can be input directly overriding the automatic functions Two views of the Average Block Loads Module are shown in figures 3 10 and 3 11 Although it resembles a single zone in the Loads tabbed panel of the Zone Manager loads module it has some differences there is an hourly data check box a monthly loads button there is no list of zones and the pump matching section has a different format 50
26. g BJEUIPIONOD A 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 X Coordinate Plane meters Note that this grid is in meters and that each black dot represents a borehole 2 Open up a text editor and in the first line of a new text file specify whether the grid file is in metric or English units Since this grid is in meters the first line of the grid file should say Metric 3 In the text file begin listing the boreholes in the grid file as can be seen below Note that the first borehole is at the origin 0 0 Grid file for sample X Y grid Metric 0 0 0 8 0 16 0 24 0 32 0 40 0 48 0 56 0 64 10 0 10 8 etc 80 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module After a grid file is created it must be saved in the following folder Gaia Geothermal GLD2010 GridFiles so that the GLD program can find the grid file After creating and saving a grid file load it into the heat exchanger module by first checking the Use External File checkbox and then hitting the Select button to choose the desired file as seen in figure 4 7 Vertical Grid Arrangement Borehole Number 16 Clear Show Filename GridData txt Fig 4 7 Selecting an External Grid File The file name will appear directly below the checkbox In this case the filename is GridData txt When a valid grid file has been selected the number of boreholes in the file is displayed and the standard rows across rows down and borehole separation text b
27. gpm Auto Adjust and Auto Size Option Designers have an even more advanced control at their disposal in the CFD module the auto size option With this option both the minimum and maximum target velocities impact the final result When a user selects the Auto Adjust option as mentioned above the Auto Size checkbox also becomes available This can be seen in figure 11 14 When a user checks both boxes adjusts the minimum and maximum flow rates as necessary returns to the Layout panel and hits Calculate the CFD module will automatically adjust the pipe sizes across the GHX Module runouts and GHX headers to minimize the purging flow rate and pressure drop while ensuring that the target purging velocity range is achieved throughout the piping system In other words when a user selects both Auto Adjust and Auto Size the CFD module designs a new piping system or modifies an existing piping system for optimal purging flow The tool that performs this calculation is 221 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module called the GHX Header Design Optimizer and it is explained in great detail at the end of this chapter Some designers wonder about the purpose of the maximum target velocity The maximum target velocity impacts the auto piping sizing selections in the following way if the user specifies a low maximum target velocity say 5 ft s the auto sizing function has flexibility to choose a larger pipe diameter that offer
28. he or she can add a circulation pump by right clicking on the component that will be attached to the circulation pump A screen similar to the one in figure 11 97 below will appear Layout Design and Optimization Calculate Add New Pipe Pair U Circuit 01 92 GHX Header Add New Reverse Return Pipe Pair U Circuit Add New Circuit E 26 GHX Hi U Add New Ultra Manifold se Add New Manifold Add New GHX Module Pipe and Fitting Manager Copy Selection Paste Selection Delete Add Circulation Pump Remove Circulation Pump p Fig 11 97 Adding a Circulation Pump After the user selects Add Circulation Pump a circulation pump will appear on the appropriate component as can be seen in figure 11 98 below Notice the red arrow that appears This red arrow is the CFD Module symbol for a circulation pump 305 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Layout Design and Optimization Calculate B EET 4 GHX Module Runout U Circuit 01 E 2S GHX Header Section 01 U Circuit 02 2S GHX Header Section 02 U Circuit 03 E S GHX Header Section 03 U Circuit 04 2S GHX Header Section 04 U Circuit 05 2S GHX Header Section 05 U Circuit 06 2S GHX Header Section 06 U Circuit 07 H9 GHX Header Section 07 U Circuit 08 Fig 11 98 A Circulation Pump Has Been Added After adding a circula
29. if any Typically designers and engineers specify these costs on a per square foot of the total conditioned space square footage basis The finance module can take these values into account in conjunction with the average building costs when calculating the annual and NPV lifetime costs associated with different HVAC systems The system type dropdown menu enables designers to select one of eight different types of systems including geothermal heat pumps boilers furnaces air source heat pumps gas fired heat pumps air cooled chillers water cooled chillers and unitary air conditioners The fuel type dropdown menu enables designers to select one of several different fuel types for the system type that the designer selected above Each of these system type fuel type combinations has three optional cost parameters associated with it These parameters include installation costs per square foot maintenance costs per square foot per year and salvage value per square foot all on a per square foot basis Experienced HVAC engineers oftentimes have a good rule of thumb estimate for the per square foot installation costs including capital equipment for a variety of HVAC systems For geothermal systems costs vary greatly depending on the geology drilling conditions type of heat 167 CHAPTER 9 The Financial Module exchanger utilized etc This makes it a bit challenging to have a rule of thumb for geothermal installation cos
30. may be wise to save any changes under different filenames Both loads modules are stand alone entities The files are entirely independent of project design files This means that an entire installation loading design can be entered matched with pumps optimized and saved without ever opening a design module This is valuable for users who wish to keep the loads entry and pump selection completely separate from the studio s geothermal design modules Now users can work on designs and load inputs at different times and can use the same loads files for various projects styles of project New zone files can be created by clicking the New button in any loads module or by clearing all of the current loads information with the Clear button followed by the New button The designer provides a filename when the zone file is saved Zone files can be opened and saved using the Open and Save buttons on the Loads panel 39 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones I The Zone Manager Loads Module For commercial non centralized installations it is often necessary to divide loads into separate zones that individually are served by specific heat pumps This type of system has many advantages including lower installation and service costs as well as a highly accurate method of matching the loads to the heat exchanger From the time specific loads data that the user provides GLD determines the maximum heating and cooling loads of the entire system
31. power and EER COP result from the chosen input parameters Average values are used initially but by varying the parameters the designer can see how well the newly created model matches the data set used for data entry 34 CHAPTER 2 Adding Editing Heat Pumps General Cooling Heating Load Temperatures Load Flows Test Test SOURCE LOAD RESULTS EWT Flow EAT WB Flow Capacity Power EER deaF gpm degF CFM MBtu hr kW COP 95 0 35 66 2 1140 age ole TUG EAT DB deg F 45 0 Ez 68 0 1140 Site 2 58 3h Fig 2 7 Heat Pump Test Panel Often any input errors will be evident immediately from the test by comparing the test results with the input sheet Additionally the user can use this test to make certain that the pump data are accurate over the particular range of temperatures flows etc that he or she typically uses and then modify the data if necessary Exiting the Edit Add Heat Pumps Module After editing or adding heat pumps and calculating all necessary coefficients the user should make sure that the pumps are saved by clicking the Save button on the Pump Series control bar When the pumps are securely saved the Save button will become disabled Clicking the close button in the upper right hand corner of the lower pane closes the Pumps Edit Pane and clicking the close button in the upper right hand corner of the Edit Add Heat Pumps window closes the Edit Add Heat Pumps
32. sese 28 Creating a New Series and or Manufacturer sess eee 28 Editing Pump Data dicitor tee este depen Seti eu a Pe 29 Pump Series Controls seeren noe E a fo IRIURE EVE DEED a 29 Pump Edit Controls eee ane e eee ee teen cence EE 30 Save Control ei cette E S Ree E ONE tenet 30 Edit Pump Information Control eseseesess 30 Delete Series Control c i ieetot erecto Free ES e 30 General Information cce tico ie teet pre E ne D ater a 31 Capacity Power and Flow Rates cece cece ee eee ee eee ee eee ee ees 31 Load Side Corrections 2 2 nna eee ncee tree meme 32 Load Temperatures Panel cece eee ce eee ee ee ence ee es 32 Load Flows Panel et mh 33 Testing Input Data 5 iere Rr t ave RE acs 34 Exiting the Add Edit Heat Pumps Module cssses 35 Heat Pump File Descriptions 0 c cece nce IH e se emere 35 Adding Pump Sets Obtained from External Sources 0 ec eeeee cence eee ee eee ee ees 36 Other Resources eere PERRO PHOT RH o depen 37 Chapter 3 Loads and Zones eene OO The Ground Loop Design Loads Model sese 38 ZONE PIES 3 adole de ED RUE pA Ii heen ds nega tee S TUN SU ye EH EIIR 39 The Zone Manager Loads Module ssssssssseee e eens teens eee eaenaene es 40 Managing Zones in the Loads Tabbed Panel cceeeeeeeene eee eee een
33. the most commonly modified parameters as well as calculation results are always visible as seen below in figure 4 1 Temperatures p j COOLING HEATING COOLING HEATING Total Length ft 13115 0 13115 0 Peak Unit Inlet F 83 4 44 6 Borehole Length ft 262 3 262 3 Peak Unit Outlet F 94 2 37 1 Results Fluid Soil U Tube Pattern Extra kw Information COOLING HEATING Total Length ft 13115 0 13115 0 Prediction Time 10 0 years Borehole Number 50 50 Design Method Borehole Length ft 262 3 262 3 Ground Temperature Change F N A N A C Fixed Temperature Fixed Length Peak Unit Inlet F 83 4 44 6 Inlet Temperatures Peak Unit Outlet F 94 2 37 1 90 0 400 F Total Unit Capacity kBtu Hr 755 9 810 7 Borehole Length 262 ft Peak Load kBtu Hr 755 9 810 7 Peak Demand kW 111 0 120 0 Average Heat Pump EER COP 15 3 Use External File System EER COP 13 0 Avg Annual Power kWh 3 13E 4 Borehole Number 50 Rows Across 19 System Flow Rate gpm 157 5 Rows Down 5 r Optional Cooling Tower Boiler S m Cooling Tower Separation 15 1 ft Condenser Capacity kBtu hr 0 0 s 0 Cooling Tower Flow Rate gpm 0 0 REE Cooling Range F 16 0 Boiler 0 Annual Operating Hours hr yr 0 m 0 0 Boiler Capacity kBtu hr 0 0 Lond Balance Load Balance ELIT Fig 4 1 Expanded User Interface The Borehole Design module includes se
34. 0 Unit Outlet F 95 2 43 7 Tec Temperatures Unit Outlet F 95 2 43 7 Total Unit Capacity kBtu Hr 1976 9 1964 5 850 F 500 F Total Unit Capacity kBtu Hr 1976 9 1964 5 Peak Load kBtu Hr 1626 0 1787 0 Peak Demand kW 130 9 111 6 Peak Load kBtu Hr 1626 0 1787 0 Heat Purnp EER COP 12 4 4 1 Peak Demand kW 130 9 111 6 System EER COP Da AS GridLayout Heat Pump EER COP 124 44 yem d s Use External File System EER COP 12 4 47 System Flow Rate gpm 406 5 446 8 Borehole Number 180 System Flow Rate gpm 406 5 446 8 Optional Cooling Tower Boiler Rows Across 12 Cooling Tower TES E Optional Cooling Tower Boiler EET Condenser Capacity kBtu hr 0 0 own r oli S Condenser Capacity kBtu hr 0 0 ple Cooling Tower Flow Rate gpm Separation 40 0 ft i ec SEED Cooling Tower Flow Rate gpm 0 0 n Cooling Range F Cooling Tower Boiler Cooling Range F 10 0 zd Annual Operating Hours hr yr 0 Annual Operating Hours hr yr 0 2 Boiler Capacity MBtu h ie Boiler Capacity MBtu h 214 4 Toad Balance BELLI Load Balance ELIT Fig 1 2 Expanded Interface Borehole Design Module Description The Borehole Design module allows the user to enter various parameters with respect to the desired vertical borehole system Input is arranged in panels corresponding to the type of input as shown in figure 1 3 Key design parameters can be modified quickly in the expanded user interfac
35. 06 8 Volume U Circuit 07 U circuit 08 Fig 11 88 Viewing Results in the Review Panel In the Review Panel users can view the same results that can be viewed in the Layout Manager Workspace Some designers find the results in the Review Panel to be easier to review because of the vertical column format Users are able to calculate updated results from within the Review Panel review detailed results for a particular component in the Properties Window and adjust the viewed results as necessary using the same Display button Figure 11 89 below for example shows a variety results pipe size fluid velocity and Reynold s Number that would be interesting when reviewing design issues related to purging 297 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Layout Design and Optimization Calculate B Pipe 1 Size ipe ipe i i ity Pipe 1 Reynold s Number Pipe 2 Reynold s Number tf GHX Module Supply Return Pipe 2 2 2 22307 U circuit 01 35 GHX Header Section 01 U circuit 02 9 GHX Header Section 02 U Circuit 03 35 GHX Header Section 03 U Circuit 04 35 GHX Header Section 04 U circuit 05 3S GHX Header Section 05 U circuit 06 35 GHX Header Section 06 U Circuit 07 9 GHX Header Section 07 U circuit 08 Fig 11 89 Viewing A Set of Results Well Suited for Purging Design Users have the option of sorting data by column by clicking on the top of any of the columns Reorgan
36. 3 In these systems the return pipe of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout pipe A in figure 11 34 is connected to the farthest GHX Circuit For comparison s sake in direct return systems as can be seen in fig 11 30 above the return pipe of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout A is connected to the closest GHX Circuit Reverse return systems are inherently flow balancing which has made them the standard in the geothermal industry Figure 11 35 is a reverse return three GHX Circuit GHX Module in the Layout Manager Workspace that is identical to the GHX Module in figure 11 34 It shows how the Layout Manager Workspace displays direct return systems The flow paths have been added to enhance understanding As can be seen in figure 11 35 reverse return GHX Header sections and pipe pairs are represented by this symbol 247 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module kd fluid supply flow paths fluid return flow paths Fig 11 35 Fluid Flow Paths of Reverse Return GHX Module The colored and dotted fluid supply and return flow paths for the reverse return system can be seen in figure 11 35 Note that why the supply flow path identical to that in the direct return system the return flow path is very different Recall that in the direct return systems the GHX Circuit which looks like the letter u is like a U Turn that receives a downward flowing supply flow and shifts
37. A full installation has the following minimum hardware requirements e GBRAM 2 GB recommended e 150 MB hard disk space 300 MB recommended e Intel Core 2 Duo Processor for optimal simulations Software Requirements GLD has the following software requirements e System running under Windows e Netscape Navigator or Internet Explorer PREFACE Operating System Requirements GLD will operate under Windows 9X ME NT 2000 XP VISTA 7 GLD will operate under Apple Macintosh Parallels or Boot Camp running a Windows OS as well Internet Browser Requirements An Internet browser is required only for viewing the data reference files and not for general program operation To access the data reference files at least one of the following browsers is necessary e Netscape Communicator Version 5 0 or later e Internet Explorer Version 5 0 or later Installation Procedure If you have problems installing GLD please visit the support page at http www gaiageo com or contact your distributor Note that you can also download GLD from the internet at http www gaiageo com The downloadable version always will be the most recent release Initial Installation For CD versions of GLD installation should start automatically If not the software may be installed by clicking on the Setup exe file included on the disk The program is set to install in the folder Main Drive Program Files Gaia Geothermal GLD2010 If desired the user
38. Design System Flow Rate Flow Rate 3 0 gpm ton Solution Properties M Automatic Entry Mode Fluid Type Water Freezing Point 2 v F 0 0 by Weight Specific Heat Cp 00 Btu F lbm Density rho 52 4 bfft 3 Check Fluid Tables Fig 5 9 Fluid Panel Contents Design Method Fixed Temperature Inlet Temperatures 85 0 t BED CT Fig 5 10 Inlet Temperatures in Expanded User Interface Solution Properties Solution properties are also included in the Fluid panel These include the specific heat and density of the circulating fluid Also a reference label is included so that the designer knows the percentage of antifreeze and antifreeze type however this reference label is not currently linked to the other input parameters The specific heat and density values of the antifreeze are used for the calculation of the heat pump outlet temperature which in turn is used for the trench length calculation 123 AN CHAPTER 5 The Horizontal Design Module Additionally the viscosity of the solution may affect the flow type in the pipe which was selected on the Piping panel The designer must be aware of any changes made In automatic entry mode the user first selects the fluid type and then selects the desired freezing temperature GLD automatically displays the specific heat and density for the fluid selection In manual entry mode the user manually selects and inputs the sp
39. Extra kW Information Calculate COOLING HEATING Total Length ft 4087 2 8187 8 Circuit Length ft 371 6 545 9 Number af Circuits 11 Max Parallel Circuits 11 Unit Inlet F 55 0 Unit Outlet F 64 4 Approach Temp F 5 9 Total Unit Capacity kBtu Hr 415 5 Peak Load kBtu Hr 130 6 Peak Demand kw 8 4 Heat Pump EER COP 20 5 System EER COP 14 3 Total Head Loss ft hd 8 6 Header Loss ft hd 5 0 Circuit Loss ft hd 3 6 System Flow Rate gprn Primary Header gom Branch Header gpm Circuit gpm Fig 6 9 Calculate Panel Contents Lengths Temperatures COOLING HEATING COOLING HEATING Total Length Ft 4087 2 8187 8 Unit Inlet F 55 0 36 0 Circuit Length ft 371 6 545 9 Unit Outlet F 64 4 30 1 Fig 6 10 Results as Displayed in Expanded User Interface 143 CHAPTER 6 The Surface Water Design Module Calculations Calculate Fig 6 11 Calculate Button in Expanded User Interface Reporting Section The surface water report has five sections The first deals with the circuit pipe and includes the total length the length for one circuit the number of circuits and the maximum allowable number of parallel circuits shown in red If the maximum allowable number of parallel circuits exceeds the actual number of circuits the actual number of circuits may be increased in the Piping panel to reduce the individual circuit lengths and thus reduce head
40. Flow Rate Velocity Reynold s Number Volume Pressure Drop Total Branch Pressure Drop Group Name Fig 11 18a Selected Results for Display Layout Design and Optimization Calculate B 3 GHX Module Supply Return Runout 200 0 ft 4461 U Circuit 01 300 0 ft 4034 GHX Header Section 01 20 0 ft 2228 U Circuit 02 300 0 ft 4024 Fig 11 18b Sample of Displayed Results In purge mode a third button becomes visible as seen below Wels This third button provides ready access to automated controls such as auto adjusting the purging flow rate and auto sizing the headering system These features are described in more detail below Section Two The Layout Manager Workspace The left side section of the Layout panel is the Layout Manager Workspace as can be seen in figure 11 16 The Layout Manager Workspace is the area in which the designer builds modifies and reviews piping systems The Layout Manager Workspace is in many ways the heart of the enter CFD module Consequently it provides the user with significant flexibility and customization These customization features will now be introduced 228 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Customizing the Layout Panel Because piping systems can be quite large sometimes the designer will want to adjust the size and position of the Layout Manager Workspace to optimize its functionality Layout Manager Workspace
41. GHX Header Section 02 U Circuit 03 Fig 11 62 AII that remains of the GHX Module after deleting GHX Header Section 3 and Everything Below It 272 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Modifying Parameters with the Properties Windows After manually creating a piping system or at any time in the creation process the user can modify the properties of any of the components One way to do so is via the Properties Window which is usually found to the right of the Layout Manager Workspace To modify a particular component the user first clicks on the component with the mouse and then adjusts the parameters in the Properties Window For example in figure 11 63 below the first pipe pair has been selected As can be seen in both the Layout Manager Workspace and the Properties window the pipe pair name has been changed from the default name GHX Module Supply Return Runout to Main Supply Return Runout Pipe Pair In addition the Pipe 1 supply and Pipe 2 return lengths have been set to 100 feet with 3 diameter pipe When setting up a system manually users have control over name group name and individual pipe name group name will be described later length extra length size type as well a similar level of control over pipe fittings The user is encouraged to explore the fittings as well as other options in the Properties Window Note that properties that display calculated results such as velocity wil
42. GLD software license is stored on the USB dongle that came with your program This dongle enables you effortlessly to transfer GLD from one computer to another Please be careful not to misplace this dongle Lost dongles can not be replaced without the purchase of a new license If the dongle is not attached to your computer GLD will function as a trial version which is functional except for a few design parameters that are locked at certain values When you insert the dongle into a free USB port on your computer for the first time your computer most likely will recognize the dongle and after a few seconds the dongle light will turn on When it turns on your license will activate However if your computer indicates that the dongle is new hardware you have two options for installing the dongle driver How to Install the Dongle Driver Windows 7 Vista XP and Windows 2000 users with internet access If your computer has access to the internet your computer can automatically install the drivers Follow along with the Windows new hardware wizard to install the drivers The process takes a few minutes When the installation is complete the dongle light will turn on All other users PREFACE Via Windows Explorer navigate to Main Drive Program Files Gaia Geothermal GLD2010 Extras In the Extras folder you will find a HASPUserSetup exe program Run the program to install the dongle driver When the installation is comp
43. Hr kW EER PLF 1 EV048 2 62 0 89 0 0 0 0 0 93 5 7 5 12 5 95 2 EV048 2 288202 S550 D Oon gacn Fes We EE 3 EV048 1 46 0 36 0 21 0 0 0 46 7 3 7 12 5 98 4 EV030 1 226202 18 0 15 0 00 s30 0 Zale 4 3 87 5 EV048 2 20 0 36 0 90 0 0 0 93 5 7 5 12 5 96 6 GEHA 036 2 62 0 56 0 0 0 0 0 70 4 5 8 12 0 88 Y l EV048 2 36 0 15 0 8 0 8 0 95 3 6 2 4 5 38 4 2 EV048 2 Je 8 70 Sa 5 0 495 9 62 7 aos 19 3 EV048 1 38 0 2050 10 0 29D Are 3515 A 5 sep 4 EV030 T 24006 1070 3020 oso sever 251 o a ser 5 EV048 2 759206 Veo 231 0 23 0 9553 6 27 4 5 356 6 GEHA 036 2 42 0 10 0 15 0 18 0 66 0 5 3 3 7 64 Y COOLING HEATING Total Unit Capacity MBtu Hr 469 6 464 7 Peak Load MBtu Hr 342 0 243 0 Peak Demand kW 27 3 17 3 Heat Pump EER COP 12 5 4 2 Peak Load Period Noon 4 p m 8 a m Noon FlowRate 3 0 gpmjton Unit Inlet F 85 0 50 0 LIII Fig 3 3 Zone Manager Summary View Entering Loads Loads can be entered directly in the individual zone data windows back in the Main View of the Loads tabbed panel A sample entry is shown in figure 3 4 The GLD loads input methodology may be new for some designers Consequently an additional and alternative description of the methodology can be found at the end of this chapter 42 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones Design Day Loads According to the model that GLD uses in the Zone Manager average peak load data for every hour of a twenty four hour day can be included if desired Howeve
44. If necessary data from this file can be imported into Excel Optional Cooling Tower Fluid Cooler and Boiler Section Cooling towers and boilers can be added to designs via the sliders that are located on both the Results panel figure 4 16 and in the expanded interface as seen in figure 4 25 The Cooling Towers and Boilers can be run independently or together in order to balance required lengths or temperatures Cooling Tower Boiler 0 c I Load Balance Fig 4 25 Cooling Tower and Boiler Controls in Expanded User Interface Cooling Towers Although typically not recommended because of increased running and maintenance costs the user may elect to add a cooling tower to a cooling dominated geothermal system to reduce the total boring lengths and therefore the total initial installation costs To facilitate this design choice GLD offers the cooling tower or hybrid option In any case where the calculated boring lengths for cooling are longer than those for heating the difference in the lengths can be eliminated through the use of a cooling tower tied in parallel to the geothermal ground loop This requires that either the cooling tower capacity is chosen such that both the peak load and the annual load to the ground are balanced or if a full balance is unnecessary a capacity is chosen that allows for downsizing the loop to an acceptable length To aid in the sizing process a Load Balance control is provided in the
45. Pipe Information In this section the designer enters the one way length of the supply return pipe pair that connects the Manifold Vault with its parent component in the design In many cases the parent component of a Manifold or Vault will be a circulation pump system Therefore the user may choose to enter the pipe distance from the Manifold Vault to the circulation pump The user also enters the supply return pipe pair diameter here Note that the GHX Module Builder is pre populated with design parameters These default parameters can be updated modified as necessary in the Automation Panel and on the GHX Module subpanel OK and Cancel Buttons After the designer has reviewed and modified the parameters he or she can hit the OK button and the Manifold Vault will be auto built in the Layout Manager Workspace An example of an auto built direct return Manifold can be seen in figure 11 77 Layout Design and Optimization Calculate B EET 4 Manifold Supply Return Runout Manifold Pipe Section 01 72 Manifold Pipe Section 02 Manifold Pipe Section 03 Manifold Pipe Section 04 Fig 11 77 A Manifold with Five Outlets At this point the designer can use the GHX Module Builder if so desired and auto build four GHX Modules and attach them to the four Manifold pipe sections An example of a completed system can be seen in figure 11 78 286 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynami
46. Provided that a Customer has notified Gaia of such substantial non conformance or defect during the applicable warranty period and b Gaia has confirmed such Software or media to be substantially non conforming or defective as Customer s sole and exclusive remedy and Gaia s and its suppliers entire liability under this limited warranty Gaia will at its option repair replace or refund the Software free of charge Except as expressly provided in this End User Agreement the Software is provided AS IS without warranty of any kind Gaia does not warrant that the Software is error free or that Customer will be able to operate the Software without problems or interruptions Gaia reserves the right to charge additional fees for repairs or replacements performed outside of the limited warranty period This warranty does not apply if the Software i is licensed for beta evaluation testing or demonstration purposes for which Gaia does not receive a license fee ii has been altered except by Gaia iii has not been installed operated repaired or maintained in accordance with instructions supplied by Gaia iv has been subjected to abnormal physical or electrical stress misuse negligence or accident or v is used in ultrahazardous activities If the dongle license key becomes damaged replacement keys can be obtained for a 150 fee To obtain a replacement key for a damaged key Customer must send the damaged key to Gaia or a Gaia aut
47. Thermal Conductivity and Diffusivity of Sand and Clay Soils Table 2 Thermal Properties of Rocks at TDF Table 3 Earth Temperatures Soil Swing and Phase Constants for U S Cities Table 4 Earth Temperatures Soil Swing and Phase Constants for Canadian Cities The first two Soil Properties tables included with GLD provide various soil parameters including ranges for thermal conductivity k and thermal diffusivity for various types of soils These tables should not be considered accurate for a given location however they should provide the designer with a realistic range within which their own measurement results should fall The third and fourth tables contain mean earth temperatures and other parameters for U S and Canadian cities These tables particularly may be useful for horizontal designs Pipe Properties Pipe properties refer to any data related to the piping The Pipe Properties tables included with GLD are related to either the borehole thermal resistance or the pipe physical data They are listed below Table 1 Thermal Conductivities of Typical Grouts and Backfills Table 2 Pipe and Tube Dimensions Table 3 Required Flow Rates to Achieve 2 ft s SDR11 Pipe The first table provides thermal conductivities for some typical grouts The second lists the physical dimensions inner and outer diameter for common pipe sizes in various types of pipe The third although unnecessary for the associated calculations provides
48. Yer In GLD2010 the minimum center to center distance between adjacent trenches has been reduced 114 CHAPTER 5 The Horizontal Design Module EF Horizontal Design Project HorizontalSample Results Fluid Soil Piping Configuration Extra kw Information Trench Layout Number 3 Depth 60 ft Separation 20 0 ft Width BO in Pipe Configuration in Trench EN Offset FO Y Total Number of Pipes zl io o Vertical Separation Y 24 0 in k x 2l Horizontal Separation X 120 in Modeling Time Period Prediction Time 10 0 years Fig 5 2 Configuration Panel Contents Configuration Trench Number 3 per Separation 200 Fr Depth gg Fe Width Bp in Fig 5 3 Configuration Controls in Expanded User Interface Pipe Configuration in Trench The designer defines the physical arrangement of pipe in the trenches in this section 115 CHAPTER 5 The Horizontal Design Module STRAIGHT PIPE CONFIGURATIONS In the case of the three straight pipe configurations the user also provides the total number of pipes and the horizontal X and vertical Y separation of the pipes in the trench An additional offset meaning a horizontal shift between adjacent vertical layers can be included if desired Single Pipe Vertical Alignment e In this arrangement the user creates a single column of pipes The number of pipes chosen defines how many layers will be included Each pipe is separated
49. a way of distinguishing one project from another Except for the dates the information panel input boxes contain only text and any desired format may be used when filling out the form Note that to reduce repetitive data entry designer and company information can be entered in the Settings dropdown menu at the top of the design studio This information then automatically populates part of the Information panel 74 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module RI Borehole Design Project verticalsampleforManual E x Results Fluid Soil U Tube Pattern Extra kw Information Project Information Project Name Borehole Design Sample Project Designer Name D B Engineer Date 10 5 2007 Y Project Start Date 10 5 2007 X Client Name BC Corp Address Line 1 1333 Any St Address Line 2 suite 2200 City Anytown Phone 555 555 1212 State Fax 555 555 1213 Zip p1711 Email angineer abc com Comments This is a sample borehole project file for Ground Loop Design Fig 4 2 Information Panel Contents Extra kW Additional energy that is utilized by the system can be entered in the Extra kW panel The entry boxes are shown in figure 4 3 This panel is included for entire system average efficiency calculations The top entry box Circulation Pumps is for the energy required by the system circulation pumps The middle entry box Optional Cooling Tower is for the energy required by a cool
50. borehole module is capable of calculating monthly inlet temperatures based on the input loads Monthly Inlet Temperatures This section contains a summary section of the average and peak inlet temperatures followed by the month by month temperatures and other associated data Comments This section at the end of the report is reserved for any additional information that the designer would like to include with the project Zone Reports Zone or loads reports are printed directly from the Loads modules They include only the project information and data from the zones presented in different formats Five different zone reports exist containing complete or specific information about the zones Zone reports work in conjunction with project reports but are actually a separate entity They are representative of the actual installation rather than the heat exchanger portion of the system Zone delineation loads and equipment are separate from the heat exchanger system It is for this reason that the designer would necessarily want to view and consider this information apart from the specific heat exchanger details For example if the design is a building the zone reports will cover everything within the building while the project report essentially will contain information about everything outside or external to the building 148 CHAPTER 7 Reports A zone report is printed from the Loads panel of the Zone Manager or directly
51. branch piping that are in both the water and the soil between the installation and the submerged circuits The program combines all factors so that the loop system provides the source inlet temperature at the heat pump requested by the designer Because the circuit layout is of primary importance to the designer concerned with pumping losses the head loss estimation feature for different piping configurations is included in the Surface Water Design module Users can quickly explore different layouts to determine the optimum design in terms of both heat transfer and circulation pump energy losses A description of some of the calculations and the input data can be found in Chapter 7 of the book Ground Source Heat Pumps Design of Geothermal Systems for Commercial and Institutional Buildings by S P Kavanaugh and K Rafferty 1997 Lifecycle Costing and C02 Module The Lifecycle Costing and C02 module similar to the abovementioned design modules allows the user to enter parameters necessary to calculate both hard and soft annual and lifecycle Net Present Value NPV costs associated with his or her designed geothermal system compared to standard HVAC systems This enables designers and decision makers to compare simultaneously the financial profiles and benefits of geothermal vs standard HVAC systems The interface is arranged in panels corresponding to the type of input After the user enters his or her desired parameters the s
52. by clicking the save button on the Finance module toolbar When the user closes the program or module the program automatically asks the user if he or she wants to save the finance project Typical Operation Although each user will have his or her own unique method the typical operation of the Finance module would include the following steps 1 Open a new finance module 2 Choose metric or English units 3 If necessary enter modify project specific financial data in the incentives other costs and utility costs tabbed panels 4 Either link to an open heat exchanger design file or manually enter the geothermal project data 5 In the conventional tabbed panel choose up to 4 conventional systems to compare to the geothermal system 6 In the results tabbed panel hit the calculate button to view the financial analysis 7 Make modifications as necessary 8 Save and or print the finance project reports Entering Data into the Tabbed Panels Ground Loop Design s innovative tabbed panel system provides for easy organization of and direct access to the relatively large number of design parameters associated with a particular project This section describes the Incentives Other Costs Utility Costs Conventional Geothermal and Results panels Incentives Information pertaining to financial incentives for geothermal systems can be found in the ncentive panel as seen in figure 9 2 below If incentives are available users can enter
53. control button deletes the current series If the series is the only series of a manufacturer the manufacturer also will be deleted automatically Note The actual heat pump file hpd will not be deleted from the pumps directory If necessary the series can be restored by creating a New Series The user need only provide the appropriate manufacturer and series name and use the deleted hpd filename for the pump set Filename Incomplete fields will be recreated from the hpd file If the original file no longer 30 CHAPTER 2 Adding Editing Heat Pumps exists the program creates a new hpd file Incidentally the same system can be used to add new pump sets obtained from external sources as described below General Information The General panel is the first panel a user sees when he or she decides to input data for a new pump It has an input box for the name of the pump and in the Pump Type area the user selects whether the pump should be classified as a water to air or a water to water pump An example of the pump General panel is shown in the lower right pane of figure 2 2 The General panel also now has recommended and minimum pressure drop and flow rate input boxes for each heat pump These data have been included for use in pressure drop calculations performed in an upcoming release of GLD Residential In a future version of GLD Premier these data may also be utilized in conjunction with the new CFD
54. data The input information is organized into seven panels as shown in figure 1 4 Fig 1 4 Horizontal Design Panel List Using these seven panels Results Fluid Soil Piping Configuration Extra kW and Information the user enters the project specific information A more complete description about how to enter data and perform calculations in the Horizontal Design module is provided in Chapter 5 Theoretical Basis The horizontal trench length equations used in the Horizontal Design module are based upon the Carslaw and Jaeger solution for heat transfer 17 CHAPTER 1 GLD Overview from cylinders buried in the earth as described in the single vertical case above Again this method properly models shorter time periods of heat extraction or rejection where the simple line source model fails Since a number of pipes may be buried in close proximity this model must be modified to account for all mutual pipe interactions A major benefit derived from using this model besides its ability to accurately assess heat transfer is that both the horizontal and the vertical design modules can operate under the same loads formalism In 1948 Ingersoll and Plass demonstrated that the Kelvin line source theory could be used to estimate the change in temperature of a buried pipe in which heat is being absorbed or rejected Ingersoll and Plass 1948 In a ground coupling system an apparent thermal resistance between the circulating f
55. design that shows results from both the Design Day and Monthly simulation E Design Method Results Comparison fo amp 28 COOLING Design Day Monthly HEATING Hourly Design Day Monthly Hourly Total Length ft 15624 0 15624 0 60 60 260 4 15624 0 15624 0 Borehole Number 60 60 Borehole Length ft Ground Temperature Change F 1 1 Peak Unit Inlet F Peak Unit Outlet F Total Unit Capacity kBtu Hr Peak Load kBtu Hr 82 4 92 4 941 7 755 9 Peak Demand kW Average Heat Pump EER COP System EER COP Avg Annual Power kWh Equip Flow Rate gpm System Flow Rate apm Figure 4 30 The Design Dashboard Design Compare Window 53 4 14 1 14 1 109 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module Printing Reports Reports of the active project can be printed at any time from the Design Studio using the toolbar print button or from the File menu gt Print Two project reports and four monthly hourly inlet temperature reports are available In the concise and detailed reports information printed includes all of the input parameters from the design module along with the associated results In the concise and detailed reports the zone and loads information is not included with the report and must be printed separately from the Loads panel The filename of the zon file associated with the project report is also listed on the reports The other four inlet temperature reports of
56. diffusivity if all the soil parameters are known It requires knowledge of the thermal conductivity the dry specific heat and density and the moisture level in the soil An image of the diffusivity calculator is shown in figure 4 13b 87 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module f Diffusivity Calculator loj x Thermal Diffusivity Calculator Thermal Diffusivity 0 75 ft 2 day Thermal Conductivity 1 30 Btu h ft deg F Soil Rock Specific Heat Dry 0 230 Btu fdeg F lbm Soil Rock Density Dry 120 0 Ibjft 3 Moisture 0 20 20 0 Close Fig 4 13b Diffusivity Calculator Modeling time Period In GLD ten years is used as a standard length of time for the ground temperature to stabilize although longer time periods may be entered if desired When excessive ground water movement is known to occur one year is sometimes used as the modeling time period In this case it is assumed that the ground temperature stabilizes in a single year due to the neutralizing effects of the ground water movement The modeling time prediction time period can also be viewed and modified in the expanded user interface as seen in figure 4 14 Calculations Calculate Prediction Time 15 0 years Fig 4 14 Design Prediction Time in Expanded User Interface 88 AN A E CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module Fluid The circulating fluid parameters may be entered in the Fluid
57. eees 41 New and Copy tec eser tua t EE ente ke sieee de 41 Remove and Clear itera ER ERR e AER ERAI 41 R nu mber godere Ie ti od ig np p ids nae 41 Summary View Toggle Button 0c cece e cece e eee e eee aee 41 Entering Eoads enero E ee SR code PERENNE ee ofa mat aioe 42 Design Day Loads teet een dh RIDE Ree ie 43 Annual Equivalent Full Load Hours eee 43 Equivalent Hours Calculator esee 44 Days per Week ee t ERG EIER ER EDU 45 Pump Matching and Selection csse 45 Auto Select i teet E De eee ot re REPRE n RESET 46 Manual Select iere d Eg EE ERE RTE RET ees 46 Details eer cR UR npe e atico te e de Ee 47 Cleat 3 eie e Evene eco PN van oe ye yd ieu 47 Custom Pump Customization csse menm 48 Automatic Heat Pump Selection Options for the Entire Zone Set 48 Auto Select All Pumps iret ihre t e Y devons 48 Update Reselect Current Pumps ceese 48 Working Series Selection in the Heat Pumps Tabbed Panel 49 Choosing the Active Series ssssssss sence neta eeeenenes 49 Inlet toad Temperatures oe ipie eere Ere do 50 The Average Block Loads Module cssesesee ee eee ea eE ene eaeeaes 50 CONTENTS Managing the Average Block Loads sse 52 NO We intente e Ra et Er O TEIE MD E RERUM 52 EE 52 Entering Loads cok ice e tdeo Rt as Caled DEN
58. entered in the Fluid panel A sample input screen is shown in figure 5 9 In the expanded user interface fluid temperatures can be viewed and modified at any time as seen in figure 5 10 Design Heat Pump Inlet Fluid Temperatures The heat pump inlet fluid temperatures are included in the Fluid panel The designer can input the desired inlet source temperatures for both heating and cooling here When changes are made to these values the heat pumps in all zones are updated automatically Since the new calculated equipment capacities can lead to changes in selected equipment the designer must be aware of the changes Customized pump values must be adjusted manually Design System Flow Rate The system flow rate per installed ton is included on the Fluid panel This is the system flow rate per ton of peak load not installed capacity This is because it is assumed that all units will not be running at full load simultaneously even in the peak load condition Optimized systems generally operate in the range from 2 5 to 4 0 gpm ton while the ideal system flow rate is somewhere around 3 0 gpm ton Again if the flow rate is changed the selected heat pumps are updated in the loads modules 122 CHAPTER 5 The Horizontal Design Module ET Horizontal Design Project HorizontalSample Results Fluid Soil Piping Configuration Extra kW Information Design Heat Pump Inlet Fluid Temperatures Cooling 85 0 F Heating 50 0 F
59. first produced in the performance of a Government contract If the Software is supplied for use by DoD the Software is delivered subject to the terms of this End User Agreement and either i in accordance with DFARS 227 702 1 a and 227 7202 3 a or ii with restricted rights in accordance with DFARS 252 227 7013 c 1 Gi OCT 1988 as applicable If the Software is supplied for use by a Federal agency other than DoD the Software is restricted computer software delivered subject to the terms of this End User Agreement and i FAR 12 212 a ii FAR 52 227 19 or iii FAR 52 227 14 ALT IID as applicable General This End User Agreement will bind and inure to the benefit of each party s successors and assigns provided that Customer may not assign or transfer this End User Agreement in whole or in part without Gaia s written consent This End User Agreement shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California United States of America as if performed wholly within the state and without giving effect to the principles of conflict of law No failure of either party to exercise or enforce any of its rights under this End User Agreement will act as a waiver of such rights If any portion hereof is found to be void or unenforceable the remaining provisions of this End User Agreement shall remain in full force and effect This End User Agreement is the complete and exclusive agreement between the parties with re
60. fitting equivalent length he or she must first choose Other and then can manually enter the equivalent length The fittings database built into the program will be growing over time as designers and manufacturers provide our firm with more accurate and detailed data pertaining to different types of fittings Peak Load Alphabetic Categorized Fittings Return El Fittings Supply Supply Fitting 1 Eqv Length ft 5 Supply Fitting 1 Name Supply Fitting 1 Pipe Size 3 in 80 mm Other Supply Fitting 1 Volume gal Flow Rate Socket U Bend S Ta ok Group Name Socket Tee Straight Name Socket Reducer Pipe 1 Supply Socket Joint Pipe 2 Return Socket Flange Adaptor Pressure Drop Fig 11 64 Fittings Can Be Selected In the Properties Window 274 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Modifying Parameters with the Pipe and Fitting Manager The Pipe and Fitting Manager provides an entirely different system component customization experience A user can access the Pipe and Fitting Manager by right clicking on the component of interest in the Layout Design Manager and selecting the Pipe and Fitting Manager This can be seen in figure 11 65 Layout Design and Optimization Calculate B Main Supply Return Runout Pipe Pair U Circuit 01 GHX Header Section 01 U Circuit GHX Header Section 02 U Circuit 02 Add New Pipe Pair Add Reverse Retur
61. horsepower The required fan horsepower and motor efficiency may also be entered to include the demand of the fan Generally cooling tower inputs are left at zero initially and then modified once the program suggests the cooling tower size and flow rate The Additional Power may be included as necessary Note To make a kilowatt entry in the Pump Power box switch to metric units enter the kilowatt value and then return to English units Pump Power Calculator If the pump efficiency system flow rate and head loss are known or have been calculated in the CFD module the Pump Power Calculator can be used to determine the pump power The new CFD module makes it straightforward to calculate system head loss and thereby estimate the pump power with a degree of accuracy An image of the pump power calculator is shown in figure 4 4 76 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module fS Pump Power Calculator j Bl x Pump Power Required Pump Power hP Pump Head 50 0 ft hd Flow Rate 100 0 gpm Pump Efficiency 80 0 Fig 4 4 Pump Power Calculator Pattern Information pertaining to the ground field arrangement is in the Pattern panel This includes the vertical boreholes pattern the borehole separation the optional selection of external grid files export to AutoCAD the number of boreholes per parallel loop and the fixed borehole length design option The input screen is shown in figure 4 5 P
62. in design for example a Vault with five 10 circuit ground heat exchanger modules and one 6 circuit ground heat exchanger module the CFD module can help determine the piping arrangements that provide the most balanced flow The CFD module either can be used on a standalone basis or in conjunction with a heat exchanger system designed in GLD On a standalone basis users can create piping systems using a variety of wizards and tools On an integrated basis users can build a design in CFD based off of a designed heat exchanger system As with the other modules in Ground Loop Design it is important to remember that the calculated results are only as good as the quality of the user defined 201 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module inputs Assuming that reasonable values are provided to the software the software will provide reasonable results Nomenclature Within the global geothermal industry standard nomenclature is sorely lacking After having polled and interviewed several dozen active designers we are adopting the following nomenclature for use in this manual and the software GHX Manifold Vault GHX Module From Building mm Wa To Building GHX Header GHX Circuits GHX Refers to a ground heat exchanger and may include vertical horizontal trenching horizontal boring pond or lake heat exchanger buried in the ground or submerged in a body of water GHX Circuits HDPE pipe buried in the ground in hor
63. is a familiar design parameter for many designers the maximum target velocity may be a new tool in the designer s arsenal The maximum target velocity impacts the GHX Header Design Optimizer in the following way if the user specifies a low maximum target velocity say 5 ft s the auto sizing function has flexibility to choose a larger pipe diameter that offer slower flow rates and lower pressure drops If the user specifies a higher maximum target velocity say 50 ft s the auto sizing function will tend to be limited to smaller pipe diameters that enable faster velocities and their concomitant higher head losses In figure 11 93 both the Auto Adjust and Auto Size boxes are checked and the minimum and maximum purging target velocities are 2 ft s and 5 ft s respectively Fluid Information Peak Load Flow Rate gpm 30 00 Installed Capacity Flow Rate gpm 60 00 V Auto Flow w Auto Size Minimum Maximum Purging Target Velocity ft s 2 00 5 0 Fig 11 93 Activating the Supply Return Header Design Optimizer Purging Flow Rate gpm 68 3 Pipe Type Controls There is one more optional step a designer can take before having the CFD module auto design the Supply Return headering system Many designers have certain pipe size preferences based on previous experience ease of purchase etc The designer can specify in the CFD module which types of pipe he or she does not want the program to use when auto optimizing the pipi
64. is calculated by summing up the hourly heat pump power draw over the design lifetime and dividing by the number of modeling years Including the system loads the dynamic fluid temperatures and the dynamic heat pump performance there is no more accurate way to estimate the power consumption of a geothermal design Designers may find it interesting to see the impact of borehole spacing changes on average annual power consumption Finally the system flow rate is listed in its own subsection The system flow rate is calculated from the peak load divided by 12 000 Btu ton and then multiplied by the flow rate in gpm ton chosen on the Fluid panel It represents the flow rate from the installation out to the buried pipe system A The Graphing Module Users also can view a range of hourly data results using the new Graphing Module In the expanded user interface a graphing icon button will appear after hitting the Calculate button as seen in figure 4 28 Remember the user can access the expanded user interface by double clicking on any of the tabs Calculations Figure 4 28 Monthly Data Graphing Button Users can also access the graphs from the Tools dropdown menu selecting the Graph Data option and then importing the data of set of interest into the Graphing Module Figure 4 29 is a screenshot of the Graphing Module with hourly data 107 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module i Graph Data HourlyData 07 26 2010 13 20 50 t t talk
65. it into a upward flowing return flow note that down and up refer to the top and bottom of figure 1135 and not to physical directions In reverse return systems the GHX Circuit is more like a relay that sends the flow cascading farther down all the way to the last final reverse return GHX Header section C in figure 11 35 To explain this difference additional reverse return specific terminology is required Parent Child and Sibling Component Relationships Revisited The parent child sibling nomenclature needs to be modified and augmented for reverse return systems While reverse return header components have parent child and sibling relationships like they do in direct return systems as can been seen in figure 11 29 reverse return systems have two unique additional relationships based on the same components These can be seen in figure 11 36 and are described below 248 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module parent child relationship 1 parent child relationship 2 parent child relationship 3 sibling relationship series sibling relationship reverse child parent relationship Fig 11 36 Reverse Return Component Relationships in the Layout Manager Workspace Series Sibling Relationships In reverse return systems like the one seen in diagram 11 36 above the supply pipe of Pipe Pair A is the parent of both Circuit 1 and the supply pipe of Pipe Pair B Circuit 1 and the supply pipe of Pipe Pair A ar
66. menu prior to hitting the Calculate button The Calculate button is also available in the expanded user interface as seen in figure 4 1 The three methodologies are described briefly below and in more detail in Chapter 1 91 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module Design Day This calculation methodology works with loads from both the Zone Manager Loads module and the Average Block Loads module The calculation performed is based on the cylindrical source heat transfer theory as described in Chapter 1 The Design Day model works in both fixed temperature and fixed length mode described above Monthly This calculation methodology works with loads from the Average Block Loads module if the designer has imported monthly loads data The calculation performed is based on an advanced heat transfer theory Incorporating a dimensionless g function this methodology calculates the evolution of the borehole wall and fluid temperatures over time The monthly model works only in fixed length mode Hourly This calculation methodology works with loads from the Average Block Loads module if the designer has imported hours loads data The calculation performed is based on an advanced computational heat transfer theory Incorporating a dimensionless g function this methodology calculates the evolution of the borehole wall and fluid temperatures over time The hourly model works only in fixed length mode The Calculate panel is divided into tw
67. module is designed to read in CSV files that follow the format output by the GeoCube a test unit manufactured by Precision Geothermal LLC If a user wishes to import CSV files from another test unit the user should make sure that the column format matches that of the GeoCube test unit The basic format is as follows Format for Geocube Units with Flow Sensors Plot Title Sample TC Test Geothermal Town USA amp Date Time GMT 06 00 Voltage VAC 1 6 2010 10 55 235 233 0 8822 54169 55168 16 12 64 1 6 2010 10 57 235 374 0 908 5443 54 734 12 64 Format for Geocube Units with Pressure Transducers Plot Title Sample TC Test Geothermal Town CA Po amp Time GMT 06 00 Voltage VACO Current AQ Temp F Temp F Pressure PSIGQ Pressure PSIGQ Batt V Note that some conductivity units do not provide this much data for example many units do not record pressure In such a case make sure that the CSV file has the column title and then just populate the data rows with 0 0 To import the CSV file first save it in the following folder Main Drive Program Files GLD2010 ThermalConductivity Thermal Conductivity Data Files Next in the Bore tab enter the borehole length Next click the following import button that is found on the module toolbar 9 Finally select the CSV file of interest 190 CHAPTER 10 The Thermal Conductivity Module Typical Operation
68. not be accessible Metric and English reference files are included with GLD These files aid in the correct verification and entry of the various parameters The three main topics design aids currently included under the Tables menu in the Design Studio are Fluid Properties Soil Properties and Pipe Properties A convenient Conversions table with metric English conversions in two different formats is included for reference as well Reference files can be opened and left as open windows on the desktop and the user can refer to them as necessary during the design process Realizing that designers and engineers have their own preferred resources GLD employs the HTML browser model so that the user has ultimate control over the reference files The designer simply creates a basic HTML file containing customized data pictures graphs charts etc and then modifies the included top level HTML files to link to their pages The system requires a very basic knowledge of HTML but it offers an extremely flexible system for user customization Detailed information on reference files and sample HTML can be found in Chapter 8 Program Help and Support GLD contains a comprehensive searchable database of help topics Access this feature from the Design Studio Help menu Through the Help menu it is also possible to access the latest web resources and updates If these resources do not answer your question please contact your vendor for support Refer
69. or hourly loads data Monthly and hourly loads data are necessary for calculating monthly and hourly inlet temperatures and monthly and hourly heat pump performance respectively in the borehole design module Note that adding monthly and or hourly loads is necessary only if a designer wishes to calculate monthly and or hourly inlet temperatures for a vertical borehole heat exchanger 52 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones Monthly Loads To access the monthly loads data input panel as seen in figure 3 13 click on the Monthly Loads button Monthly Load Data Update d Cooling as Heating fl Peak Total Peak Cancel kBtu E feton kBtu S TUE ol olol olol ol olol olo IET Hours at Peak January February March April 0 May June July August September October November December EN Total LE Tem LA Fig 3 13 Monthly Loads Input Boxes There are three ways to enter the loads data e Manually enter the total and peak cooling and heating loads in the appropriate boxes e Copy and paste from Excel using the Excel icon button See later in this chapter for how to format the Excel file Note that since GLD Version 5 from 2008 the formatting has changed e Import a commercial loads file or excel file using the loads import button see below If necessary hit the zero box at the top of each column to reset all values to 0 In the last row of the peak cooling and pea
70. out of supply pipe B of the GHX Header Section BB and returning to the return pipe B of the GHX Header Section BB Circuit 1 Circuit 2 and supply pipe B of the GHX Header Section BB for this parallel flow path system flow comes from supply pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout and then branches in three directions to Circuit 1 Circuit 2 and supply pipe B of the GHX Header Section Remember that parallel flow means that the flow branches off in two or more directions In this case flow is branching off in three directions Three siblings Circuit 1 Circuit 2 and supply pipe B of the GHX Header Section BB share the parent supply pipe A of the GHX Module Reverse Return Runout The siblings are vertically stacked Can you find the serial flow paths in figure 11 43 Remember serial flow paths are stacked with indentation The following paths are in series Supply pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA Circuit 1 Supply pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA Circuit 2 Supply pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA Supply Pipe B of GHX Header Section BB Circuit 3 Supply pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA Supply Pipe B of GHX Header Section BB Circuit 4 Each of these flow paths consists of a linear series of parent child connections 258 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module BASIC DIRECT RETURN LOOPFIELD LAYOUT 4 Figure 11 44 is the layout for a
71. partially are based on the above formalism Because of the complexity of the solution to the heat transfer equation for coiled loops of pipe the design procedure used for the Slinky options is actually only a theoretical approximation This approximation is recommended in Closed loop Geothermal Systems Slinky Installation Guide and is based on a specific set of tests conducted on 36 diameter Slinky coils Jones 1995 In the approximation the program first calculates the total trench length required for a single U Tube buried at the specified trench depth It then divides the calculated length by 250 ft and multiplies the result by a factor 18 CHAPTER 1 GLD Overview determined from both the run fraction and the Slinky pitch distance between adjoining loops The horizontal Slinky configuration employs the same calculation procedure as that of the vertical However in the case of the horizontal Slinky the U tube depth is lowered such that the average depth of the vertical Slinky would be equal to that of a flat horizontal Slinky The pitch and run fraction function is obtained from a two dimensional interpolation over the surface determined from the experimentally determined data points provided in the Slinky manual Surface Water Design Module Description The Surface Water Design module allows the user to enter various parameters concerning the body of water lake pond river etc system As in the Borehole Module inp
72. program in object code form and all related materials included herewith including written materials binders and other containers hereinafter the Software on supported operating systems Use Upon a receipt of full payment by Gaia or a Gaia authorized reseller of the applicable license fees Customer will be able to use this Software pursuant to the limitations set forth herein Limitations Customer s full use of this Software is limited to the number of authorized licenses Customer has purchased Customer agrees to use reasonable efforts to protect the Software from any unauthorized use modification reproduction distribution and publication Customer may not transfer any of the rights granted to Customer hereunder unless Customer receives prior written authorization from Gaia and only if Customer transfers all of Customer s rights granted hereunder without retaining any of the Software or any copies thereof or any rights thereto Except as otherwise expressly provided under this End User Agreement Customer shall have no right and Customer specifically agrees not to i make error corrections to or otherwise modify or adapt the Software nor create derivative works based upon the Software or to permit third parties to do the same or i copy in whole or in part decompile translate reverse engineer disassemble or otherwise reduce the Software to human readable form Upgrades and Additional Copies For purposes of this End U
73. return since reverse return Manifolds are rarely if ever used Section Outlet Information The section outlet information refers to how the outlets in the Ultra Manifold connect to Manifolds Vaults via the Manifold Supply Return Runouts Section Outlet Number Here the user enters the number of outlets there are in the Ultra Manifold Vault that connect to child Manifolds Vaults via the Manifold Supply Return Runout s 216 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Section Outlet Separation Here the user enters the distance separating the section outlets in the Ultra Manifold Section Outlet Pipe Size Here the user enters the outlet size connecting to the Supply Return Runouts of the child Manifolds Vaults Supply Return Runout Information The Ultra Manifold Supply Return Runout information refers to the pipe pair that is the parent of the Ultra Manifold Vault For example in an in building Ultra Manifold system the Supply Return Runout information would likely pertain to the pipe pair to from the circulation pumps and to from the Ultra Manifold One Way Length Here the user enters the one way length of the supply pipe The return pipe will default to the same length Supply Pipe Size Here the user enters the supply pipe size The return pipe will default to the same size Pipe Sizes Details related to the pipe sizes available for auto building and auto optimization of piping systems can be seen and s
74. set Overview Favorite references are like a comfortable pair of worn in sneakers Although this software package provides some useful information in the included tables it may never replace the old standards Rather than trying to impose a particular system onto the users of the software GLD employs a technologically sophisticated system that allows the user to customize the reference files as much as he or she desires With this system a new pair of shoes feels comfortable immediately The reference files included with GLD are minimal consisting of a few tables and graphs that should aid in the selection of requested parameters All files are written in open HTML Hypertext Mark up Language files The designer can edit and add to them as he or she desires to create a customized reference library within the Design Studio environment As with the heat pump and loads models the reference files model is another customizable element of the geothermal Design Studio that the user has the option to control 152 CHAPTER 8 Tables and Reference Files Tables Included with GLD Several tables are included with GLD They are separated into several broad categories from which most questions will arise These include Fluid Properties Soil Properties Pipe Properties Conversions The first three sections present a menu screen with hyper links to various tables that have been included in the package The fourth section consists of a pair o
75. slower flow rates and lower pressure drops If the user specifies a higher maximum target velocity say 50 ft s the auto sizing function will tend to be limited to smaller pipe diameters that enable faster velocities and also higher head loss This will be explored in more detail later in this chapter Purging Flow Rate gpm 9 IV Auto Fiow Minimum Purging Target Velocity ft s 2 00 100 00 Fig 11 14 The Auto Size Option Solution Properties Solution properties are also included in the Fluid panel These include the design temperature which impacts viscosity specific heat density and dynamic viscosity of the circulating fluid Also a reference label is included so that the designer knows the percentage of antifreeze and antifreeze type however this reference label is not currently linked to the other input parameters In automatic entry mode the user first selects the fluid type and then selects the desired freezing temperature GLD automatically displays the specific heat density and viscosity for the fluid selection When the automatic entry mode checkbox is marked the program is in automatic entry mode In manual entry mode the user manually selects and inputs the specific heat and density for the target solution as seen in figure 4 16 When the automatic entry mode checkbox is unmarked the program is in manual entry mode 222 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Solution Properties
76. tables However it is recommended that soil tests are performed to obtain these values The thermal conductivity in particular has a large effect on the calculated bore length and should be determined with care through in situ tests or comparison with other projects installed in the local vicinity GLD does not encourage the use of ex situ data 86 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module sev Drilling Log Conductivity Calculator The layer calculator is a new feature in GLD2010 that enables designers to use a drilling log to produce a quick weighted average calculation for thermal conductivity and diffusivity While some non published empirical studies indicate that weighted average calculations offer conductivity results that are different from empirically derived thermal conductivity results some designers prefer to estimate conductivity from a drill log For commercial projects thermal conductivity tests are generally recommended Figure 4 13a is a screenshot of the layer calculator Soil Thermal Properties View Layer Calculator Thermal Conductivity 122 Btu h ft F Thermal Diffusivity 0 98 ft 2 day Name Layer 2 Layer Thickness 75 0 ft Soil Type Other Conductivity 0 95 Btu h ft F Diffusivity 0 86 ft 2 day Fig 4 13a Drilling Log Conductivity Calculator Diffusivity Calculator For the designer s assistance GLD includes a Diffusivity Calculator that can be used to determine the actual
77. text boxes If cuttings are used for the backfill the average soil conductivity should be entered here Soil Input parameters relating to the soil are located in the Soil panel as shown in figure 4 11 These include the average ground temperature the soil thermal properties and the modeling time period 85 gt CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module I Borehole Design Project 2 e Ju Results Fluid Soil U Tube Pattern Extra kw Information Undisturbed Ground Temperature Ground Temperature 58 oF Soil Thermal Properties View Layer Calculator Thermal Conductivity 1 08 Btu h ft F Thermal Diffusivity 0 75 ft 2 day Diffusivity Calculator Check Soil Tables Modeling Time Period Prediction Time 10 years Fig 4 11 Soil Panel Contents The undisturbed ground temperature refers to the temperature of the soil below the surface layer where there is no longer a seasonal swing This value may be determined from regional data or by recording the actual stabilized temperature of water circulated through pipe in a test bore The soil thermal properties are a little harder to define and care must be taken to provide accurate values especially for the thermal conductivity The thermal diffusivity relates to the density of the soil and its moisture content Typical values of thermal conductivity and diffusivity for sand clay and different types of rocks can be found in the Soil Properties
78. the expected running time of the unit in each particular zone Estimates of time must be reduced of course from actual running time since the annual equivalent full load hours represents the running time if the system were operating continuously at full load which is not generally the case Equivalent Hours Calculator To aid in this calculation GLD includes the Equivalent Hours Calculator found in the Tools menu or obtainable directly by clicking the Calculate Hours button Figure 3 5 shows a view of the Equivalent Hours Calculator f Equivalent Hours Cale 5 xl r Annual Equivalent Ful Load Hours Peak Hourly Load 0 0 MBtu hr Monthly Total Loads January February March April May June July August September October November December Full Load Hours Lo hr Close Hu 3 Fig 3 5 Equivalent Hours Calculator Remember that although the vertical bore length calculation results are not 4 extremely dependent on the running hours within one zone for multi zone designs the total number of running hours across the zones can certainly affect 44 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones the required bore length The user should attempt to enter the running hours as accurately as possible Equivalent hours are unnecessary for a surface water design since long term buildup effects are unimportant If a loads module is linked to a Surface Water Design module the hours will not be vis
79. the Design Studio File menu or toolbar The file automatically opens into a new Horizontal Design Project module If a loads file zon is associated with the loaded project the loads file automatically will be loaded into the appropriate loads module and opened along with the project file However if the associated loads file cannot be found the user will be notified and the automatic file loading will not occur Saving Projects Projects may be saved at any time using Save or Save As from the Design Studio File menu or by clicking the save button on the toolbar When the user closes the program or module the program automatically asks the user if he or she wants to save the project and associated loads files Typical Operation Although each user will have his or her own unique style the typical operation of the Horizontal Design module would include the following steps 1 Enter Loads and select pumps in either the Average Block Loads module or the Zone Manager module 2 Form a link between the loads module and the design module 3 Modify step by step the input parameters listed in each panel 4 Perform initial calculation 5 Modify various parameters and recalculate to determine the effects of the modifications 6 Add a optional boiler cooling tower 7 Establish an optimal system 113 CHAPTER 5 The Horizontal Design Module 8 Save and or print the project and associated zone file Entering Data into t
80. the Results panel If the user wishes to manually enter an estimated diffusivity the user can unselect the automatic estimator mode check box and then manually enter a diffusivity value 191 CHAPTER 10 The Thermal Conductivity Module Thermal Conductivity Calculation Project o o E Project File None zw a Import Data File American_Swedish_Institute_ 2 csv Results Bore v Automatic Estimator Mode Thermal Diffusivity ft 2 day Thermal Conductivity 0 97 Btu h ft F Soil Rock Specific Heat Dry 0 200 Btu F lbm Soil Rock Density Dry 100 0 Ib ft 3 Moisture 0 20 8 Check Soil Tables Fig 10 2 Diffusivity Panel Contents Flow Information pertaining to a particular conductivity test unit s flow pressure coefficients can be selected viewed and calculated in this tab See figure 10 3 below Some conductivity test units have the capacity to collect pressure drop information data during a conductivity test If a particular unit has this capacity and the flow pressure relationship has been calibrated then these calibration data can be entered or in the case of preloaded data viewed and selected here These data are useful because it enables GLD to monitor the raw test data for flow rate stability throughout the conductivity test If a user needs to enter calibration data for a conductivity test unit that is not already included in the module the user will need to manually e
81. the desired freezing temperature GLD automatically displays the specific heat and density for the fluid selection When the automatic entry mode checkbox is marked the program is in automatic entry mode In manual entry mode the user manually selects and inputs the specific heat and density for the target solution as seen in figure 4 16 When the automatic entry mode checkbox is unmarked the program is in manual entry mode Solution Properties Automatic Entry Mode Fluid Type 23 5 B3 Propylene Glycol v Specific Heat Cp 0 96 Btu F lbm Density rho 540 Ib ft 3 Check Fluid Tables Fig 4 16 Manual Entry Mode for Solution Properties Note Since solution properties vary considerably and non linearly with type and percentage of additive GLD does not include detailed automatic antifreeze information for all conditions Generalized tables of data may be found in the Fluid Properties tables It is recommended that the designer manually enter the desired values in the input text boxes Results All results for both the heating and the cooling calculations can be viewed at any time on the Results panel After all data has been entered or any changes have been made the user can choose from the calculate interim or final results using the Calculate button New in GLD Premier 2010 the designer can choose one of three calculation methodologies Design Day Monthly or Hourly from the dropdown
82. the incentive as an investment tax credit percentage or as an absolute tax credit For example in late 2008 the U S Congress passed H R 1424 which authorizes up to 2000 in federal tax credits for residential systems and 10 federal tax credits for commercial systems For commercial projects in the US users can enter 10 in the investment tax credit text box For residential projects in the US users can enter up to 2000 in the fixed tax credit text box Incentives are subtracted from the installation costs and reported in detail in the reports 163 CHAPTER 9 The Financial Module IS Finance Module HorizontalSample Results Geothermal Conventional Utilities Other Costs Incentives Tax Incentives Investment Tax Credit 10 0 Fixed Tax Credit 0 00 Project Fig 9 2 Incentives Panel Contents Other Costs Information pertaining to a variety of hard and soft costs can be found in the Other Costs panel This includes all of the baseline data for non utility costs including C02 emissions costs average building costs and equipment related costs The contents of the Other Costs panel are shown in figure 9 3 All of the data entry options in the Other Costs panel are optional but by entering the data the program is able to calculate many of the hard and soft costs associated with HVAC systems Note that calculating the soft cost benefits of geothermal systems may help designers convince clients of the important
83. the pipe style and flow The user can select the size and type of pipe from the appropriate selection boxes If another pipe diameter is required it can be entered directly into the text boxes as needed Note By pressing the Check Pipe Tables button the Pipe Properties tables will open If the user wants to enter an experimentally determined pipe resistance or requires more precise calculations he or she can enter these values directly into the Pipe Resistance text box overriding all pipe resistance calculations 119 CHAPTER 5 The Horizontal Design Module Soil Input parameters relating to the soil are located in the Soil panel as shown in figure 5 7 These include the average ground temperature the soil thermal properties and the ground temperature corrections at a given depth EF Horizontal Design Project HorizontalSample Results Fluid Soil Piping Configuration Extra kw Information Undisturbed Ground Temperature Ground Temperature 62 0 F Ground Temperature Corrections at Given Depth Thermal Conductivity 13 Btu h ft F Therrnal Diffusivity 0 75 Meada Diffusivity Calculator Check Soil Tables Soil Thermal Properties Regional Air Temperature Swing 230 F Winter Summer Coldest Warmest Day in Year 34 225 Check Swing Temperature Table Fig 5 7 Soil Panel Contents Undisturbed Ground Temperature The undisturbed ground temperature refers to the tempe
84. the project information and comments More information on reports can be found in Chapter 7 References Francis E Editor Refrigeration and Air Conditioning 3 Edition Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute p 186 Prentice Hall New Jersey 1997 Incropera F and Dewitt D Introduction to Heat Transfer 2 Edition p 456 p 98 John Wiley and Sons New York 1990 Paul N The Effect of Grout Thermal Conductivity on Vertical Geothermal Heat Exchanger Design and Performance 129 CHAPTER 6 The Surface Water Design Module CHAPTER 6 The Surface Water Design Module This chapter describes the features and operation of the Surface Water Design module This module is for the design of systems that use bodies of water including ponds rivers lakes oceans etc It is one of the four design modules included with GLD Overview As with the Borehole and Horizontal Design modules the calculations made in the Surface Water Design module involve the combination of a large number of input parameters Care must be taken to assure that proper values are verified before use Assuming that reasonable values are provided to the software the software will provide a reasonable result General Features The Surface Water Design module in GLD also includes a set of panels grouped by subject through which the designer can enter and edit the input variables in a straightforward and efficient manner For example paramete
85. then calculates a new capacity or power at any specified flow rate using the initial values already known from the stored data If no data points are entered for a second flow rate the flow factor is assumed to be the constant value of 1 0 This means that the capacity and power will not vary with changes in flow rate Considering the size of the variations generally only a few percent this simple model is accurate enough for most pumps A completely accurate model of the flow rate variations for all possible pumps would require significantly more data entry Load Side Corrections The GLD Edit Add Heat Pumps module also can include corrections to the capacity or power that result from variations in the load side inlet temperature or flow rate They are entered as correction factors across the desired temperature or flow range The software again uses the polynomial fitting to model these correction factors In these cases a four coefficient model is used to better model the types of variations that may occur Three to five points are allowed as data input Again if load side correction data are not included there will be no capacity or power variations with load temperature or flow and all correction factors will be 1 0 the standard value The load side temperature range will generally be considerably different for water to air and water to water pumps GLD suggests different initial temperature ranges when the user chooses the wa
86. this is an excellent technique for viewing the entire GHX Module on one screen F Piping Module gms Layout Fluid Automation Circulation Pumps Layout Design and Optimization Calculate amp Peak Load Alphabetic Categorized Fig 11 20 The Toggle View Button Extends the Layout Manager Workspace The user can hit the Toggle View button at any time to switch back and forth between the two view 3 The designer can drag the Property Window to the right or left to provide more or less Layout Manager Workspace area as needed To do so the user needs to be in the primary Toggle View as can be seen in figure 11 19 The user can then move the mouse to the vertical bar that separates the Layout Manager Workspace from the Property window and click and drag to move the bar either left or right An example of such an adjustment can be seen in figure 11 21 230 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Layout Fluid Automation Circulation Pumps Calculate B B Peakload e Fig 11 21 Adjust the Relationship between the Two Main Windows Section Three Flow Type Selection At the top right is a drop down menu from which users can select to see the piping design performance results under three flow scenarios peak load equipment installed capacity and purge This can be seen in figure 11 22 Layout Fluid Automation Circulation Pumps Layout
87. to only heating or only cooling types of equipment In these cases the pump efficiency could be fine but the system efficiency might be incorrect The fourth section lists the total head loss calculation results as well as the individual losses for the header and circuit pipe It does not include any losses for the heat pump equipment which must be considered separately This section is convenient for determining the optimum pumping arrangement for the system 144 CHAPTER 6 The Surface Water Design Module Finally the system flow rate is listed along with the flow rates in the primary and branch headers as well as the flow in the individual circuits The system flow rate is calculated from the peak load divided by 12 000 Btu ton and then multiplied by the system flow rate in gpm ton as given on the Fluid panel The primary header flow rate is calculated from the system flow rate divided by the number of primary headers and the branch flow rate is obtained from the primary header flow rate divided by the number of branches as given on the Piping panel The circuit flow rate is obtained by dividing the system flow rate by the total number of circuits also provided on the Piping panel Printing Reports Reports of the active project can be printed at any time from the Design Studio using the toolbar print button or from the File menu gt Print The information printed includes all of the input parameters from the design module
88. transfer data The program then prompts the user to decide to which loads heating or cooling the data should be transferred Importing Design Day Loads From Excel and Spreadsheets From Excel Spreadsheets There are two ways to import Design Day and annual energy loads data from Excel or another spreadsheet into the Zone Manager Loads module Both methods require the loads data to be in the following format Each row of data is for one month of the year with the first populated row representing January loads and the last populated row representing December loads 65 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones Cooling Total Cooling Peak Heating Total Heating Peak kBtu kBtu hr kBtu kBtu hr 55287 335 382470 1060 46953 345 150525 1105 106020 831 98665 745 194889 1008 37332 325 323767 1066 11014 115 424979 1252 291 22 567918 1325 0 0 516207 1260 0 0 381425 1245 61574 87 204515 938 98623 225 69766 377 144339 200 52249 347 206000 897 The first way to import the loads data is the copy paste method Find the Import Loads command in the Design Studio Loads menu Select Import Loads and an Import Loads window similar to that in Fig 3 17 will appear GLD expects the Excel data to be in the above order and format To import the Excel data simply highlight the four columns in the Excel spreadsheet and copy them onto the clipboard Ctrl C Note highlight only the numeric data DO
89. with the highest levels of efficiency and confidence 158 CHAPTER 9 The Finance Module CHAPTER 9 The Finance Module This chapter describes how to use the GLD finance module a module that models both hard and soft costs associated with geothermal and standard HVAC systems All of the calculations fundamentally are based on data provided by the designer providing for the greatest range of flexibility and accuracy Overview When designers architects and building owners are deciding whether or not to install a ground source heat pump system they must consider a variety of factors including cost Cost means different things to different people Some think of the hard costs the first costs associated with the design and installation of an HVAC system Others think of lifecycle operating costs In an increasingly green focused world still others think of environmental costs Finally some percentage think of the soft costs associated with HVAC systems the opportunity costs associated with large vs small mechanical rooms the varying maintenance costs associated with one system vs another and even the water consumption costs associated with some types of systems such as geothermal cooling tower hybrid systems The Ground Loop Design financial module allows designers to model and estimate all of the aforementioned costs from expected future CO emissions costs to the annual and lifetime operating costs of geotherma
90. 0 Modeling Time Period GNE de Prediction Time 10 0 years Load Balance Fig 5 1 The Expanded User Interface The Horizontal Design module includes several additional features e Metric and English unit conversion Printed reports of all input data and calculated results Convenient buttons to bring up tables and calculators A Calculate button used to refresh the calculations Boiler and cooling tower hybrids Opening Projects There are two ways to open Horizontal Design projects One is by using the New Horizontal command from the Design Studio File menu or toolbar and the other is by opening an existing Horizontal Design project gld file Files cannot be opened if other modules with the same name are already open As many files can be opened as the system s memory permits 112 CHAPTER 5 The Horizontal Design Module W New Projects New projects may be opened at any time from the Design Studio by choosing New Horizontal from either the Design Studio File menu or the toolbar New projects open with standard parameter values that must be edited for new projects In new projects no loads files zon are loaded The user must create a new loads file or open an existing loads file into one of the loads modules Links may be established using the Studio Link system described in Chapter 3 t Existing Projects Existing projects may be opened at any time from the Design Studio by choosing Open from
91. 02 U Circuit 03 ERE GHX Header Section 03 own U Circuit 04 B GHX Header Section 04 U Circuit 05 GHX Header Section 05 U Circuit 06 GHX Header Section 06 U Circuit 07 Eas GHX Header Section 07 UJ Circuit 08 Fig 11 60 Circuit 2 Has Been Deleted From Its Position as a Child of GHX Header Section 1 271 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module To delete an entire nested component family or part of a nested component family the user has to select the highest level component the user wishes to delete everything below the selected component will be deleted right click and select delete This can be seen in figure 11 61 and figure 11 62 Layout Design and Optimization Calculate Al El GHX Module Supply Return Runout U Circuit 01 B GHX Header Section 01 GHX Header Section 02 U Circuit 03 GHX Header Section 0 TTE ee an U Circuit 04 mo GHX Header Secti Add Reverse Return Pipe Pair U Circuit 05 Add New Circuit GHX Heade R Add New Ultra Manifold U Circi GHX Add New Manifold l Add New GHX Module Bi Pipe and Fitting Manager Copy Selection Paste Selection Delete Fig 11 61 Deleting Part of a GHX Module Nested Component Family Layout Design and Optimization Calculate B amp 3 CHX Module Supply Return Runout U Circuit 01 2 GHX Header Section 01 Dm
92. 105 8 ft In reality when installed the boreholes will be 253 3 ft deep as per the cooling side requirements The presented results therefore short loop the heating side by 253 3 105 8 or 147 5 ft Consequently the other results on the heating side relate to a 105 8 ft deep borehole rather than a 253 3 ft borehole which in reality will not be the case The results are grayed out as a reminder to the designer The first subsection deals with the bores including the total length the borehole number and the borehole length for one bore A common way to adjust the borehole length to a desired value is to change the borehole number or pattern on the Pattern panel The second subsection presents the predicted long term ground temperature change with respect to the average ground temperature of the installation Remember that in the fixed temperature mode only the temperature change listed in bold has any relevance Note that both temperature changes will be equal if the cooling and heating loads to the ground are equal as in the case where a hybrid system is utilized to balance the loads out SSS O FT Borehole Design Project verticalsampleforManualNEW Co E Results Fiuid Soil U Tube Pattern Extra kw Information i Design Day v COOLING HEATING Total Length ft 15197 0 Borehole Number 60 Borehole Length ft 253 3 Ground Temperature Change F 2 3 Unit Inlet F 90 0 Unit Outlet
93. 3 Loads and Zones The link status lights in the corners of the modules indicate when links are broken Link status lights are described in more detail below ETD Studio Link Status Lights Studio Link status lights are used to indicate when links are made when data transfer occurs and when links are broken They are located in the lower left hand corner of the design modules and the lower right hand corner of the loads modules ELIT LLLI Connection Established First Light from Left The light furthest to the left indicates both whether or not a connection is established and the type of connection If the light is off no connection is established Magenta indicates a link to an Average Block Loads module while light blue indicates a link to a Zone Manager loads module LETT Receiving Data Second Light from Left The second light from the left indicates when the module is receiving data from the other module It is green in color CITT Sending Data Third Light from Left The third light from the left indicates when the module is sending data to the other module It is yellow in color OE Broken Connection Rightmost Light The light on the right turns red whenever a connection is broken It turns off again when connections are reestablished Importing Loads Data From External Programs With GLD users easily can import design day monthly and or hourly loads data from both commercial loads programs and Excel files d
94. 5 Rows Down 5 Separation ong Ft Fig 4 6 Pattern Data in Expanded User Interface 78 E CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module External Grid Files For non rectangular and potentially non equally spaced systems users have the option of creating and then importing an external grid data file that contains the x y coordinates for each borehole in the system Using an external grid file offers absolute control over loopfield design To export a design to AutoCAD an external grid file is required User designated grid files must follow this format Sample GridData txt created in text editor Metric 0 0 0 10 10 0 10 10 0 20 20 0 20 20 10 20 20 10 30 0 30 10 30 20 30 30 20 30 10 30 0 30 This sample grid file was manually created in a text editor As can be seen the first line indicates whether a Metric meters or English feet units coordinate plane is specified The next line indicates the x y coordinates of the first borehole The line after that indicated the x y coordinates of the second borehole etc This particular sample has 16 boreholes spaced at 10 meter intervals Below can be found a recommended three step protocol for creating grid files 1 First lay out your proposed borehole field on a x y grid similar to the ones shown Doing so will decrease the chance of errors when creating a grid file 79 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module Sample X Y grid S19j8ui SUL
95. A Calculate button used to refresh the calculations Quick importation and modeling of systems designed in the vertical horizontal and pond modules Theoretical Basis The CFD module applies an innovative approach to finding the solution to complex fluid dynamics problems associated with a nearly unlimited range of GHX field designs This modular and patent pending approach involves building up entire piping systems from the following two foundational components e a GHX Circuit with supply return pipes and one or more fittings inlet end outlet e asupply return Pipe Pair with one or more fittings on each pipe These units can be linked together via drag and drop methods in the two dimensional Layout Manager Workspace As a designer links these components together the piping system expands in size and complexity Regardless of the complexity of the designed system the CFD module understands the relationship between individual components families of components and the overall GHX field The CFD module can then calculate a diverse range of fluid dynamics results or can auto size the system to satisfy a designer s requirements such as auto sizing a supply and return headering system that has a 2 ft s flow rate throughout it for purging effectiveness For a designer to competently engineer a system with the CFD module he or she will benefit from a familiarity with both of the above mentioned components as well as the simple grammar tha
96. AP 15 ihe Motor Efficiency 900 90 0 Additional Power 0 0 kW 0 0 kW Installation Area 300 0 fte2 Fig 9 8 Geothermal System Tabbed Panel Primary Geothermal Hybrid Component COOLING HEATING Eqv Full Load Hours 255 hr 4023 hr Hybrid Type Cooling Tower Boiler Fuel Type Electricity Electricity Hybrid System Capacity 0 0 kBtu hr 0 0 kBtu hr Hybrid Unit Efficiency 9 Additional Power 0 0 kan Installation Area 0 0 EYE H Water Usage Rate D 00 gpm ton 0 00 gpm ton Fig 9 9 Geothermal System Tabbed Panel Primary Geothermal Tab Cooling In this column the user can enter details about the geothermal cooling system s Equivalent Full Load Hours The user can enter the equivalent full load hours here if the user has not imported the data automatically from a heat exchanger project design 179 CHAPTER 9 The Financial Module Peak Capacity The user can enter the peak capacity note that this is the peak load covered by the equipment and not the installed equipment capacity here if the user has not imported the data automatically from a heat exchanger project design Average Heat Pump Efficiency Here the user enters the expected EER for the cooling side of the system if the user has not imported the data automatically from a heat exchanger project design Note that if the user has imported the data from a vertical heat exchanger project that has monthly
97. CHAPTER 2 Adding Editing Heat Pumps variations without worrying about how the individual pumps in various zones will react to such changes The heat pump model employed in GLD reproduces the complete operational data of any particular unit when supplied with a few representative data points selected from across the range of interest Data for each pump can be entered into the model and grouped together under manufacturer and series headings The data need only be input once and then can be used repeatedly for subsequent modeling sessions Pump data is stored permanently in the pumps directory Many popular pumps from major manufacturers already are included with the program In both heating and cooling modes the minimum data required is the capacity and power variations with source inlet temperature To increase the modeling accuracy these same variations have to be included at a second flow rate Even more accurate results can be obtained if correction factors are provided for variations in the load inlet temperature and flow rate The level of accuracy depends both on the amount of data available and the time the designer wants to invest Note that GLD s heat pump module allows for both water to air and water to water pumps Theoretical Basis Capacity and Power Heat pump capacities and power requirements vary smoothly but significantly for differing source inlet temperatures Three points taken along both the capacity vs temp
98. CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones Z Average Block Loads Se elie Dje gmW amp a Untitled zon Reference Label Design Day Loads 70 Days Week Design Day Loads Time of Day Heat Gains Heat Losses Hourly Data kBtu Hr kBtu Hr Transfer 8am Non 0 0 zs Noon 4p m 0 0 Calculate Hours 4pm 8pm 0 0 Monthly Loads 8pm 8am 00 0 0 Annual EgivalentFulloadHours 0 0 Heat Pump Specifications at Design Temperature and Flow Rate V CustomPump Pump Name Cooling Heating Capacity KBtujHr so 0 0 Details Power kW 0 0 00 er EER COP a 0 0 Flow Rate gpm 0 0 Partial Load Factor 0 00 0 Flow Rate S omon Unit Inlet F 85 0 50 0 oo Fig 3 10 Average Block Loads Module Average Block Loads h s e w amp a m Monthly Load Data Update M E Henting Peak Total Peak Cancel ketu 2l kBtu hr 2l ketu 2l ketu hr 2 January 0 February March April May June July August September October November December Total 3 0 3 0 M Hours at Peak 3 Hours at Peak Flow Rate ES ax Unit Inlet F 90 40 mm Fig 3 11 Monthly Loads Input Boxes in Average Block Module 51 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones Managing the Average Block Loads The buttons along the top of the Average Block Loads module are used to work with the single panel of loads information A closer view is shown in fig
99. CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module temperatures are more or less identical are in bold and have relevance The temperatures are identical because they represent the average temperature change for the entire loopfield over the design lifetime Since there can be only one overall average and the borehole lengths for heating and cooling are defined and equal the ground temperature change prediction is reported in bold for both heating and cooling j Borehole Design Project verticalsampleforManualINEW o E Results Fluid Soil U Tube Pattern Extra kw Information Calculate Design Day COOLING HEATING Total Length ft 15180 0 15180 0 Borehole Number 60 60 Borehole Length ft 253 0 253 0 Ground Temperature Change F 2 2 2 2 Unit Inlet F 90 0 49 6 Unit Outlet F 100 1 43 6 Total Unit Capacity kBtu Hr 763 2 674 3 Peak Load kBtu Hr 730 5 547 4 Peak Demand kW 57 3 43 7 Heat Pump EER COP 13 4 3 9 System EER COP 12 7 3 7 System Flow Rate gpm 136 9 Optional Cooling Tower Boiler Condenser Capacity kBtu hr Cooling Tower Flow Rate gpm tact qon Cooling Range F Boiler Annual Operating Hours hr yr je ay Boiler Capacity kBtu hr ERES Cooling Tower 0 96 Load Balance mmmn Fig 4 19 Results Panel Contents Fixed Length Design Day The third subsection of the report lists the heat pump inlet and outlet temperatures of the circulating fluid The f
100. Design and Optimization Calculate El Peak Load Fig 11 22 Flow Scenario Selection 231 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Remember that the flow rates for each can be entered in the Fluid panel Section Four The Properties Window The fourth section is the Properties Window When a designer selects a piping design component in the Layout Manager Workspace a wide range of details pertaining to the component can be viewed and modified in the Properties Window A Property Window can be seen in figure 11 23 b Piping Module Layout Fluid Automation Circulation Pumps Layout Design and Optimization Calculate El Peak Load GHX Module Supply Return Runout Alphabetic Categorized U EN Tena Ei GHX Header Section 01 DNE U Circuit 02 oe ecd Fittings Pipe 2 Flow Rate General Pipe 1 Pipe 2 Pressure Drop Reynold s Number Velocity Volume Fig 11 23 The Properties Window In figure 11 23 in the Layout Manager Workspace circuit 1 has been selected Details regarding circuit 1 can be seen in the Properties Window Properties for all GHX Circuits include the following Fittings end or bottom Fittings on pipe 1 the supply side pipe of the GHX Circuit Fittings on pipe 2 the return side pipe of the GHX Circuit Flow Rate General Information Pipe 1 supply pipe details Pipe 2 return pipe details Pressure Drop Reynold s Number 232 C
101. Extr a Section Outlet Separation ft 6 0 0 0 Section Outlet Pipe Size SDR11 2 in 50 mm Supply Return Runout Information Extra One Way Length ft 200 0 0 0 Pipe Size SDR11 3 in 80 mm Fig 11 8 Manifold Information Panel Contents Return Piping Style This section stores information related to direct and reverse return systems Return Type Return type is locked at direct return since reverse return Manifolds are rarely if ever used Section Outlet Information The section outlet information refers to how the outlets in the Manifold connect to GHX Modules via the GHX Module Supply Return Runouts Section Outlet Number Here the user enters the number of outlets there are in the Manifold Vault that connect to GHX Modules via the GHX Module Supply Return Runouts Section Outlet Separation 214 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Here the user enters the distance separating the section outlets in the Manifold Vault Section Outlet Pipe Size Here the user enters the outlet size connecting to GHX Modules via the GHX Module Supply Return Runout s Supply Return Runout Information The Manifold Supply Return Runout information refers to the pipe pair that is the parent of the Manifold Vault For example in an in building Manifold system the Supply Return Runout information would likely pertain to the pipe pair going to from the Manifold and to from the circulati
102. Fittings Er Add New Pipe Pair Add New Circuit Pipe and Fitting Manager Copy Selection Paste Selection Delete Add Circulation Pump Fig 11 53 Right Click on the Component of Interest and Choose Copy Selection 267 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module After doing so the user can paste the circuit in a variety of places in the tree either as a child in a preexisting component nested component family figures 11 54 and 11 55 or as an independent circuit figure 11 56 Layout Design and Optimization Required Total Circuit Length ft 0 0 Total Circuit Number 0 Caiculate B B Peak Load Add New Pipe Pair Add New Reverse Return Pipe Pair Add New Circuit Add New GHX Module Pipe and Fitting Manager Copy Selection Paste Selection Delete Add Circulation Pump Rer Fig 11 54 Select the Component of Interest Right Click and Choose Paste Selection Layout Design and Optimization Calculate E EI E Pipe Pair UH E Pipe Pair U Circuit Fig 11 55 The Circuit Has Been Copied and Pasted as a New Child to a Parent Pipe Pair 268 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Layout Design and Optimization Calculate E Elta Pipe Pair E m Pipe Pair U U Circuit Fig 11 56 The Circuit Has Been Copied and Pasted As An Independent Parent Note that copying and pasting is not limited to individual components Entire nested c
103. Flow Rate Auto Optimizer The designer may now return to the Layout tab select the Purge Results Type from the dropdown menu and hit the Calculate button again Results from the 8 GHX Circuit GHX Module described in figure 11 87 above are available for view in figure 11 92 below Notice how the GHX Circuit and not the GHX Header section velocities are all at 2 ft s or higher Compare these circuit velocities to those in figure 11 87 above Layout Design and Optimization Calculate B eaii m U Circuit 01 9 GHX Header Section 01 U Circuit 02 35 GHX Header Section 02 U circuit 03 9 GHX Header Section 03 U Circuit 04 35 GHX Header Section 04 U Circuit 05 GHX Header Section 05 U Circuit 06 35 GHX Header Section 06 U Circuit 07 9 GHX Header Section 07 U circuit 08 Pipe 1 Size Pipe 2 Size Pipe 1 Velocity Pipe 2 velocity Pipe 1 Reynold s Number Pipe 2 Reynold s Number ET RNRNRNRRNENR NR NEE BRNKRNENENENENRN HE Fig 11 92 The Purging Flow Rate Has Been Calculated to Provide 2 ft s Velocities To see what Purging Flow Rate provides the 2 ft s minimum velocity the user may return to the Fluid tab From figure 11 92 it is clear that a flow rate of 68 3 gpm covers the minimum 2 ft s velocity required for purging air out of the GHX Circuits 300 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Fluid Information Peak Load Flow Rate gpm 30 00 Installed C
104. Graphing Module in GLD Premier 2010 is much more powerful than the Yer graphing functions in previous versions of GLD In the new module users can left click the mouse and drag a box around an area of interest in the graph Users can then release the mouse button fo zoom in on the area of interest This process can be repeated multiple times Users can right click the mouse at any time to zoom out to the original view Within the graph the designer can choose which data to view save and or print Options include Q heat transferred to or from the ground heat pump power consumption borehole temperature Tf the average temperature of fluid in the borehole calculated as the average of exiting and entering temperatures average exiting water temperature average entering water temperature and minimum a 101 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module variation of the average calculated from the application of short term heating loads and maximum a variation from the average calculated from the application of short term peak cooling loads entering water temperatures The designer can also add a title and legend to the graph More than one graph can be open at the same time enabling designers to quickly compare different designs Saved graphs can be found in the GLD Graph Images folder A dated monthly data text file containing the temperature data is generated and stored in the Monthly Data folder each time the Calculate button is pressed
105. Ground Loop Design Geothermal Design Studio 2010 Edition User s Manual English GLD Premier 2010 Edition for Windows Gaia Geothermal www gaiageo com Copyright Notice Ground Loop Design Premier 2010 User s Guide 2010 Celsia LLC All Rights Reserved This guide as well as the software described in it is furnished for information purposes only to licensed users of the GLD software product and is furnished on an AS IS basis without any warranties whatsoever express or implied This may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of the included End User License Agreement The information in this manual is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by Gaia Geothermal Gaia Geothermal assumes no responsibility or liability for errors or inaccuracies that may occur in this book Except as permitted by such license no part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any means electronic mechanical recording or otherwise without the prior written consent of Gaia Geothermal Other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective holders Microsoft Excel Windows Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows NT Windows Explorer Windows ME Windows XP Windows 2000 and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Netscape Navigator is a registered trademark of Nets
106. HAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module e Velocity e Volume Properties for Pipe Pairs Supply Return Runouts GHX Deader sections are identical except that they have only two fittings by default rather than the three by default of GHX Circuits Users can explore the details of each property section by clicking on the to expand the view In figure 11 24 the Pipe 1 supply pipe property details have been expanded i b Piping Module Layout Fluid Automation Circulation Pumps Layout Design and Optimization Calculate El Peak Load El GHX Module Supply Return Runout Alphabetic Categorized U El GHX Header Section 01 U Circuit 02 Fittings Pipe 1 Fittings Pipe 2 Flow Rate General Pipe nnen pe 1 Diameter Inne 1 08 Pipe 1 Diameter Out 1 32 Pipe 1 Length ft 300 00 Pipe 1 Length Extra 0 00 Pipe 1 Name Pipe 1 Pipe 1 Size 1 in 25 mm Pipe 1 Type SDR11 Pipe 1 Volume gal 89 Pipe 2 Pressure Drop Reynold s Number Velocity Volume Fig 11 24 Pipe 1 Properties for GHX Circuit 1 Expanded Pipe 1 has a number of user definable and modifiable properties including the pipe length an extra pipe length the pipe name as it is displayed in the Layout Manager Workspace the pipe size and the pipe type Grayed out properties such as the fluid volume in the pipe are calculated by the program automatically and not adjustable Note that the Properties Window is only one of several ways
107. In each of the two sections results are presented in two columns the first is for the geothermal system and the second is for the alternate system s When more than one alternate system has been defined users can scroll through the different alternate systems using the arrows Note that the presented costs are the summations of heating cooling and hybrid system costs Data are broken down into their constituent parts and displayed in the reports see below 184 CHAPTER 9 The Financial Module S Finance Module Results Geothermal Conventional Estimated Cost Results Calculate Annual Costs Energy CO2 Emissions Water Maintenance formanual fin Utilities Other Costs Incentives Geothermal Mechanical Room Lease Annual Total NPY Lifecycle Costs ID years Energy CO2 Emissions Water Maintenance 10 297 83 1 255 41 554 63 3 000 00 2 050 00 17 157 87 109 523 55 Mechanical Room Lease Installation Salvage Lifecycle Total 8 452 39 5 546 25 26 198 23 17 902 13 100 800 00 2 107 76 277 514 79 Alternate E 4 gt Air cooled Chiller Boiler 19 676 14 1 698 51 0 00 5 000 00 3 077 05 29 451 70 219 211 77 11 435 60 0 00 43 663 72 26 871 09 93 032 00 913 36 393 300 83 Fig 9 10 Geothermal System Tabbed Panel Annual Costs The annual costs section presents costs associated with running the geothermal system and alternate systems over a si
108. NOT highlight the column and row descriptions if any Then in the Import Loads window click on the Excel icon The data will be imported The data can be modified directly in the Import Loads window or by hitting the Modify button the user can open the file in the Equivalent Hours Calculator where the data can be edited as well The user can transfer the modified data into the Average Block Loads module by pressing the Transfer button When both the Calculator and the Import Loads windows are open the program first will ask the user from which window the Calculator or the Import Loads window he or she wishes to transfer data The program then prompts the user to decide to which loads heating or cooling the data should be transferred The second way to import the loads data is to save the Excel file as a csv file into the Loads Files Monthly Data Files folder To import this csv file the user can choose the zone of interest and then click on the Import button at the top of the Zone Manager loads module It looks like this a Navigate to the csv file of interest and import it into GLD 66 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones When Imported Data is Not Detailed Enough How the Program Modifies External Loads Files In the case of a loads program that generates only total monthly loads and peak monthly demand nothing is known about the daily hour by hour transfer of heat to or from the installation This information is important
109. Pipe 1 to Pipe 2 automatically In most cases designers want to make the same changes to both pipes and this feature saves some time Fittings The fittings section can be seen in figure 11 67 below 276 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Pipe Section Name Circuit 02 Pipes Fittings Fitting Name Fitting Type Butt Tee Branch Pipe Type SDR11 Pipe Size 1 in 25 mm Eqv Length ft Volume gal Fig 11 67 The Fittings Section in the Pipe and Fitting Manager The fittings tab is broken into either two or three tabbed panels depending on the selected component If a pipe pair has been selected there are two available fittings tabbed panels Pipe 1 and Pipe 2 If a circuit has been selected three fittings tabbed panels will be available Pipe 1 Pipe 2 and End In figure 11 67 3 tabbed panels are available indicating that a circuit was selected as indeed was the case as can be seen in figure 11 65 above For some designs engineers will use two or more fittings in series at a single piping connection point The CFD module enables a designer to add more than one fitting as necessary When additional fittings are added they are added to the Properties Window and of course included in the calculations As can be seen above a single pipe fitting a 1 SDR11 Butt Tee branch fitting has been selected A designer can add or remove fittings as necessary via the buttons whic
110. S RE EQ PI T OUS 52 Monthly Loads erret OS eR E ER MP Urbe ats 53 Hourly Loads ete eet peo DIEI Re ERTRU Y Ede 54 Graphical View of Loads scorre teet rem prt et E at Repo 55 Pump Selection mrii tee Roo Coleg eec D Hd er e ig ete er 56 Details and Clear iu t eere eerte ere vx rper tes 57 Custom Pump Customization cesses menm 57 Pump Continuous Update Feat re secc ieena i e n a E E a ei 57 The Studio Tink System rra a ere Ee EEE die E E eee EES 57 Making a Links eR pie was Ri E ed ade E E E o A 58 Unlinking 2er e ERE E E E E E A as AEE 58 Studio Link Status Taghts 7 oe orie yk Oo Deest E a R 59 Importing Loads Data From External Programs sessereeserresssrrersrreerrererrseree 59 Importing Loads into the Average Block Loads Module 59 Importing Loads From 3rd Party Programs esee 60 Importing Loads From Spreadsheets eee 62 Importing Loads into the Zone Manager Loads Module 64 Importing Loads From 3rd Party Programs sees 65 Importing Loads From Spreadsheets eee 65 When Imported Data is Not Detailed Enough seese 67 Review of Loads Entty eere eec tee pene eee des aca saga YR DRE p HE EN RE E RUY UE 68 Design Day Loads eee oet px Ree eren g E NER EE EE s 69 Annual Equivalent Full Loads Hours eee 69 Su
111. Sizing Control There are three ways to optimize the Layout Manager Workspace area 1 The designer can adjust the size of the entire CFD module in one of two ways First the designer can maximize the module by hitting the maximize button in the upper right corner of the CFD module Second the designer can move the mouse cursor to one of the edges of the CFD module and then click hold drag to expand the CFD module An expanded CFD module can be seen in figure 11 19 Compare this to figure 11 16 b Piping Module gw e Layout Fluid Automation Circulation Pumps Layout Design and Optimization Calculate E E Peak Load im Alphabetic Categorized Fig 11 19 An Expanded Layout Screen Provides More Room to Work 2 The designer can move the Properties Window the window on the right side in the default configuration to the bottom of the Layout tab to provide more horizontal room for the Layout Manager Workspace The designer can do this by hitting the Toggle View button which can be found in the bottom right corner of the Layout panel I When the user hits the Toggle View button the screen will shift as can be seen in figure 11 20 In this view the Layout Manager Workspace extends to the right edge of the CFD module and the Properties Window is 229 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module underneath the Layout Manager Workspace For systems with large GHX Modules
112. TATION MAY NOT APPLY TO CUSTOMER Term and Termination This End User Agreement is effective until terminated Customer s license rights under this End User Agreement will terminate immediately without notice from Gaia if Customer fails to comply with any provision of this End User Agreement Upon termination Customer must destroy all copies of Software and the corresponding keys in its possession or control Compliance With Law Each party agrees to comply with all applicable laws rules and regulations in connection with its activities under this End User Agreement Without limiting the foregoing Customer acknowledges and agrees that the Software including technical data is subject to United States export control laws including the United States Export Administration Act and its associated regulations and may be subject to export or import regulations in other countries Customer agrees to comply strictly with all such regulations and acknowledges that Customer has the responsibility to obtain licenses to export re export or import the Software Restricted Rights The Software shall be classified as commercial computer software as defined in the applicable provisions of the Federal Acquisition Regulation the FAR and supplements thereto including the Department of Defense DoD FAR Supplement the DFARS The parties acknowledge that the Software was developed entirely at private expense and that no part of the Software was
113. Temp vs Time Temp vs In Time Power vs Time Flow Rate vs Time iv Show Title MV Show Legend V Show Fit Temperature F 20 30 Time Hours Fig 10 7 Graphing Module Results 195 CHAPTER 10 The Thermal Conductivity Module Calculation Interval The calculation interval is a key factor in the data analysis Typically conductivity tests are run for approximately 48 72 hours and the 12 to 40 hour data range are used in calculations In this section the user can input their desired interval range prior to calculating or recalculating the conductivity and estimating the diffusivity See the graphs section below for more information on the relationship between this interval and the graphed data Calculation Results The calculation results section displays the calculated thermal conductivity and slope of the line the average heat flux and average power the calculated borehole thermal resistance BTR the estimated thermal diffusivity estimate based off of calculated conductivity and user input soil values in the Diffusivity panel and the average flow rate note that if flow rate calibration data are not entered in the Flow tab the flow rate result may not be applicable If users adjust the calculation interval and hit the Calculate button again these results will be updated Note that the BTR calculation is extremely sensitive to the undisturbed ground temperature Designers are encouraged to
114. The Edit Add Heat Pumps module is covered in detail in Chapter 2 Zones Loads Modules GLD employs two different types of load input schemes With the Zone Manager Loads module users can perform a detailed analysis With the Average Block Loads module users can make quick estimates without performing detailed component design work In Premier Financial 2010 Edition users can optionally add monthly and or hourly loads data to the Average Block Loads and then 11 CHAPTER 1 GLD Overview calculate month by month and or hour by hour inlet temperatures in a Borehole Design module These stand alone modules are linked to design modules using the Studio Link system Chapter 3 Both modules can import loads data from commercial loads programs and Excel files Zone Manager Loads Module Component style designs often are more appropriate for geothermal installations particularly when equipment is available in various sizes The units can be placed near or within the locations to be conditioned With regard to water source heat pumps it is often much easier to bring water lines to the equipment instead of providing ductwork or long load lines from a centralized source When considering geothermal applications the precision of the zone loads model is crucial because it relates directly to the extent of external heat exchanger installation Heat exchanger costs impact the overall costs of a project Additionally a unit that is called only when n
115. X Header Section 1 B B I 1 p 3 Circuit 1 Circuit 2 Circuit 3 Fig 11 34 A Reverse Return GHX Module The reverse return system in the figure 11 34 has three flow paths The three flow paths are 246 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module 1 Fluid circulates from supply pipe of Pipe Pair A through Circuit 1 and then continues on into the return pipe of Pipe Pair B and then into the return pipe of Pipe Pair C and finally into the return pipe of Pipe Pair A 2 Fluid circulates from supply pipe of Pipe Pair A to the supply pipe of Pipe Pair B through Circuit 2 and then continues on into the return pipe of Pipe Pair C and finally into the return pipe of Pipe Pair A 3 Fluid circulates from supply pipe of Pipe Pair A to the supply pipe of Pipe Pair B to the supply pipe of Pipe Pair C to Circuit 3 and then continues on into the return pipe of Pipe Pair A In other words in a reverse return system the flow paths stay pretty much the same length for all the GHX circuits This can be seen even in the descriptions of the three path flows above they are all about the same length compare this to the descriptions of the three path flows in the direct return section and notice how those get progressively longer In a reverse return system the flow paths within the GHX Module section are the same length for each molecule of water regardless of whether the molecule goes through Circuit 1 or through Circuit
116. aate eee helene IAT Informat ona cr 147 Calculation Results 3 5 2 oen ettet e E e E Rd DR RE ERROR 147 Inp t Parameters 5 aee f er ee iat dede 148 TO adS hess E C etd eee a dite hale octtec det eevee 148 Monthly Inlet Tetnperat res ere ere ere eme Reste 148 Comments senders ck oeste Hte testi cave de ch ester ye CER RR dos ete eT ce 148 Zone Reports 4 1 isi ee M ve tie OH Et etie cree LAS Detailed Porm iis c P NT ORA PU ET 149 C ODCISe FOEI s rcr dc re Ier RT TUE TE eR EE sates 149 CONTENTS Equipment List os uino tud teet e OR RE Cete becas 149 Loads TISU thence eoe o ded e e EROR 149 Names 13st eiecti ROO NEG qui ees 150 Finance Reports uuo itt et egies ege eto PE RAO EQ DRE ERR DURER 150 Concise Form ee ee tide e E e E E ERIS 150 Detailed Form uei tee EE RE 150 Inputs Forms e there td RE Re xt OERA 150 Financial Analysis Form ettet RR Ret tT Ide E 151 Thermal Conductivity Report ccc cece cece eee ee cece I Ie emen 151 Fluid Dynamics Report 4 e rp eee E debeo da cA Rue 151 Concluding Rematks oa ERR Gnawa eA tret ste que 151 Chapter 8 Tables and Data Reference Files 152 OVEDVIEW C ny Tables Included with Ground Loop Design ccc cece eee e cence eee e ee ene ea ene en eees 153 Fluid Properties 2 2 ertet DOE EAR Shade oy tate poe PEST eror es 153 Sollen snc E 154 Pipe Properties 3
117. ach fuel type and an overall discount rate that is used in the NPV calculations The Utility Costs panel is divided into two sections rates for common fuels and annual inflation rates Finance Module HorizontalSample Results Geothermal Conventional Utilities Other Costs Incentives Rates for Common Fuels WINTER Energy Source SUMMER Electricity 0 10 Fuel Oil 4 00 Natural Gas 0 012 Propane 3 50 Wood 300 00 Coal 40 00 Biomass 300 00 Water 0 0015 kWh Gallon ft 3 Gallon ton ton ton Gallon 0 10 4 00 0 012 3 50 300 00 40 00 300 00 0 0015 kWh Gallon f 3 Gallon ton ton ton Gallon Annual Inflation Rates Fuel Inflation Rate Electricity 3 0 50 ES Discount Rate Fig 9 4 Utility Costs Panel Contents Rates for Common Fuels The rates for common fuels can be entered in the Rates for Common Fuels section These fuels include electricity fuel oil natural gas propane wood coal biomass excluding wood and wood pellets and water Although water is not a fuel it is consumed in some HVAC systems such as cooling towers and therefore is included here for financial modeling purposes 171 CHAPTER 9 The Financial Module Note that it is essential that users enter rates for both summer and winter AN rates even if they are identical Failure to do so will result in underestimated cost
118. ader Section 5 highlighted with a 1 1 2 pipe and reduce down to a final 3 4 header section Notice also the Header sizes in the Pipe 2 return pipe column They start out at the top with a 3 4 diameter pipe in GHX Header Section 1 and gradually increase until reaching a steady state 2 diameter at GHX Header Section 4 In the Header Sections the Pipe 1 and Pipe 2 sizes are exact opposite palindromes 303 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module This is because they are a reverse return system which necessitates such a setup If the system had been direct return the layout would appear quite different Layout Design and Optimization Calculate Bi gl Name Pipe 1 Size Pipe 2 Size i i ipe ity Pipe 1 Reynold s Number Pipe 2 Reynold s Number GHX Module Supply Return Pipe 2 5 37 ft s 55098 U Circuit 01 2 2 00 ft s a 11372 96 GHX Header Section 01 P 5 4 75 ft s E 48802 U circuit 02 2 23 ft s 12654 926 GHX Header Section 02 z 4 07 ft s A 41795 U Circuit 03 d s 2 25 ft s 12814 2 GHX Header Section 03 z r 3 38 ft s E 34701 U circuit 04 5 2 27 ft s 3 12916 96 GHX Header Section 04 2 2 68 bd 27549 U Circuit ia 1 2 27 fi 12916 s E ST EE T CRM E U Circuit 06 2 fis 2 25 fis 12814 2 GHX Header Section 06 i 1 4 2 65 ft s 4 07 ft s 19033 U Circuit 07 1 f 2 23 ft s 2 23 ft s 12654 96 GHX Header Section 07 3 4 Z 3 14 ft s 4 75 ft s 14242 U Circuit 08 i
119. along with the associated results Zone and loads information can be printed separately from the Loads panel The filename of the zon file associated with the project report is also listed on the report Three different project reports are available concise detailed and detailed with loads The concise form includes all of the design parameters but leaves out some of the project information and comments The detailed form includes the information and comments More information on reports can be found in Chapter 7 145 CHAPTER 7 Reports CHAPTER 7 Reports This chapter covers the report creation and printing features of GLD It includes project zone and financial reports Overview GLD includes reporting features These features have been added for professionals who need to keep records of their designs and communicate them to others There are nine different report styles included within the package and this chapter provides an explanation of as well as suggested uses for each type of report The Report Preview Window When a particular report is selected a report preview window opens to show a preview of the report Report preview windows have a zoom feature that allows adjustment of the magnification Additionally reports may be sent to a printer or exported as various file types including text and html Multiple reports may be opened simultaneously even if they originate from the same project Report preview windo
120. aluable when users require thorough designs The Average Block Loads module offers a rapid system of entering whole systems information for users who do not require or desire to input the data for a fully zone divided installation Rather than matching specific pumps to each zone the Average Block Loads module uses a particular user defined style of pump or COP and matches it in an average way to the entire installation Although the input scheme is simpler the design calculations are identical to those of the more complex Zone Manager Loads module In fact on average if identical values could be placed in both the Zone Manager and Average Block loads modules identical calculated bore lengths would result The Average Block Loads module optionally can accept monthly loads total and peak data New in the GLD 2010 Edition the Average Block Loads module also can accept 8760 hourly loads data When the user inputs these monthly and or hourly data the program provide a number of calculated outputs included monthly hourly borehole evolution temperatures heat pump performance on a monthly or hourly basis graphical representations of the thermal storage effects from balanced loads profiles etc Zone Files Zone loads files are stored as zon files in the GLD zones directory They have a general format that can be read into any loads module and they can be used simultaneously in different design modules However if this is done it
121. alysis depends on the needs of the user If the user enters only some of the cost factors then some costs can not be calculated or displayed If the user enters all of the cost factors then all of the costs can be calculated and displayed For the single year costs the program sums up the various costs for a single year of operation and displays the results For the lifetime costs the program uses a net present value NPV analysis that incorporates an overall discount rate as well as inflation rates associated with different fuel types Opening Projects There are two ways to open Finance projects One is by using the New Finance command from the Design Studio File menu or toolbar and the other is by opening an existing Finance project fin file from within the finance module In the design studio only one financial module can be open at a time New Projects New financial projects may be opened at any time from the Design Studio by choosing New Finance from either the Design Studio File menu or the toolbar New projects open with standard cost values that the user can modify as necessary for new projects The module opens directly into the Results panel New financial projects can be for a stand alone financial analysis or for use in conjunction with an existing heat exchanger design project For use in conjunction with an existing heat exchanger design project see below 161 CHAPTER 9 The Financial Module Impo
122. ams express results in a number of different ways GLD edits the input data so that it matches the Design Day formalism used on the main screen of the Average Block Loads Modules Occasionally however the data from external loads programs do not have the hour by hour level of detail In these cases the designer or GLD must make modifications to the imported data to assure that the proper level of detail is retained In this way the program can be certain to calculate the appropriate heat exchanger size These modifications are explained at the end of this chapter that GLD can accept Figure 3 18 is an example of how GLD displays the monthly loads of figure 3 17 in the Design Day formalism found on the main page of the Average Block Loads module Sample gt1 Trane Trace 700 Total Peak kBtu kBtu hr 860778 0 hr Monthly Load Factor Modify Close Cooling Heating Fig 3 17 Import Loads Window Design Day Loads Days Occupied per Week 70 Transfer Calculate Hours Design Day Loads Time of Day 8 a m Noon Moon 4 p m 4 p m 8 p m 8 p m 8 a m Annual Equivalent Full Load Hours Heat Gains Heat Losses MBtu Hr X MBtu Hr 157 2 2014 5521 00 1572 00 1572 00 61 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones Fig 3 18 Results of Importing Hourly Loads Data When the user selects a valid hourly loads import file the program automatically transfers the data i
123. an existing loads file into one of the loads modules Links may be established using the Studio Link system described in Chapter 3 Existing Projects Existing projects may be opened at any time from the Design Studio by choosing Open from the Design Studio File menu or toolbar The file automatically opens into a new Borehole Design Project module If a loads file zon is associated with the loaded project the loads file automatically will be loaded into the appropriate loads module and opened along with the project file However if the associated loads file cannot be found the user will be notified and the automatic file loading will not occur Saving Projects Projects may be saved at any time using Save or Save As from the Design Studio File menu or by clicking the save button on the toolbar When the user closes the program or module the program automatically asks the user if he or she wants to save the project and associated loads files Typical Operation Although each user will have his or her own unique style the typical operation of the Borehole Design module would include the following steps 73 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module 1 Enter Loads and select pump in either the Average Block Loads module or the Zone Manager module Form a link between the loads module and the design module Modify step by step the input parameters listed in each panel Perform initial calculation Modify various p
124. and notices of other proprietary rights that appear on the original Proprietary Rights Customer shall own the physical media on which the Software is recorded but the Software is and will remain the sole and exclusive property of Gaia Gaia s rights under this Section will include but not be limited to i all copies of the Software in whole and in part and ii all Intellectual Property Rights in the Software For purposes herein Intellectual Property Rights means patent rights including patent applications and disclosures copyrights including but not limited to rights in audiovisual works and moral rights trade secret rights rights of priority and any other intellectual property right recognized in any country or jurisdiction in the world Moral Rights means any right to claim authorship to or to object to any distortion mutilation or other modification or other derogatory action in relation to a work whether or not such would be prejudicial to the author s reputation and any similar right existing under common or statutory law or any country in the world or under any treaty regardless of whether or not such right is denominated or generally referred to as a moral right Confidential Information Customer agrees that Customer will not disclose or except as expressly permitted in this End User Agreement use any Software or other technical information disclosed to Customer by Gaia Confidential Information and t
125. and then uses these values to calculate the length of heat exchanger required aax Heat Pumps Loads RR B cg amp g Untitled zon r zone 1 Loads Panel Reference Label r Design Day Loads Design Day Loads Days Occupied Time of Day Heat Gains Heat Losses per Week MBtujHr MBtu Hr 7 0 8 a m Noon 0 0 o 0 Transfer eese 0 0 0 0 4 p m 8 p m 0 0 0 0 Calculate Hours 8 p m 8 a m 0 0 0 0 Annual Equivalent Full Load Hours 178 9 mHeat Pump Specifications at Design Temperature and Flow Rate Pump Mame 3 V Cust m Pump Gelect 1 Cooling Heating Auto Selsct Capacity MBtu Hr 0 0 0 0 Emm Power kW 0 00 0 00 EER COP 0 0 0 0 Details Flow Rate gpm 0 0 0 0 Clear Partial Load Factor 0 00 0 00 Flow Rate 3 0 gpmjton Unit Inlet F 85 0 50 0 oO Fig 3 1 Zone Manager Loads Module Main View The Zone Manager loads module can be opened either from the Loads Menu or by clicking the Zone Manager toolbar button An example of the module opened to the Loads tabbed panel is shown in figure 3 1 The Heat Pumps tabbed panel will be discussed shortly In the Main View Zones in GLD are organized in a list on the left side of the Loads tabbed panel Each zone panel contains information relating to the working zone including a zone name the loading information and the information about any heat pumps selected for that zone Selecting a different zon
126. andos et al 2009 recently developed modifications to the G function which are implemented in GLD 2010 GLD also employs its own internal borehole superposition model allowing users to define the borehole layout in a gridfile import the gridfile into the program and then automatically determine the required G function 16 CHAPTER 1 GLD Overview Because of increased data entry requirements for the monthly and peak loads data in the second model it is only applicable when used in conjunction with the Average Block Loads module where only one set of monthly loads data is required per installation Use of the Zone Manager is limited to the original cylindrical source theoretical model The other design modules currently do not make specific use of the monthly loads data except in the reduced equivalent hours form Horizontal Design Module Description The Horizontal Design module similar to the Borehole Design module allows the user to enter parameters necessary to describe a horizontal buried pipe and trench configuration Again the interface is arranged in panels corresponding to the type of input Key design parameters also can be modified quickly in the expanded user interface as well see figure 1 2 above After the user enters all parameters the software calculates results such as the required trench and pipe lengths the inlet and outlet temperatures the coefficient of performance COP etc based on the input
127. apacity Flow Rate gpm 60 00 Purging Flow Rate gpm Auto Size Minimum Maximum Purging Target Velocity ft s 2 00 100 00 Fig 11 92 68 3 gpm Will Purge the GHX Circuits at 2 ft s Properly purging a system of air also requires that the supply and return headering pairs are properly purged This more complex engineering challenge is addressed by the GHX Header Design Optimizer The GHX Header Design Optimizer Properly purging a GHX Header system is more difficult than purging individual GHX Circuits because the GHX Header pairs are of larger diameter and therefore require higher flow rates to ensure a particular purging target velocity is achieved Higher flow rates require larger and more expensive purging pumps To avoid these higher pumping costs designers usually design and build reducing headers that gradually shrink in diameter across the GHX Module As the headers shrink in diameter the velocity is boosted As a result the required purging flow rates for a system with reducing headers is lower and costs less than for a system that has uniform diameter pipes across the entire headering system Therefore designers in the know design reducing headers for both direct and reverse return systems The calculations necessary for determining the predicted flow rates and velocities under different piping design systems is a complex and in some cases monumental challenge As a result most loopfield designers understand a few bas
128. arameter Senen ocoot Ie s tr e k terere OR Sede ese DER i skys 84 Borehole Diameter and Backfill Grout Information 85 SOUL percha 85 Drilling Log Conductivity Calculator eese 87 Diffusivity Calculator esses 87 Modeling Time Period aese eiid aaae aaa E e e 88 iii CONTENTS Fluid E ta aa aa hee Gis eautan ing gee E ed atuhalag satis R aS 89 Design Heat Pump Inlet Fluid Temperatures eseseess 89 Design System Flow Rate 0 cece ees cece eee ee ene teens eireas 89 Solution Properties iore teer tama etr Rr pra e PPP ere 90 Result ELTERN 91 Design Day Results Fixed Temperature sese 92 Design Day Results Fixed Length eee 94 Optional Cooling Tower and Boiler cece cece cece eee 96 Monthly Simulation Results Fixed Length sss 98 Graphing Module ir ete etre e tede ah 100 Optional Cooling Tower and Boiler esee 102 Hourly Data Results Fixed Length see 104 Graphing Module teen tere tree entre eh 107 Optional Cooling Tower and Boiler ceeeeee 109 Printing Reports ioo RR TIE eels an E Ree dew Gt yee epe Te dug 110 Chapter 5 The Horizontal Design Module 111 OVERVIEW MC EE 111 General Features 2 etes tete te
129. arameters and recalculate to determine the effects of the modifications Add an optional boiler cooling tower Run a monthly or hourly energy simulation Establish an optimal system Save and or print the project and associated zone file AR WL zen cara EN Entering Data into the Tabbed Panels GLD s innovative tabbed panel system provides for easy organization of and direct access to the relatively large number of design parameters associated with a particular project This section describes the Information Extra kW Pattern U Tube Soil Fluid and Results panels See Chapter 3 for a discussion of Loads entry Information The contents of the Information panel are shown in figure 4 2 All of the descriptive information related to the project is stored in this panel This primarily includes the names of the project and designer and the dates Reference data concerning the client also can be included on this page so that all relevant project information is in one convenient location In addition to generalized project information specialized comments can be included in the Comments section of the Information panel This area allows the designer to make any notes particular to the specific project that may not necessarily fit under any of the other topics provided All of the data in the information panel is optional but completing the page is recommended for the sake of organization Reports utilize the project information as
130. are valuable when communicating the design to others involved in the projects Project Reports Every design module has associated project reports which can be printed at any time from the Design Studio desktop The project report contains all the project information and includes the parameters chosen the calculation results and the name of the zone file used Both concise and detailed versions of the report are available Monthly and Hourly Inlet Temperature Reports Monthly and hourly inlet temperature reports can be printed from the Design Studio desktop after calculating inlet temperatures in the borehole design module The reports contain heat transfer power borehole temperature Tf fluid temperature exiting water temperature entering water temperature minimum entering water temperature and maximum entering water temperature for each month or hour of the design The four reports include a concise temperature report a detailed temperature report a report that offers all project parameters loads data and temperature data and a report that offers project parameters and loads data 21 CHAPTER 1 GLD Overview Zone Reports A print button in the loads modules allows the designer to print the loads related information in various formats Because the zones contain information about the zones the loads and the equipment it is often necessary to obtain reports of the information in separate as well as combined documents
131. are split into equivalent groups for example three groups with ten circuits each the total number of parallel circuits the smallest unit will not change Circuit Style Both loose bundled coils and slinky spread out styles are available If extensive spacers are used in a coil style arrangement the slinky model may provide more accurate results but the loose coil option will provide the more conservative results Circuit Head Loss per 100 feet This is the head loss for the particular style of pipe These values are not entered automatically Instead they come from designer s charts A chart in English units is included with GLD in the Pipe Tables section The designer must be aware that this value changes with pipe size temperature and flow rate Extra Equivalent Length per Circuit This is an average pipe length value included per circuit to take into account all fittings elbows tees etc It is only necessary for the head loss calculations 137 CHAPTER 6 The Surface Water Design Module E3 Surface Water Design Project 1 Results Fluid Soil Piping Surface Water Extra kW Information Primary Number of Lines 2 Pipe Size 2in 50mm Header Length In water 50 0 ft In Soil 150 0 ft Head Loss per 100 feet Cooling 0 9 ft hd Heating 30 ft hd Branches Number of Lines 2 Pipe Size 1 in 25mm Average Branch Length In Water 100 0 ft In Soil ft
132. as 4 8 a HourlyData_07 26 2010_13_20_50 txt Graph Data Average EWT Hourly Data 90 T T T Power l T Borewall T Average Exit WT v Average EWT Minimum EWT Maximum EWT 80r e T Temperature F Iv Show Title a e T Iv Show Legend 40 L L Z 0 1752 351 7008 8760 Figure 4 29 The Graphing Module with Hourly Data The new Graphing Module in GLD Premier 2010 is much more powerful than the graphing functions in previous versions of GLD In the new module users can left click the mouse and drag a box around an area of interest in the graph Users can then release the mouse button to zoom in on the area of interest This process can be repeated multiple times Users can right click the mouse at any time to zoom out to the original view Within the graph the designer can choose which data to view save and or print Options include Q heat transferred to or from the ground heat pump power consumption borehole temperature Tf the average temperature of fluid in the borehole calculated as the average of exiting and entering temperatures average exiting water temperature average entering water temperature and minimum a variation of the average calculated from the application of short term heating loads and maximum a variation from the average calculated from the application of short term peak cooling loads entering water temperatures The d
133. ased on loads provided by the designer This chapter describes the unique GLD loads system and how to enter the loads in both the Zone Manager and the Average Block loads modules In GLD Premier 2010 designers can use 8760 hourly data in the Average Block loads module for precise design control A description of how to prepare and use these data are included Additionally it explains the pump matching capabilities and operation both in automatic and in manual modes At the end of the chapter there is an explanation of how to import external loads files as well as a brief review of the program s loads input methodology The GLD Loads Model The intrinsic flexible nature of the GLD Geothermal Design Studio appears again in the loads models the software employs the user is not limited to a single style of loads input Similar to the design modules a designer can choose between different types of loads input schemes based on the level of complexity he or she desires and the time he or she wishes to invest These loads modules are then linked to one or more design modules using the GLD Studio link system Currently two loads modules are available the Zone Manager Loads module and the Average Block Loads module 38 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones The Zone Manager Loads module is provided for designers who desire a full analysis capability Loads are input as separate zones and each zone is matched with a particular pump This mode is more v
134. at Average Header Pipe Depth These are the summer and winter temperatures at the average depth in the body of water where the submerged portion of the header pipes reside Header Pipe refers to the section of pipe leading from the surface to the 134 CHAPTER 6 The Surface Water Design Module main heat exchanger circuit portion of the loop Further distinctions are described below Primary Header This is the standard header which will most likely come either directly from the installation or from a Manifold that comes from the installation main supply and return lines Branches These will be any branches that split from the primary headers Generally they will be smaller in size than the primary header Details Reference Only The surface water details are not used in any calculations They are included for the designer s reference Several different types of water bodies are included but the designer can type anything in the selection box Piping The Piping panel contains all the information related to the circuit piping and the piping selected for the primary header s and up to one level of branching off the primary header s The heat exchanger circuits actually dominate the heat transfer but if the supply and return lines are long or exposed to different design conditions care must be taken with the header heat transfer The input screen for the piping circuit panel is shown in figure 6 3 Figure 6 4 i
135. at the desired entering water temperature for the heat pumps is provided These calculations depend directly on the header depth surface water and soil temperatures obtained from the Surface Water and Soil panels Additionally the program calculates the average head losses of the system when provided with the head losses per 100 ft for each type of pipe in the system These values vary with pipe size antifreeze and flow rate Several graphs are provided with the program to help determine these values for pure water and standard solutions but the designer is ultimately responsible for making sure the appropriate values are entered These head loss calculations also require the one way length of the header which is doubled within the program to account for both the supply and return lines Because the inputs to headers and branches are similar they are described together below Number of Lines This is the number of header or branch lines in the system Pipe Size This is the size of the pipe used in the primary header or branches For pumping reasons the size of the primary header is generally larger than the branch and circuit pipe sizes and branches are generally larger than the circuit pipe size Header Length Average Branch Length This is the designer defined one way length of the pipe from the installation to the water line and then from the water to the circuit pipes Different heat transfer calculations are used for the hea
136. ate Some designers desire to see the fluid dynamics performance of their piping system under the installed capacity flow rate for circulation pump sizing purposes for example Typically the installed capacity flow rate is higher than the peak load flow rate Purging Flow Rate Knowing the appropriate purging flow rate is essential for proper purging of a GHX Module or a GHX field prior to start up Failure to purge a system properly can result in decreased system performance Calculating a purging flow rate for a particular system can be a time intensive process In addition many designers prefer to engineer a GHX Module headering system to ensure ease of purging Such engineering can require significant effort As a result many engineers design the same system over and over again without exploring potentially more efficient design scenarios The new CFD module can automatically size the headering system save time and provide designers with a new way to experiment and innovate Manual Entry of Purging Flow Rate In the default configuration that can be seen in figure 11 12 the user can enter a purging flow rate of interest After doing so the user can see how the designed system performs in the Layout panel In general for purge flow rates designers will be looking at the velocity in the GHX Circuits headering sections and run out pairs Purging Flow Rate gpm S Purging Target Velocity ft s 2 00 100 00 Fig 11 12 Pur
137. ately is used in the length calculations The input screen for the piping panel is shown in figure 5 6 Pipe Parameters The pipe characteristics are entered in the Pipe Parameters section They include the pipe resistance the inside and outside pipe diameter and the pipe and flow type As in the Borehole Design module GLD calculates the convective resistance using the Dittus Boelter correlation for turbulent flow in a circular tube Incropera and DeWitt 1990 The calculations use average values of the Reynolds number to represent the different types of flow with values of Re 1600 3150 and 10000 for laminar transition and turbulent respectively The calculations also use average viscosity values and the Prandtl number for water taken at a temperature of 70 F 118 CHAPTER 5 The Horizontal Design Module Horizontal Design Project HorizontalSample Results Fluid Soil Piping Configuration Extra kW Information Pipe Parameters Pipe Resistance 0456 h ft F Btu Pipe Size Lin 25mm Outer Diameter ee in Inner Diameter 10 in Pipe Type sti vj Flow Type Turbulent Check Pipe Tables Fig 5 6 Piping Panel Contents Using the standard expression for resistance of a hollow cylinder Incropera and DeWitt 1990 the program calculates an approximate value for the pipe resistance It assumes HDPE pipe with a conductivity of 0 225 Btu h ft F The pipe resistance varies with
138. attern borehole separation and external grid file data also are visible and adjustable in the expanded user interface as seen in figure 4 6 New for GLD Premier 2010 on the Pattern tab is a built in and updated g function generator GLD Premier 2010 generates a g function on demand for any possible vertical borefield design just one of many unique features that GLD provides to designers Vertical Grid Arrangement The standard Borehole Design module is configured to accept equally spaced borehole patterns based on an x y coordinate system For rectangular systems users can enter the pattern directly into the rows across and rows down boxes For non rectangular systems see external grid files below Separation between Vertical Bores This value is the center to center distance between adjacent bores For optimal use of space the current calculations allow only one spacing distance between vertical bores in either direction 77 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module sorehole Design P act F an Coe AS EMIL onu L EN e Results Fluid Soil U Tube Pattern Extra kw Information Vertical Grid Arrangement Borehole Number 100 Rows Across Rows Down Borehole Separation Use External File Filename No File Boreholes per Parallel Grcuit Bores Per Circuit i Tl JU 1 2 3 Borehole Length 0 ft Fig 4 5 Pattern Panel Contents Grid Layout Use External File Borehole Number 30 Rows Across
139. aving added components into the Layout Design Manager users can quickly move components or nested families of components via the standard drag and drop methodology For example the user can select the GHX Circuit in figure 11 50 and then drag it onto the second pipe pair so that it looks like figure 11 51 The user can then select the second pipe pair and in doing so select all of the child components which in this case consist of only the circuit and drag and drop the entire nested component family onto the first pipe pair The result can be seen in figure 11 52 266 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Layout Design and Optimization Calculate B El Pipe Pair 5 Pipe Pair U Circuit Fig 11 52 The New Nested Component Family System After Dragging and Dropping the Second Pipe Pair GHX Circuit Nested Component Family onto the First Pipe Pair The drag and drop process is very flexible and enables designers to quickly design and adjust systems Copying and Pasting Pipe Pairs and Circuits A user also has the option of copying and pasting individual components nested families of components or partial nested families of components For example In figure 11 53 the user can right click on the circuit and choose Copy Required Total Circuit Length ft 0 0 Total Circuit Number 0 Calculate gli a Peak Load z Pipe Pair 2000R 0 Alphabetic Categorized Pipe Pair 200 0ft 0 E
140. be created with a text editor and called FluidTable6 html The entire FluidTable6 html file would be as follows html lt head gt lt head gt lt body gt lt img SRC CaCl2Density jpg gt lt body gt lt html gt FluidTable6 html Remember the FluidTables html file would have to be edited to include the new link to the FluidTable6 html file similar to the example given in Editing Existing Files above If everything is done properly when Fluid Properties is selected from the Tables menu in the Design Studio Table 6 will appear as a link in the list of available tables By clicking on the link the CaCl2 density image CaCl2Density jpg will appear and can be used as a convenient internal reference 157 CHAPTER 8 Tables and Reference Files Taking Care with Updates Updated versions of GLD may have new reference files and new versions of FluidTables html SoilTables html or PipeTables html If this is the case then any custom changes to these files made by the user may be overwritten during a new installation Although the linked files will remain the user is advised to make backup files of all customized reference files before new GLD installations or updates Concluding Remarks The reference files in GLD are added entirely for the user s convenience Designers should find the customizable geothermal Design Studio an ideal and familiar environment in which they can conduct their work
141. becomes very clear in figure 11 41 where the flow branches from supply pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout Pipe AA and into Circuit 1 and supply pipe C of the GHX Header Section CC After looking at figure 11 42 one might ask if pipe pair BB and Circuit 3 are in parallel are siblings as well since they are vertically stacked The answer is no Remember that a parallel flow path is defined as one in which a flow path and component divides into two or more parallel flow paths and components Pipe pair BB and circuit 3 although vertically stacked do not branch out from the same predecessor component Therefore they cannot be siblings and cannot be in parallel Can you find the serial flow flows in figure 11 42 Remember serial flow paths are stacked with indentation and each parent can have only one child This means that supply pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA Circuit 1 supply pipe B of Pipe Pair BB Circuit 2 are in series since they are stacked with indentation and each component has only one child and one parent Can you describe the other major series flow path in figure 11 42 It is supply pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA supply pipe C of the GHX Header Section CC Circuit 3 supply pipe D of Pipe Pair DD Circuit 4 Hopefully by now you are feeling comfortable with the Layout Manager workspace and how it displays parallel and series flow for a variety of conditions We will
142. button 2 This automatically opens the file dialog box in the Loads Files folder and displays several subfolders from which files that can be imported When the user selects a valid import file the program automatically transfers the data into the current open zone of the Zone Manager Loads module Note that any previously existing loads will be overwritten At the same time the data is transferred into the Zone Manager Loads module an Import Loads window is opened showing the imported data in detail This window is shown in figure 3 17 and its corresponding loads entry is shown in figure 3 18 The Import Loads window in figure 3 17 displays the imported data the filename and the name of the program that generated the file Total loads and peak demand data are presented on separate screens for cooling and heating Use the buttons on the bottom of the window to toggle between the two On the right is the monthly partial load factor calculated by GLD The data can be modified directly in the Import Loads window or by hitting the Modify button the user can open the file in the Equivalent Hours Calculator where the data can be edited as well The user can transfer the modified data into the Zone Manager Loads module by pressing the Transfer button When both the Calculator and the Import Loads windows are open the program first will ask the user from which window the Calculator or the Import Loads window he or she wishes to
143. cale The GHX Module Supply Return Runout coming out of Manifold Pipe Section 1 could be twice as long or half as long for example as the GHX Module Supply Return Runout coming out of Manifold Pipe Section 2 Of course great variations in length could impact flow balancing However even physically imbalanced systems can be flow balanced using the automatic and manual controls in the CFD Module The Ultra Manifold Ultra Vault Builder The Ultra Manifold Ultra Vault Builder is a powerful tool for very large commercial systems that require nested tiers of Manifolds and or field Vaults The highest level Manifold or Vault is defined as an Ultra Manifold or Ultra Vault Coming into an Ultra Manifold or Ultra Vault from the child side are supply return runouts from two or more Manifolds or Vaults Coming out of the Ultra Manifold or Ultra Vault and heading in the parent direction are a supply return runout pair Systems of this size are quite rare but the CFD module is flexible enough to handle them The Ultra Manifold Ultra Vault Builder can be accessed from within the Layout Manager Workspace in the Layout Panel The user can right click the mouse while inside the Layout Manager Workspace to see the menu in figure 11 79 appear 288 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Layout Fluid Automation Circulation Pumps Layout Design and Optimization Calculate El H Peak Load Alphabetic Categorized Add New Pip
144. can specify a different location during the installation sequence Installation of Updated Versions or Re Installation GLD2010 will not overwrite a previous version of GLD on the user s computer If the user needs to uninstall and reinstall GLD1010 for any reason existing work files pumps and zone files will not be affected However the pumplist gld file will be overwritten and any customized data reference files need to be protected see below PREFACE Note The file Pumplist gld in the GLD pumps folder will be overwritten upon re installation If the user has added pumps other than those originally included with the program this file should be copied or moved to a backup directory prior to removal and re installation After re installation the Pumplist gld file can be returned to the GLD Pumps folder or the desired contents can be added to the contents of the new Pumplist gld file using a simple text editor like Notepad exe The format of the file is provided below Pumplist gld Pump List File Number of Manufacturers Integer First Manufacturer Name Text Street Address Text City State Zip Text Country Text Telephone Number Text Number of Different Series for this Manufacturer Integer Example 2 Series 1 Name Text Series 1 filename without hpd extension Text Date Entered Text Example 2001 10 05 Series 2 Name Text Series 2 filename without hpd extension Text Dat
145. cape Corporation GeoCube is a trademark of Precision Geothermal LLC Trane Trace is a trademark of the Trane Company The lt Virtual Environment gt is a trademark of IES Inc The Ground Loop Design Premier 2010 Edition User s Manual Originally printed in October 2010 Printed in USA Part No GGENG 1107 Visit our Web site at http www gaiageo com Software Versions Available Three versions of GLD are available The program always is available for download on the web at www gaiageo com rS 7 Features E Commercial Commercial Residential Premier Professional Ce e 9 9 msumsmm o 9 9 _ wasmumPestess nonni no nmn amonen Foyindreatand runcionengnes 9 _ Faesornote enemies 9 9 o Monty Energy Simson Eire 0 e760 nouri Eneray Simus Ere mensenwswwu 9 _ Fea Temperate sgn Moe _ on demand Function ccom e 9 wee e __ Arcem torem 9 _ Bewmawss 9 9 9 tonzontal renchorssinny e 9 9 eame warma f 9 9 x computonalFuid encre e Auesuni and optimize retos 9 oreerantneese eum moaeing _ _ Frings ona Fis Daubese e muse utara Mentosreens 9 __ ir Crecy cost France nate osu e 9 e memarconducnuty Anaya moure opwen Onion conuen anaiysis opone onset ornat Thema Resistance naf Opinar Onion
146. ce Water Design Project 1 Results Fluid Soil Piping Surface Water Extra kW Infarmation Undisturbed Ground Temperature Ground Temperature 62 1 F Ground Temperature Corrections at Given Depth Depth of Header in Soil 40 ft Soil Type Wet Regional Air Temperature Swing 22 0 F Winter Summer Coldest Warmest Day in Year 225 m 34 Corrected Temperature F 48 1 76 8 Check Soil Tables Fig 6 6 Soil Panel Contents 140 CHAPTER 6 The Surface Water Design Module Ground Temperature Corrections at Given Depth Depth of Header in Soil This is simply the average depth in the soil between the water s edge and the installation at which the primary header or branches will be buried Soil Type The soil type can have one of three values wet dry or average GLD uses this to assign an approximate diffusivity value to the soil used in the temperature model Regional Air Temperature Swing This is the temperature swing for the location of interest It is a measure of the average temperature variation of the region during the warmest and coolest months as compared to the yearly average temperature Regions with temperate climates have a lower temperature swing than regions that have large differences between summer and winter temperatures Coldest Warmest Day in Year These are the actual days of the year on a 365 day scale when the temperature is usually coldest or warmest For example if Febr
147. ch section can have multiple fittings in case a design requires a series of reducing fittings Also note that while the range of control can seem overwhelming it automatic mode most of these variables are selected automatically for the designer by the CFD algorithms In this version of the software note that the fittings are not automatically selected by the CFD algorithms Within the CFD Layout Manager Workspace a single supply return pipe pair appears in figure 11 27 Note that the workspace is on the left side of the screen and the right side contains a properties window The properties window can be expanded as necessary to view all of the characteristics for all five subcomponents of each GHX Circuit Note that the properties window also contains fluid dynamics results for each pipe pair These will be reviewed later 238 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module y B b Piping Module bakades Layout Fluid Automation Circulation Pumps Layout Design and Optimization Calculate El Peak Load eiu Alphabetic Categorized Fittings Return Fittings Supply Flow Rate General Pipe 1 Supply Pipe 2 Return Pressure Drop Reynold s Number Velocity Volume Fig 11 27 The basic pipe pair Direct return piping pairs consist in the CFD module are symbolized by the following image Reverse return pipe pairs are symbolized by the following image Differences in how the CFD module models direct and re
148. circuit separation ie the headering piping length between boreholes and the headering pipe type and size This can been seen in figure 11 7 Circuit Information Circuits Extra Circuit Separation ft 20 0 0 0 Header Pipe Size SDR11 2 in 50 mm X Fig 11 7 Details Information Panel Contents 212 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Supply Return Runout Information This section stores information regarding the Supply Return Runout pipe pair supply pipe and return pipe that links the GHX Header with a Manifold Vault etc One Way Length Here the user can enter the one way length from the Manifold Vault to the first GHX Circuit The return pipe will default to the same length These lengths can be modified later as necessary Pipe Size Here the user enters the Supply Return Runout pipe size Both the Supply and Return Runout will be the same size but they can be adjusted independently if necessary an explanation of how to do this comes later Manifold Details related to an individual Manifold can be seen in the Manifold tabbed panel in figure 11 8 Note that a Manifold also can be thought of as being a Vault 213 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Manifold and GHX Module Automation Presets GHX Module i Ultra Manifold Pipe Sizes Return Piping Style Return Type Direct Return Section Outlet Information Section Outlet Number 5
149. cs Module Layout Design and Optimization Calculate B E Manifold Supply Return Runout Eres Manifold Pipe Section 01 E S GHX Module Supply Return Runout i U Circuit 01 8C GHX Header Section 01 U Circuit 02 pa 3G GHX Header Section 02 U Circuit 03 E196 GHX Header Section 03 U Circuit 04 rues Manifold Pipe Section 02 I GHX Module Supply Return Runout i j U Circuit 01 GHX Header Section 01 U Circuit 02 E S GHX Header Section 02 U Circuit 03 Es 96 GHX Header Section 03 les U Circuit 04 B Manifold Pipe Section 03 Ei GHX Module Supply Return Runout s U Circuit 01 js 36 GHX Header Section 01 be U Circuit 02 ER 96 GHX Header Section 02 U Circuit 03 E 826 GHX Header Section 03 i U Circuit 04 B Manifold Pipe Section 04 Ei GHX Module Supply Return Runout 1 U Circuit 01 B 9 GHX Header Section 01 U Circuit 02 2S GHX Header Section 02 U Circuit 03 8S GHX Header Section 03 U Circuit 04 Fig 11 78 A Manifold with Four Outlets Hooked Up to Four GHX Modules 287 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Note that each of the four GHX Modules has four GHX Circuits with reverse return headering The small four GHX Circuit GHX Modules are for illustrative purposes Real world Manifold systems would likely have more than four GHX Circuits per GHX Module Remember that systems in the Layout Manager Workspace are not drawn to s
150. ct return GHX Header sections and pipe pairs are represented by this symbol fluid supply flow paths E ll fluid return flow paths Fig 11 31 Fluid Flow Paths of the Direct Return GHX Module The progressively lengthening flow paths can be seen via the dotted fluid supply and return flow paths The flow loop that reaches its end in Circuit 1 before working its 244 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module way back up to return pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout A is shorter than the full flow loop that ends in Circuit 2 before working its way back up through return pipe B of the GHX Header B before finally reaching the return pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout A In summary a simple way to remember how direct return systems model and visualize flow is as follows the GHX Circuit which looks like a u is like a U Turn that sends the fluid flow back up to the top Design for Purging When a direct return system is optimized for purging the GHX Header system is composed of a series of reducing header pipe pairs Reducing header pipe pairs maintain the flow velocity ft s necessary to purge air effectively In direct return systems GHX Header pipes reduce identically all the way down on both the supply and return side This can be seen in figure 11 32 which is a sample auto sized GHX Module with eight GHX circuits and reducing headers these figures are part of the CFD Module dis
151. ction BB In the CFD Layout Manager workspace serial flow paths or parent child relationships are stacked with indentation This can be seen in figure 11 40 where Circuit 2 is one level below the GHX Header Section B and indented What this means is that Circuit 2 is connected to GHX Header Section B in series As long as the designer recognizes that parallel flow involves three or more component elements and two or more flow directions and that series flow involves two component elements and one flow direction he or she is ready to proceed to the next section To solidify our understanding of how the Layout Manager Workspace diagrams direct return systems we will follow the fluid flow in figure 11 40 Because there are two GHX Circuits there are two major flow paths The flow path s are as follows note that supply flowpaths use this symbol and return flowpaths use this symbol 4 The first flow path 254 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module gt Fluid flows from supply pipe A of GHX Module Supply Return Runout into Circuit 1 lt Fluid flows from Circuit 1 into return pipe A of GHX Module Supply Return Runout The second flow path gt Fluid flows from supply pipe A of GHX Module Supply Return Runout into supply pipe B of GHX Header gt Fluid flows from supply pipe B of GHX Header into Circuit 2 lt Fluid flows from Circuit 2 into return pipe B of GHX Header lt Fluid flows from re
152. cuit 2 Circuit 3 Circuit 4 Fig 11 41 Basic Direct Return Loopfield Layout 2 Layout Design and Optimization Calculate B E GHX Module Supply Return Runout A A U Circuit 01 E Pipe Pair B B U Circuit 02 GHX Header Section C C Ej U Circuit 03 E Pipe Pair D D U Circuit 04 Fig 11 42 Basic Direct Return Loopfield Layout 2 in Layout Manager Workspace Note that although figure 11 41 looks somewhat complicated the layout consists of nothing more than a combination of the two components the Pipe Pair and the GHX Circuit In this example however the two components are hooked up in a different way two GHX Circuits in series Circuit 1 and Circuit 2 for example are connected to each other by supply pipe B of Pipe Pair BB The return pipe B of Pipe Pair BB brings the entire series of two parallel circuits back into return pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA 256 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Can you find the parallel flow paths in figure 11 42 Remember parallel flow paths are vertically stacked and have one parent and at least two children or at least two siblings looking at it from the child s perspective This means that Circuit 1 and the supply pipe C of GHX Header Section CC are parallel flow paths Circuit 1 and supply pipe C of GHX Header Section CC are siblings and share supply pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA as a parent This
153. d Automation Circulation Pumps Layout Design and Optimization Calculate El Peak Load TA Alphabetic Categorized Fittings Return Fittings Supply Flow Rate General Pipe 1 Supply Pipe 2 Return Pressure Drop Reynold s Number Velocity Volume E AAAA Fig 11 48 A New Pipe Pair Component Has Been Added The user can proceed to add another pipe pair by repeating the process The result will look like figure 11 49 Layout Design and Optimization Calculate E Pipe Pair a Pipe Pair Fig 11 49 Manually Adding a Second Pipe Pair 265 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Adding a New GHX Circuit Following the methods outlined for adding new pipe pairs the user can add a new GHX Circuit independent of other piping components as can be seen in figure 11 50 Layout Design and Optimization Calculate E Pipe Pair Pipe Pair U Circuit Fig 11 50 Manually Adding a GHX Circuit Conversely if a user wishes to add a new GHX Circuit as a child of another piping component he can do so by moving the mouse over the parent component of interest right clicking and then adding a new circuit The result of such of an effort can be seen in figure 11 51 Layout Design and Optimization Calculate B Pipe Pair Pipe Pair u EC Fig 11 51 Manually Adding a GHX Circuit As a Child to the Pipe Pair Dragging and Dropping Pipe Pairs and Circuits After h
154. d associated heat pumps over one or more design years Because of the vast amount of data required to run an hourly simulation such data must be imported via one of the following two mechanisms e Importation of a csv file e Importation a proprietary file type a IES lt VE gt APS file a Trane Trace geothermal template file etc Details about importing hourly loads files can be found below When an hourly data file is imported into the Average Block Loads module the Hourly Data checkbox will be checked as can be seen in figure 3 14 below indicating that the loads data in the Average Block Loads module is powered by an hourly data set Design Day Loads 7 0 Days Week Hourly Data Fig 3 14 Hourly Data Check Box Because the hourly data set is so extensive it is not possible to review the data set hour by hour from within GLD However it is possible to view the hourly data organized into a monthly data format by hitting the Monthly Loads button on the Average Block Loads module after importing the hourly data This can be seen in figure 3 15 Note that when viewing the hourly data in the Monthly Data framework the Update button is deactivated indicating that the hourly data can 54 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones not be modified from within the GLD framework If the designer wishes to modify the hourly loads data set the designer must do so from within his or her energy simulation program Average Block Loads e rm i
155. d directly with the various design modules available in the studio Therefore one type of loads and heat pump data can be used for all designs Heat Pump Module In GLD heat pump data can be entered into a separate module that keeps track of all of the pumps stored in the GLD s Heat Pump Database Families of heat pumps from various manufacturers can be added to the existing pump set maintained by the user In this way heat pump data obtained from any source easily can be included within the software to take advantage of the automatic equipment sizing features of GLD Recent data from popular heat pump manufacturers is included with GLD However any pump set can be added to the list The heat pump model only requires that certain data from heat pump specification sheets or from software provided by the manufacturer be entered into the Edit Add Heat Pumps module The model in GLD requires the input of a minimum of six data points for both heating and cooling modes These data points relate capacity and power to the inlet source temperature and are fit using a polynomial line to provide an accurate model for the equipment for any given design parameters By including additional data from different source flow rates and or different inlet load temperatures and flow rates higher levels of accuracy are possible New in GLD 2010 the heat pump module can store recommended and minimum flow rate and pressure drop information for each heat pump
156. d loads file cannot be found the user will be notified and the automatic file loading will not occur Saving Projects Projects may be saved at any time using Save or Save As from the Design Studio File menu or by clicking the save button on the toolbar When the user closes the program or module the program automatically asks the user if he or she would like to save the project file Typical Operation Although each user has his or her own style the typical operation of the Surface Water Design module would include the following steps 1 Enter Loads and select pump in either the Average Block Loads module or the Zone Manager module 2 Form a link between the loads module and the design module 3 Modify step by step the input parameters listed in each panel 4 Perform initial calculation 5 Modify various parameters and recalculate to determine the effects of the modifications 6 Establish an optimal system 7 Save and or print the project and associated zone file 132 CHAPTER 6 The Surface Water Design Module Before You Begin The theoretical model which is based on experimental data and non laminar flow requires a minimum system flow rate of 3 0 gpm ton in the pipes to achieve proper heat transfer Minimum flow rates through the circuit piping also are required to maintain the non laminar flow with different antifreeze solutions Thus there is a limit on the maximum recommended number of parallel circuits
157. d to meet the chosen design length With GLD users have the flexibility to choose the parameters that fit best in their designs Boilers In GLD boilers are similar to cooling towers except that they are added in order to reduce the overall heating load on the system In this case the user may actually reduce the peak and annual heating loads by the flat percentage defined by the slider value The required boiler capacity and the modified peak loads applied to the loop field are shown on the panel but no other inclusion electrical or fuel costs for the boiler are included in the calculation report The expected heat pump power is also reduced by the same percentage in order to estimate a real system 128 CHAPTER 5 The Horizontal Design Module Printing Reports Reports of the active project can be printed at any time from the Design Studio using the toolbar print button or from the File menu gt Print The information printed includes all of the input parameters from the design module along with the associated results The zone and loads information is not included with the report and must be printed separately from the Loads panel The filename of the zon file associated with the project report is also listed on the report Two different project reports are available concise and detailed The concise form includes all of the design parameters but omits some of the project information and comments The detailed version includes
158. data calculated see chapter 4 then the imported EER is the average EER over the system lifetime and not the peak conditions EER Generally using the monthly data provides for a higher EER and lower costs since average fluid temperatures tend to be less extreme than the fluid temperatures during peak load conditions Circulation Pump Input Power Pump Power and Motor Efficiency The circulation pump input power automatically is calculated from the pump power and motor efficiency These values can be imported from a heat exchanger design project or manually entered Additional Power The user can enter power for all other elements besides the heat pump units in the system that may require energy input Again these data can be imported from a heat exchanger project if the data are in the project or can be entered manually Geothermal Heating In this section the user can enter details about the geothermal heating system s Equivalent Full Load Hours The user can enter the equivalent full load hours here if the user has not imported the data automatically from a heat exchanger project design 180 CHAPTER 9 The Financial Module Peak Capacity The user can enter the peak capacity note that this is the peak load covered by the equipment and not the installed equipment capacity here if the user has not imported the data automatically from a heat exchanger project design Average Heat Pump Efficiency Here the user enter
159. der pipe buried in the soil and the header pipe submerged in the water If a primary header enters the water it is automatically assumed that the branches have no soil component Likewise if branches enter the soil it is assumed that the primary header has no water component 139 CHAPTER 6 The Surface Water Design Module Head Loss per 100 feet This is the head loss for the particular style of pipe These values are not entered automatically Instead they come from designer s charts A chart in English units is included with GLD in the Pipe Tables section As mentioned above the designer must be aware that this value changes with pipe size temperature and flow rate Soil The Soil panel is included only for the heat transfer calculations associated with the portion of the header pipe in the soil The model uses the undisturbed ground temperature of the soil as well as several other parameters associated with the installation location to determine the temperature at pipe depth on the coolest and warmest days of the year This temperature then is used to determine how much heat is transferred from the header pipe to the soil or vice versa Once the amount of heat transfer from or to the soil is known the circuit pipe length calculated from the surface water data can be modified to provide fluid with the desired inlet source temperature to the heat pumps The Soil panel input screen is shown in figure 6 6 E3 Surfa
160. determine the undisturbed ground temperature with maximum accuracy prior to conducting the TC test and then manually enter the undisturbed ground temperature in the Bore tabbed panel If the user does not enter the temperature manually the module will automatically estimate the undisturbed ground temperature from the first two minutes of temperature data in the imported csv file Data Quality The data quality section reports on whether or not certain aspects of the data meet user defined thresholds These analyses are useful for determining the overall reliability of the conductivity test data A green check indicates that the entire data set remains within the threshold range A red x indicates that at least one data point extends beyond the threshold range Details for each test are described below Power Standard Deviation The power standard deviation test checks the standard deviation of all points compared to the average value and sees if the deviation falls within the user defined acceptable range The default value is 1 5 196 CHAPTER 10 The Thermal Conductivity Module Power Variation The power variation test checks to see if any point goes over a predefined limit which is a percentage of the average value The default is 10 Temperature The temperature test checks to see if the temperature decreases from its maximum measured value to a point below a defined threshold for more than 1 of the entire range
161. does not contain a reference to the externally obtained data set it must be added manually The procedure for this is as follows 1 Place the hpd file into the GLD pumps folder 2 Adda New Series a If the series belongs to an existing manufacturer choose the appropriate manufacturer b If the series belongs to an unlisted manufacturer choose New Manufacturer from the list 3 Provide the Series Name and Manufacturer Name as required 4 Under Filename type the existing filename of the series to be added Note the existing filename is the hpd file the user just put into the pumps folder in step 1 above 5 Click Proceed GLD will open the heat pump file for editing and will include it in its Heat Pump Database Additionally if this is a new manufacturer any included manufacturer information will become visible for this pump set Since the Pumplist gld file has been modified it will register the new pumps for use in all modules opened afterwards 36 CHAPTER 2 Adding Editing Heat Pumps Other Resources For additional information and specific instructions on how to enter pump data step by step please visit the following website http www gaiageo com webresources htm 37 CHAPTER 2 Adding Editing Heat Pumps This Page Intentionally Left Blank 38 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones All of the calculations performed in GLD fundamentally are b
162. dow will open showing the imported data in detail This window is shown in figure 3 17 The imported monthly and hourly total and peak data also are automatically imported into the monthly loads input boxes as seen in figure 3 13 The Import Loads window displays the imported data the filename and the name of the program that generated the file Total loads and peak demand data are presented on separate screens for cooling and heating Use the buttons on the bottom of the window to toggle between the two On the right is the monthly partial load factor calculated by GLD The data can be modified directly in the Import Loads window or by hitting the Modify button the user can open the file in the Equivalent Hours Calculator where the data can be edited as well The user can transfer the modified data into the Average Block Loads module by pressing the Transfer button When both the Calculator and the Import Loads windows are open the program first will ask the user from which window the Calculator or the Import Loads window he or she wishes to transfer data The program then prompts the user to decide to which loads heating or cooling the data should be transferred 60 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones J Import Loads Import Data Filename Generated By Li January February March April May June July August September October November December Total Max Full Load Hours Since loads calculation progr
163. dule Supply Return Runout AA e Return Pipe of Circuit 2 Return pipe C of GHX Header Section CC Return pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA e Return Pipe of Circuit 3 Return pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA When looking at the details reverse return system are quite complicated Luckily does not need to remember much of this Indeed the intuitive systems employed by the CFD Module make it quite easy to build piping systems perform simulations and review results Now we will learn how to build piping systems in the Layout Manager Workspace Building Piping Systems In this section we will explore how to build a GHX Field using both manual and automatic tools and techniques A number of these tools and techniques can be utilized in both the manual and automatic design modes Rather than introduce the tools twice in both the manual methods subsection and the automatic methods subsection many are described only in the manual methods subsection Therefore designers that intend to use only the automatic methods still will benefit from reading the entire section Manual Methods The CFD module offers a range of techniques and tool for the designer who desires to build manually a piping system from the ground up These techniques and tools include how to 262 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Add a new pipe pair Add a new GHX Circuit Drag and drop pipe pairs and circuits C
164. e 2 00 ft s 2 00 ft s 11372 Fig 11 95 An Optimized and Auto Sized Reverse Return Headering System The designer can now return to the Fluid panel to view the required purging flow rate for this now auto optimized system The flow rate of 74 1 gpm can be seen in figure 11 96 below Fluid Information Peak Load Flow Rate gpm 30 0 Installed Capacity Flow Rate gpm 60 0 V Auto Adjust v Auto Size Minimum Maximum Purging Target Velocity ft s 2 0 5 0 Purging Flow Rate gpm 74 1 Fig 11 96 74 1 gpm Will Purge The Optimized System Adding Circulation Pumps The designer has the option of adding one or more circulation pumps into his or her piping system By adding circulation pumps the CFD module can not only keep track of them individually by can keep track of their cumulative pump power kW requirements This is useful because the circulation pumps for an optimized piping system should ideally consume no more than 10 of the total power consumed by the full system Remember that in GLD 2010 the piping system calculations do not include heat pump pressure drop 304 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module In this section we will explore how to add circulation pumps to a design in the Layout Manager Workspace Adding A Circulation Pump To add a circulation pump the designer should already have built and tested his or her piping system After the designer is satisfied with the system
165. e PipeTables html file one might add this new link with the name Table 4 New Pipe Table by typing the new link at the end of the PipeTables html file into a text editor as follows the added section is in bold type lt li gt lt a href PipeTable3 html gt Table 3 Required Flow Rates to Achieve 2ft s SDR 11 Pipe lt a gt lt li gt lt ul gt lt li gt lt a href PipeTable4 html gt Table 4 New Pipe Table lt a gt lt li gt lt ul gt lt body gt lt html gt PipeTables html edited version 156 CHAPTER 8 Tables and Reference Files Making a Table A new table can be made at any time by creating one as an HTML file The easiest way to do this is to use an HTML editor It is much more difficult to make a table using plain HTML in a text editor Although any name is valid for a table tables can be added to the appropriate group by just extending the naming sequence already being used For example the name PipeTable4 html could be used as the name for a new file Adding a Picture Graph or Figure If an image is stored as either jpg or gif it can be imported into an HTML page The HTML page can be linked directly to the GLD reference files As an example let s assume that an engineer scans an image of his favorite density vs percent solute graph for Calcium Chloride and saves it in the Help Files directory as a jpeg image called CaCl2Density jpg A very simple HTML file can
166. e as well see figure 1 2 above Results Fluid Soil U Tube Pattem Extra kW Information Fig 1 3 Borehole Design Panel List Using these seven panels Results Fluid Soil U Tube Pattern Extra kW and Information the user enters the project specific information After the user enters all parameters the software calculates results based on the input data Within this framework it is straightforward and easy to make changes and conduct new calculations The Borehole Design module allows for two types of design methodologies fixed temperature and fixed length designs Fixed temperature refers to the design process in which users specify target inlet 14 CHAPTER 1 GLD Overview temperatures designers set or fix the temperatures themselves and then have the program calculate results such as the required bore length the outlet temperatures and the coefficient of performance COP etc based on the input data With fixed length designs designers specify the required borefield length by inputting the number of boreholes in the design and then defining the borehole length fixing the total design length After entering these data as well as the other design parameters the software calculates results such as the inlet and outlet temperatures and the coefficient of performance COP etc based on the input data The fixed length feature is well suited for designing when land resources are limited when a desi
167. e pump type and the inlet load temperatures Figure 3 6 shows the pump selection section of the zone data window with sample data matched to the loads data of figure 3 4 Several buttons can be found in the pump selection section These include Auto Select Select Details and Clear A checkbox is also included to indicate when the pump is a custom pump or a pump not included in GLD s internal list of pumps 45 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones r Heat Pump Specifications at Design aue and Flow Rate Pump Name Custom Pump EVO48 48 meee al Cooling Heating Auto Select Capacity MBtu Hr 46 7 47 6 Power kW 374 EXE EER COP 12 5 45 Details Flow Rate gpm 11 5 95 Clear Partial Load Factor 0 98 0 80 Fig 3 6 Sample Pump Selection Section with Data Auto Select This option is by far the easiest method of matching a pump to the loads in a particular zone By clicking the Auto Select button GLD utilizes the information stored for the active pump series and determines which pump within the list is best suited to the zone in question If the listed pumps are too small for the zone loads the software increases the number of pumps of each size until an acceptable match is achieved The pump selection process uses information from the Zone Manager loads module This includes the chosen inlet source temperature the flow rate the heat pump series and the initial inlet load temperatures The flow
168. e Design Module CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module This chapter describes the features and operation of the Borehole Design module This module is used in the design of vertical borehole systems It is one of the four design modules included with GLD Overview A design is only as good as the quality of the data that goes into it This is certainly the case with the GLD Borehole Design module Although GLD utilizes the best theoretical models available today the most accurate results will naturally result from the most accurate input parameters Because the calculations conducted here involve the combination of a large number of input parameters care must be taken to assure that proper values are verified before use Assuming that reasonable values are provided to the software the software will provide reasonable results General Features To aid in the data entry process the Borehole Design module in GLD consists of a set of panels grouped by subject through which the designer can enter and edit the input variables efficiently For example parameters related to the soil are listed on the Soil panel while piping choices are listed on the U tube panel The idea is that everything related to a project is presented simultaneously and is 71 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module easily accessible at any time during the design process In the expanded user interface mode which can be expanded by double clicking on any of the tabs
169. e Entered Text Example 2001 10 06 Second Manufacturer Name Text Street Address Text Alternatively any pump files not included with the setup package may be added from within the program itself using the method described in Chapter 2 under Adding Pump Sets Obtained from External Sources The actual original heat pump data files hpd will not be deleted unless their names are identical to those being installed Thus all data can be recovered even if the previous version of the Pumplist gld file is overwritten However this will either involve editing the Pumplist gld file manually to include the customized data or identifying those files within the program itself In general if there are only a few pump sets to add working within the program may be best If there are many cutting PREFACE and pasting from the old file using a text editor may prove to be more efficient Remember to modify the number of manufacturers if necessary If the user has created customized heat pump sets it may be wise to make a backup of all data files prior to removal and re installation Additionally customized data reference files should be backed up before any user modified GLD menu HTML documents are replaced The linked HTML documents themselves will not be overwritten Program Licensing This section describes the USB dongle and license transfer options available in GLD Premier 2010 Edition Software License Dongle Your
170. e Pair Add Reverse Return Pipe Pair Add New Circuit Add New Ultra Manifold Add New Manifold Add New GHX Module Pipe and Fitting Manager Copy Selection Paste Selection Delete Fig 11 79 Accessing the Ultra Manifold Vault Builder After the user selects New Ultra Manifold the Ultra Manifold Ultra Vault Builder will open as can be seen in figure 11 80 289 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module GHXModule and Manifold Builc Group Name itra Manifold 010 Return Type DirectRetun v Section Outlet Number 5 Extra Section Outlet Separation ft 6 0 0 0 Section Outlet Pipe Size SDR11 3 in 80 mm Supply Return Runout Information Extra One Way Length ft 200 0 0 0 Pipe Size SDR11 4 in 100 mm OK Cancel Fig 11 80 The Ultra Manifold Vault Builder Readers are referred to the Manifold Vault Builder section above for a description since the Ultra Manifold Builder and the Manifold Builder are nearly identical Using the techniques and tools described in both the Automatic and Manual Techniques sections users can design and build a near infinite range of geothermal GHX loopfields After the design is complete the user can see how it performs Calculations and performance will be addressed later in this chapter Calculating and Reviewing Results In this section we will explore how to calculate and review results Calculating Results After a us
171. e always will be reported as N A This is because the updated theory in GLD Premier 2010 used for these calculations is not directly amenable to such soil temperature calculations Designers that need to estimate the soil temperature change can do so using the Design Day calculation described above 105 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module T Borehole Design Project 1 Results Fluid Soil U Tube Pattern Extra kw Information Calculate Hourly v COOLING HEATING Total Length ft 15180 0 15180 0 Borehole Number 60 60 Borehole Length ft 253 0 253 0 sround Temperature Change F N A N A Peak Unit Inlet F 78 1 40 5 Peak Unit Outlet F 86 7 34 9 Total Unit Capacity kBtu Hr 755 9 810 7 Peak Load kBtu Hr 755 9 810 7 Peak Demand kW 44 3 57 5 Seasonal Heat Pump EER COP 18 5 4 0 Heat Pump EER COP 17 0 4 1 Avg Annual Power kWh 2 59E 4 2 69E 4 System Flow Rate gpm 189 0 202 7 r Optional Cooling Tower Boiler Condenser Capacity kBtu hr 0 0 EX Cooling Tower Flow Rate gpm 0 0 i Cooling Range F 8 7 Boiler Annual Operating Hours hr yr 0 p 0 96 Boiler Capacity kBtu hr 0 0 Cooling Tower Load Balance ao Fig 4 26 Results Panel Contents Fixed Length Hourly Data Results Lengths Temperatures i COOLING HEATING COOLING Total Length ft 15180 0 15180 0 Peak Unit Inlet F 78 1 Borehole Length ft 253 0 253 0 Peak Unit Outlet F 86 7
172. e calculation interval to 12 to 34 hours recalculate the line and then compare the raw data with the new line If the newly calculated line better matches the raw data then the user might reasonably use the calculated conductivity value for the 12 to 34 hour time interval rather than for the 12 to 40 hour time interval Hourly Data T L o k 5 t k S a s Ee Time Hours Fig 10 8 Raw Test Data Temp vs LN Time 198 CHAPTER 10 The Thermal Conductivity Module Hourly Data T ms o B k o 2 5 LE 10 Time Hours Fig 10 9 Raw and Modeled Data Temp vs LN Time Printing Reports The Thermal Conductivity report can be printed at any time using the toolbar print button in the conductivity module More information on reports can be found in Chapter 7 199 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module This chapter describes how to use the new Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD module a module that answers the sometimes difficult question How should I set up my geothermal piping systems so that they maximize performance minimize operational costs and are easily purged of air after installation and before start up yer Overview Piping optimization is an essential and oftentimes overlooked component in competent geothermal loop design When designed correctly a piping system will be easy to purge and pr
173. e files already provided with GLD Custom Logos New in GLD Premier 2010 is the Settings dropdown menu From this menu users can enter general company and contact information that is repopulated in the various Information tabbed panels throughout the program In addition users have the option of loading in their own logo for inclusion in many of the reports that GLD produces These custom logos enhance the professional image a designer presents to clients These logos should be in bitmap format and have the following dimensions 101 x 33 Users that wish to take advantage of this feature must put a copy of the appropriately sized logo in the Gaia Geothermal GLD2010 Logos folder CHAPTER 1 GLD Overview Metric English Units One of the intrinsic features in GLD is the English metric unit conversion capability The English metric option can be used not only to compare values but it also can be used to quickly make use of specific equipment or loads data supplied in only one format Because the reports and data reference files automatically recognize the selected units users can obtain different reports and data lists depending on the state of the Design Studio Presentation and comparison of project information between different engineers and designers is now a straightforward process Internationalization Because GLD is multi language capable users easily can communicate accurate results and design parameters across borders even wh
174. e name in the zone list changes the working zone 40 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones Using the list the designer can bring up and modify any particular zone by clicking on its name An essentially equivalent but more compact summary of the input data can be obtained in the Summary View obtained by clicking on the Summary View toggle button Different representations of zone data can also be printed as reports Managing Zones in the Loads Tabbed Panel The buttons along the top of the Zone Manager are used to work with the zones A closer view is shown in figure 3 2 2 oma 2 se Fig 3 2 Zone Manager Control Buttons The five buttons on the left side are zone editing controls and they include New Copy Remove Renumber and Clear A Summary view of all the zones can be obtained by hitting the sixth or Summary View toggle button The next three buttons are the Open and Save buttons for opening and saving the zone files and the Print button for printing various zone reports The next button is the Import Loads button a description of which can be found towards the end of this chapter under Importing Loads Data from External Programs The final two buttons on the far right are for pump selection across the entire set of zones and include Auto Select All and Update Reselect which are discussed in more detail below L New and L Copy A new zone may be created at any time from the Loads panel by clicking the New button Ident
175. e of the limited model employed the pitch must be between 10 and 56 inches and the diameter must be 36 inches See figure 5 4 Vertical Slinky In this arrangement the slinky is placed vertically within a trench and is resting at the bottom The trench may be as narrow as the pipe and soil allow Horizontal Slinky In this arrangement the slinky is placed horizontally at the bottom of the trench The minimum trench width depends on the slinky diameter Modeling time Period In GLD ten years is used as a standard length of time for ground temperature stabilization although longer or shorter time periods may be entered if desired In the case of horizontal systems a single year or less is often chosen since the interaction with the atmosphere or sunlight generally reduces the long term buildup or reduction of soil temperatures Long term thermal effects are more commonly associated with vertical bores The modeling time prediction time period can also be viewed and modified in the expanded interface as seen in figure 5 5 117 CHAPTER 5 The Horizontal Design Module Calculations Calculate Prediction Time 10 0 years Fig 5 5 Prediction Time Controls in Expanded User Interface Piping The Piping panel contains all the information related to the particular pipe chosen for the buried heat exchanger The program uses information about the pipe size and flow type to determine the associated pipe resistance which ultim
176. e return system is optimized for purging the GHX Header system is composed of a series reducing header pipe pairs Reducing header pipe pairs maintain the flow velocity ft s necessary to purge air effectively Reverse return systems are very different from direct return systems when it comes to the design of the GHX Header reductions GHX Header pipes reduce all the way down on the supply following a calculated optimal pipe reduction profile However on the return side the pipe reduction is reversed Indeed on the reverse side pipe diameters increase in size as the return pipes of the GHX Header get closer and closer to the return pipe of the Supply Return Runout This can be seen via an example in figure 11 37 which is a sample auto sized reverse return GHX Module with eight GHX circuits and reducing headers this figures are part of the CFD Module display controls and are explained in great detail later in this chapter For now they are included for illustrative purposes Notice how the pipe sizes reduce down from 2 all the way to 3 4 on the pipe 1 supply side of the GHX Header system On the pipe 2 return side of the system the pipe sizes expand in 250 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module diameter as they get closer and closer to the return pipe of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout In this example the supply pipe 1 and return pipe 2 sides of the GHX Header system are palindromes Optimized reverse return sys
177. e siblings As such the flow into the siblings from the parent is in parallel just like it is in direct return systems However between these two siblings there is another flow path This is one in which the return pipe of Circuit 1 flows into the return pipe of Pipe Pair B In other words even though Circuit 1 and Pipe Pair B are siblings there is a series flow from one sibling to another With reverse return systems sibling relationships are hybrids they have both parallel and serial flow characteristics This relationship is called the series sibling relationship If you will recall within the Layout Manager Workspace siblings are vertically stacked In direct return systems vertically stacked siblings are always in parallel flow In reverse return systems however vertically stacked siblings are in both parallel and series flow This series flow aspect in the series sibling relationship is responsible for the other relationship that is unique in reverse return systems the reverse child parent relationship Reverse Child Parent Relationships In reverse return systems fluid flows from the return pipe of one GHX Header pair to the return pipe of another GHX Header pair This is identical in the direct return systems except that in reverse return systems visually the return flow path is heading down rather than up In the direct return systems the return flow path is heading up As a result components in reverse return system
178. e theoretical and experimental basis for the program s calculations General Program Features GLD Premier 2010 Edition is a Geothermal Design Studio that provides the user with a freedom that single purpose software cannot offer The program is modular and permits flexibility in the designing process and customization based on designer preferences Additionally it has an English metric unit conversion option providing applicability to the widest range of equipment and customers Because the software is available in different languages it is truly international in its ability to traverse national borders as well as language and cultural barriers New in Premier 2010 Edition GLD Premier 2010 Edition adds a range of features to the program including e The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD module This new module enables designers to easily model analyze and optimize the piping systems that comprise the foundation of ground heat exchanger systems Piping systems consist of a wide possible range of connected components CHAPTER 1 GLD Overview including Manifolds Vaults Supply and Return Runouts Supply and Return Headers single and double u bends the fittings that connect the systems together and circulation pumps Utilizing a new patent pending visual interface for viewing and creating a design via a drag and drop methodology the CFD module can automatically design optimal flow balanced direct and reverse return systems wh
179. each month of the year The full load hours calculation procedure is straightforward Simply sum the monthly total loads for all of the months Kbtu or kWh and divide by the peak demand KBtu hr or kW The resulting number the annual equivalent full load hours then has the units of hours To put it another way think of the annual equivalent full load hours as the total number of hours the system would be running in a year if it ran at full capacity the whole time To help with this calculation the program offers the Equivalent Hours Calculator as one of the standard tools included in the Geothermal Design Studio If the designer knows the monthly total loads and peak demand he or she can simply input them into the boxes provided in the calculator Pressing Calculate then determines the hours according to the summation and division described above When the user presses the Transfer button in any loads module when the calculator is showing the values will be transferred directly into the loads module as previously described 69 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones Surface Water Design Loads The Surface Water Design Module does not require the loads input detail of the other design modules Since there is no long term build up of heat in the water the only values that are actually required are the peak demand of the installation All other values may be set to zero or included simply for reference 70 CHAPTER 4 The Borehol
180. ean that no cooling tower is employed In a typical design it is difficult to predict exactly how much load balance or what size of cooling tower is necessary to match the cooling and heating lengths However using the Load Balance slider control the designer can optimize the system to the lengths desired by directly controlling the amount of cooling load to be handled by the cooling tower In the case where the designer desires the shortest length possible the design requires a perfect balance of the heating and cooling loads to the ground The length from this perfect balance would be the minimum length required to adequately cover the heating load requirement To accomplish this the Load Balance slider needs to be adjusted to the percentage value where the calculated cooling and heating bore lengths are approximately equivalent Note As expected the Long Term Ground Temperature Change for both heating and cooling should be identical in a perfectly balanced system In other cases the designer just may seek a reduction in the total required system length rather than a perfect balance Using the slider control the designer can select the desired length and then note the required cooling tower condenser capacity as calculated by the program As the designer adds cooling tower capacity to a design the peak load of the geothermal system will decrease such that the total capacity of the geothermal system and the hybrid system equals the
181. ecessary or is well matched to a zone will be more efficient than a larger unit that may cycle more often Inputs for GLD s Zone Manager Loads module include peak load information for each of the zones in an installation at different periods during the day These loads data can be matched automatically to heat pumps stored within GLD s Heat Pump Database Therefore ideal and rapid sizing is possible As with the Average Block Loads module the annual running time also may be included for a buried heat exchanger This loading information can be simple or complex depending on the level of detail the designer desires To facilitate this model the zones can be viewed either independently or together on the summary panel Average Block Loads Module For quick estimates and general calculations there is no need to do a full zone analysis for a project In these cases designers can quickly enter data and consider approximate designs using the Average Block Loads module The average block model takes peak data from up to four time periods during the peak day and then uses a generalized form of the automatic pump selection sequence to match a particular type of pump to an entire installation For buried heat exchangers the model also uses weekly and annual operational time as parameters The hours can be computed from monthly loads data using the Equivalent Hours Calculator Chapter 3 12 CHAPTER 1 GLD Overview In GLD Premier 2010 us
182. ecific heat and density for the target solution Note Since solution properties vary considerably and non linearly with type and percentage of additive GLD does not include detailed automatic antifreeze information for all conditions Generalized tables of data may be found in the Fluid Properties tables It is recommended that the designer manually enter the desired values in the input text boxes Results All results for both the heating and the cooling calculations can be viewed at any time on the Results panel After all data has been entered or any changes have been made the user can calculate interim or final results using the Calculate button The Calculate button is also available in the expanded user interface as see in figure 5 5 A sample screen for the Results panel can be seen in figure 5 11 Results are also displayed in the expanded user interface as see in Figure 5 12 124 CHAPTER 5 The Horizontal Design Module Y Borehole Design Project HorizontalSample 1 Results id Soi Piping Configuration Extra kw Information Calculate COOLING HEATING Total Trench Length ft 4145 9 8177 4 Trench Number 20 20 Single Trench Length ft 207 3 408 9 Total Pipe Length fb 12437 6 24532 1 Single Trench Pipe Length ft 621 9 1226 6 Unit Inlet F 85 0 50 0 Unit Outlet F 95 2 44 0 Total Unit Capacity kBtu Hr 469 6 464 7 Peak Load kBtu Hr 342 0 243 0 Peak Demand kw 27 4 18 2 Hea
183. ed to a single conductivity analysis is presented simultaneously and is easily accessible at any time The tabbed panels can be seen in figure 10 1 below In GLD Premier 2010 graphs appear in a separate and flexible module when data are imported into the Thermal Conductivity module Results Bore Flow Diffusivity Information Fig 10 1 Thermal Conductivity Panel List The Thermal Conductivity module includes several additional features Diffusivity estimator based on user defined soil conditions Borehole Thermal Resistance BTR calculated results Flow rate test based on calibrated unit data and or flow sensors Metric and English unit conversions Adjustable calculation intervals for conductivity analysis A range of color graphs in a stand alone module Graph overlays for calculation interval optimization Automatic data quality analysis error checks 188 CHAPTER 10 The Thermal Conductivity Module e Printed report of all input and calculated data e A Calculate button used to refresh the calculations Theoretical Basis The Thermal Conductivity module uses the line source theory the most commonly used theory for the evaluation of conductivity test data This analysis methodology requires a constant rate of heat injection a stable power supply and a thermal conductivity unit that is well insulated from the ambient air temperature Opening Projects There are two ways to open Thermal Conductivity projects One is by
184. ede ER OI Seen 165 Average Building Costs eere 166 Equipment Related Costs esee 167 Utility COStS i esie ce Rep S ree oe por A e pER Ses ee ESS 171 Rates for Common Fuels esessee 171 Annual Inflation Rates cece cece cence cence m emen 172 Conventional i deen gastos es eae ete Re wee PEE ee teu pls Cea Mee e top Lege 172 Alternate Systems cio eee oe ns et ptite te ote ee P ve ege vedere 173 System Details actos iet oe Sete ERR te per theo eee Peg deste 174 Cooling 22 te eec etes Qoae tud eee e ue eo de P MORS 174 Heating cesepesee soos Patto eros vac there tige me a ote Dd aul 175 vi CONTENTS Geotherm li a ohh ues eee ERE E Ede vem EN Ere RUE inay 176 Power Summary Panel cssssseeeee tena Rara aT 177 The Modeling Time Period eese 178 Project Power Summary cece cece e eee e cence I 178 Geothermal System Details c esses 178 Primary Geothermal Tab eee 179 Cooling ciet deste ss esd dad elevate EiS 179 Heating ico eret Re iid 180 Installation Area esee 181 Hybrid Component Tab esese 182 Cooling iae SE EXTA ee E 182 Heating oed io te ec died 183 AIR IDP bade 184 Annual COSts pe LE 185 NPN Lifetime Costs ene er sae IRE ety 185 Printing Reports eot e a ehe ee EXER quer e ESTEE R 186 References cop ce Sask ee m noel ee esa cube ee tets Po
185. eft as zeroes and the program will ignore them leaving the flow factor as 1 0 Load Side Corrections Corrections resulting from variations in inlet temperatures and flow rates on the load side can be entered in the Load Temperatures and Load Flows tabbed panels of the Pump Edit pane If these corrections are not added the factors remain at 1 0 and input variations in load temperature or flow rate will have no effect on calculated capacities and or input power Time permitting however it is best to include as much information as possible from what the manufacturer provides Load Temperatures Panel The Loads Temperatures panel is where corrections for variations in the load inlet temperature are input Both the cooling and heating information taken at the average or standard source temperature and flow rate and the average load flow rate are entered on the same panel an example of which is shown in figure 2 9 The factors shown in figure 2 5 were calculated from a manufacturer s list of capacities provided for the different temperatures using the capacity at the selected temperature as the numerator and the capacity at 67 F for cooling 70 F for heating as the denominator The 67 F 70 F capacity values were those used for the inlet source data on the Cooling and Heating tabbed panels described previously Occasionally manufacturers will provide capacity values at the standard temperature with a table of correction factors tha
186. elected in the Pipe Sizes tabbed panel in figure 11 10 217 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Manifold and GHX Module Automation Presets GHX Module Manifold Ultra Manifold i j List of Available Pipe Sizes 3 8 4 1 2 5 8 3 4 3 1 1 4 11z za 2 1 2 3 1 2 6 gU 8 ISI IST IS S ST IST S ST IST ST S Fig 11 10 Pipe Sizes Selection Panel List of Available Pipe Sizes This section contains a list of available pipe sizes in the CFD module If there are certain pipe sizes a designer does not wish to use in a design he or she can deselect them The optimization algorithms in the CFD module will only use the selected pipe sizes for designing systems By selecting pipe sizes of interest and deselecting for example pipe sizes that are unavailable in a particular designer s region or market the designer helps ensures that the system designed by the CFD module actually can be built by a construction team using readily available pipes Fluid All parameters relating to fluid flow rates and fluid properties are listed in the Fluid panel as shown in figure 11 11 In addition this panel contains top level controls for some of the auto design features associated with optimizing systems for appropriate purging fluid velocities 218 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module b Piping Module Layout Fluid Automation Circulation Pumps Fluid Informat
187. ement that requires even more stringent CO emissions regimes Additionally local regional and national level emissions control regimes are becoming more common For these reasons the finance module enables designers to determine the C02 emissions reductions associated with a geothermal system compared to a more traditional HVAC solution The C0 emissions rate is the carbon intensity per kWh of electricity generated This rate is based on the fuel mix coal hydro nuclear etc used to generate the electricity that will power the electrical geothermal 165 CHAPTER 9 The Financial Module HVAC systems This intensity data can be found fairly easily on state provincial national and NGO environmental protection websites As the emissions rate can vary greatly it is recommended that the designer spend a few minutes finding the appropriate rate for the project s region In the USA the national average is 1 34 lbs of per kWh Detailed information on each state or province can be found on the following websites http www eia doe gov oiat 1605 ee factors html USA http www ec gc ca pdb ghg inventory_report 2005_report a9_eng cfm CANADA The finance module enables designers to specify other energy sources besides electricity Options include fuel oil 2 natural gas propane LPG coal weighted average of anthracite bituminous and semibituminous wood and biomass Because the C0 emissions from these fuel types tend n
188. en a link will be established with that module If more than one type of loads module is open GLD will query the user for his or her linking preference Alternative systems for linking exist but they are more indirect For example if only one unlinked design module is present a link may be established from any open loads module since GLD automatically recognizes the user s intention If more than one unlinked design module exists however pressing the link button from an active loads module will have no effect The link status lights in the corners of the modules indicate when a link has been formed Colors indicate the type of link Link status lights are described in more detail below 85 Unlinking To break a link between modules simply activate click on the design module to be disconnected and click the Unlink button on the toolbar Equivalently the user can choose Unlink from the GLD Loads menu The link will be broken and all related loads information for the design module will be cleared However the information still exists in the loads module and can be recovered by linking again if necessary If only one design module is linked to a particular loads module unlinking from the loads module is also possible If more than one linked design window is open however clicking the unlink button from a loads module will have no effect since GLD cannot determine which project should be disconnected 58 CHAPTER
189. en the designers are not proficient in the technical language of their foreign counterparts Currently Bulgarian Chinese Czech French German Greek Italian Japanese Korean Lithuanian Romanian Russian and Spanish versions are available Figure 1 1 is a screenshot from the Korean version metric Saas fa B Pa gi amp a g BoreholeS ample zon rag 3 Sole 2 A pel 3 rar SAZ Stor 8I RAZ Sor SSM RAZ SA gas few 50 8Al 12Al 135 aa BEBE Apex 204 84 0 0 eBTIM SGH 8X 259 SERA T FENZ REF L min Se Sota Sek 11 4 L mny3skw le SE HD 29 4 Figure 1 1 Korean Version of GLD Heat Pump and Zone Loads Modules Introduction 10 CHAPTER 1 GLD Overview The underlying framework of GLD is based on three modules that permit flexibility in the addition and modification of components related to geothermal designs The first is the heat pump module which takes a representative amount of data from the heat pump specifications and then uses it for the automatic pump selection features The second and third are the average block and zone loads modules which provide organized methods for entering the heat gains or losses for an installation Because the heat pump and loads modules are closely related users can match heat pumps to the loads automatically or manually An advantage of this design is that the heat pump selection and the loads modules can be connecte
190. ences Bandos Tatyana et al 2009 Finite Line Source Model for Borehole Heat Exchangers Effect of Vertical Temperature Variations Geothermics 38 263 270 Carslaw H S and Jaeger J C Conduction of Heat in Solids Oxford Claremore Press 1947 23 CHAPTER 1 GLD Overview Eskilson P Thermal Analysis of Heat Extraction Boreholes Doctoral Thesis University of Lund Department of Mathematical Physics Lund Sweden 1987 Hughes P J and Shonder J A The Evaluation of a 4000 Home Geothermal Heat Pump Retrofit at Fort Polk Louisiana Final Report Oak Ridge National Laboratory TN ORNL CON 460 1998 Ingersoll L R and Plass H J Theory of the ground pipe heat source for the heat pump Heating Piping and Air Conditioning 20 7 July 1948 Ingersoll L R Zobel O J and Ingersoll A C Heat conduction with engineering geological and other applications New York McGraw Hill 1954 Jones F R Closed Loop Geothermal Systems Slinky Installation Guide Rural Electric Research National Rural Electric Cooperative Association Oklahoma State University International Ground Source Heat Pump Association and Electric Power Research Institute 1995 Kavanaugh S P and J D Deerman Simulation of vertical U tube ground coupled heat pump system ASHRAE Transactions Volume 97 pages 287 295 199 Kavanaugh S P and Rafferty K Ground Source Heat Pumps Design of Geothermal Systems for Commercial and Institut
191. ended because of increased running and maintenance costs the user may elect to add a cooling tower to a cooling dominated geothermal system to reduce the total boring lengths and therefore the total initial installation costs To facilitate this design choice GLD offers the cooling tower or hybrid option In any case where the calculated boring lengths for cooling are longer than those for heating the difference in the lengths can be eliminated through the use of a cooling tower tied in parallel to the geothermal ground loop This requires that either the cooling tower capacity is chosen such that both the peak load and the annual load to the ground are balanced or if a full balance is unnecessary a capacity is chosen that allows for downsizing the loop to an acceptable length To aid in the sizing process a Load Balance control is provided in the Optional Cooling Tower section of the Calculate panel Although clicking the slider control can initiate a valid calculation or recalculation the slider control generally is employed after initial calculations have been conducted The Load Balance is a slider based control that represents a 96 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module percentage of the total cooling load both instantaneous peak and annual For example a 100 Load Balance would be equivalent to saying that the entire cooling load of the system would be handled by the cooling tower Conversely a 096 Load Balance would m
192. ensive Thermal Conductivity analysis module 187 E CHAPTER 10 The Thermal Conductivity Module The Ground Loop Design Thermal Conductivity module allows designers to import conductivity test data in CSV format collected by a thermal conductivity test unit data logger Users can then quickly input the borehole depth and calculation interval hours 12 to 40 for example and then calculate the thermal conductivity and estimated diffusivity The module includes a suite of automated data analysis tools that assess the raw conductivity data quality The module also enables designers to optimize the modeling period via an auto graphing overlay function A professional report output is included as well With the Thermal Conductivity module conductivity analysis is accurate easy and nearly instantaneous The Thermal Conductivity module in GLD Premier 2010 now provides Borehole Thermal Resistance BTR results from in situ test data and offers an enhanced graph visualization module that accelerates the data analysis process General Features To aid in the analysis process the Thermal Conductivity module in Ground Loop Design consists of a set of panels grouped by subject through which the designer can enter and edit the input variables efficiently For example parameters related to the diffusivity estimation are listed on the Diffusivity panel while bore specific information can be viewed on the Bore panel The idea is that everything relat
193. ent into the finance module Hybrid Unit Efficiency This value is not applicable to the cooling tower selection and is grayed out Additional Power Here the user enters extra power requirements for the system such as fans circulation pumps etc Installation Area In this section the user enters the floor space square footage required by the selected cooling equipment For example if a cooling tower requires 182 CHAPTER 9 The Financial Module 400 ft of rooftop space the user can enter 400 ft here Of course if the rooftop space has no commercial value per se it would be reasonable to decrease the input square footage value Water Usage Rate The user can enter the water usage rate for the cooling tower here 0 3 gpm ton is a reasonable starting point for many systems Heating In this section the user can enter details about the hybrid component of the geothermal heating system s Equivalent Full Load Hours The user can enter the equivalent full load hours here if the user has not imported the data automatically from a heat exchanger project design Note that by default the equivalent full load hours value in the hybrid panel matches the full load hours in the geothermal panel If the user changes the value in the geothermal tabbed panel the value in the hybrid component panel changes as well The user does have the option though of changing this value in the hybrid tab so that it does not match the value
194. er has built a piping system manually automatically a combination of both the designer can hit the Calculate button Figure 11 81 is an 8 GHX Circuit reverse return GHX Module that will be used as an example for understanding results 290 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Layout Design and Optimization Calculate B i24 GHX Module Supply Return Runout ow U Circuit 01 GHX Header Section 01 i U Circuit 02 GHX Header Section 02 U Circuit 03 Ej GHX Header Section 03 U Circuit 04 E S GHX Header Section 04 coe U Circuit 05 E S GHX Header Section 05 U Circuit 06 FE GHX Header Section 06 1 U Circuit 07 5 98 GHX Header Section 07 U Circuit 08 Fig 11 81 A Sample Eight GHX Circuit Reverse Return GHX Module Example for Understanding Calculated Results Reviewing Results Reviewing the initial results of a design is an enjoyable step in the piping design process First the user has to choose which results he or she wishes to see There are three general types of results e Peak Load Flow Rate Results e Installed Equipment Capacity Flow Rate Results e Purge Flow Rate Results The user can switch between the three types of results by selecting from among them with the dropdown menu as can be seen below Peak Load Equipment Purge Note that all three results types are calculated when the user hits the Calculate button 291 CHAPTER 11 The Computational F
195. erature and power vs temperature curves are fit to a polynomial equation to model these variations The resulting calculated coefficients are then used to generate capacity or power values for any given source inlet temperature The basic polynomial equation used for fitting has the form 2 y at bx cx where a b and c are the three coefficients calculated from the fitting routine For the capacity case y represents the capacity and x is the desired temperature For the power input determination y is the power and x again is the temperature Be aware that these coefficients do change for metric and English units 26 CHAPTER 2 Adding Editing Heat Pumps The software stores coefficients for each pump and then uses the coefficients with the source inlet temperatures chosen by the designer to determine the unit capacity and power Flow Rate To model the effect of the source flow rate on the calculated capacity and power data from a second flow rate are used Generally speaking with different flow rates the shape of the capacity and power curves does not change significantly but is shifted up or down by a constant factor This factor is determined for each of the three temperature data points and averaged over those input to obtain the linear flow factor which is shown on the input screen Once the flow factor is determined the linear capacity or power change per flow unit may be calculated The program
196. ers have the option of calculating month by month inlet temperatures and or 8750 hourly inlet temperatures in the borehole design module Performing these calculations requires detailed monthly and or hourly loads data and therefore the average block module in the GLD Premier 2010 Edition now accepts the input of monthly total and peak loads for both heating and cooling as well as hourly peak loads for both heating and cooling Note that while a user can design a system without these detailed hourly and monthly loads data he or she cannot perform detailed simulations without the data Loads modules are covered in detail in Chapter 3 Design Modules The GLD Geothermal Design Studio consists of the following three heat exchanger design modules The Borehole Design Module In fixed temperature mode this module models the lengths of bore required for a vertical borehole exchanger system In fixed length mode it models the inlet temperatures for a user defined borehole field length Additionally the borehole design module can model and graph the monthly and hourly inlet temperatures for the design if monthly hourly loads data have been input into the Average Block loads module The Horizontal Design Module This module determines the length of piping required for a horizontal trench bore slinky exchanger system The Surface Water Design Module This module determines the length of piping required when a closed loop of pipe inserted i
197. erse return systems in the CFD Module have some special features and requirements which are described below 259 A CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Reverse return systems must include at least two reverse return pipe pairs and three GHX Circuit in one nested family of components and can handle only one circuit per reverse return pipe pair level the system is currently not enabled to handle parallel double or triple circuits in parallel in the reverse return configuration Reverse return GHX Module systems do not follow the standard layout formalism that was presented for direct return systems Recall that with direct return systems when the GHX Circuit returns to its piping GHX Header section it returns to its parent piping GHX Header section that is one level above it and left justified This can be seen clearly in figure 11 31 Although the reverse return pairs themselves do represent matched supply and return header sections and the circuits and fittings are standard the GHX Circuit when it returns to its piping header section it returns to the piping header component that is directly beneath it This is called the series sibling relationship as described above To counteract this discrepancy and maintain flow consistency the final GHX Circuit at the end of the system links back directly to the return pipe of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout This is best illustrated through an example This can be seen in fi
198. es r Design Heat Pump Inlet Load Temperatures Cooling WB 67 0 deg F Heating DB 70 0 deg F Entering Water Temperatures Water to Water Pumps Cooling ssij degF Heating 100 0 degF E Air Temperatures Water to Air Pumps Fig 3 9 Heat Pumps Tabbed Panel 49 AN CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones It represents the primary heat pump family utilized by the designer for a particular project Although this is the primary series other pumps may still be selected for certain zones using either the Select button or by defining a custom pump To choose a pump series select a manufacturer followed by the desired series of that manufacturer A list of available pumps appears in the list box Inlet Load Temperatures Values for the initial inlet load temperatures for both water to air and water to water pumps may be entered in the appropriate boxes If necessary these values may be changed for individual pumps in the Loads panel For water to air pumps WB refers to Wet Bulb and DB refers to Dry Bulb temperatures The Average Block Loads Module If detailed zone style modeling is unnecessary for an initial calculation or if information is incomplete for a component based design or if the user desires to calculate monthly and or hourly inlet temperatures or if the user wishes to estimate the benefits of the thermal recharge battery from a system for a
199. esigner adds the circulation pump from the Layout panel the required flow rate automatically will be transferred from the Layout panel results which store the calculated fluid dynamics results Note that when the designer adds a circulation pump in the Layout panel the details of the pump are stored and updated dynamically in the Circulation Pump panel When the fluid dynamics are updated in the Layout panel such as well selecting a different flow rate the results are dynamically updated in the Circulation Pump panel as well 209 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Required Input Power The required input power is calculated automatically from the user defined pump power and pump motor efficiency It is anticipated that a future version of GLD will include a comprehensive circulation pump database that automatically calculates required input power Automation Input parameters relating to piping system design automation are located in the Automation panel as shown in figure 11 5 These parameters are divided into several sub tabbed panels including those related to individual GHX Modules Manifolds Ultra Manifolds and Pipe Size options available for use by the auto building algorithms The combined information stored in the Automation panel is used by the CFD module s algorithms to build and or auto size piping systems Figure 11 5 is an overview of the entire Automation panel b Piping Module Layout Fluid Au
200. esigner can also add a title and legend to the graph More than one graph can be open at the same time enabling designers to quickly compare different designs Saved graphs can be found in the GLD Graph Images folder Note that since the hour is the shortest modeling time frame and the program outputs results on an hourly time scale the average max and min EWT values are identical A dated hourly data text file containing the temperature data is generated and stored in the Hourly Data folder each time the Calculate button is pressed If necessary data from this file can be imported into Excel 108 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module Optional Cooling Tower Fluid Cooler and Boiler Section It is not recommended that a user designs a hybrid system while in Hourly Data mode because each time a user changes the hybrid system size GLD will recalculate the entire system This could be very time consuming It is much faster to optimize a hybrid system in the Monthly Data mode and then run an hourly simulation based on the hybrid design More details about hybrid systems can be found above The Design Compare Button The design compare button also known as the Design Dashboard enables a user to quickly and simultaneously compare the results from a Design Day a Monthly and possibly an Hourly simulation The button only appears after the user has selected the Monthly or Hourly design method Figure 4 30 is a sample screen shot from a
201. esigner may vary the loads input temperatures or flows for that particular pump After the user presses the return button variations in the input load temperature will affect the pump parameters listed on the main pump selection area A sample details panel is shown in figure 3 8 Heat Pump Specifications at Design Temperature and Flow Rate Pump Manufacturer Florida Heat Pump Eps Pump Series EV Series Pump Type Water to Air Nominal Flow 1500 CFM Inlet Air Temperatures and Flow Rate Load EAT Cooling WB 67 0 degF Heating DB 70 0 degF Flow Rate Cooling 1600 CFM Heating 1600 CFM Fig 3 8 Pump Details Panel Clear Pressing the Clear button clears the current pump in a zone All values are reset to the initial state allowing the user to reselect or enter a pump for the zone 47 A CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones Custom Pump Customization If the designer must include a heat pump unit that is not stored in GLD s Heat Pump Database he or she may add customized pumps simply by entering values directly into the boxes on the pump selection section of the zone data window When the user does this and overrides the automatic selection features a check appears next to the Custom Pump label indicating that the pump information is from an external source The details section will no longer contain information about the pump manufacturer series or type The calculation portion of GLD
202. et ord 186 Chapter 10 The Thermal Conductivity Module 187 OVGEVIE Wa i e ao eto ate nee E E a MIRT EI UN Rp E MILES IUIS hag 187 General Eeatures Jn ace TU ER E HI p II IN 188 Theoretical Basis ees p Rep ce SED Red 189 Opening Projects eee Y eR RE E M p Ea 189 New Ptojectsi u dae rec eb eie Sal 189 Existing Projects oss eer E VG A ENT EE RIPE 189 Saving Projects eer UP UMP gee 189 Importing Conductivity Data sess 190 Typical Operations i eee IR EM Ee 191 Entering Data into the Tabbed Panels sess eee e eee e nena ene eneas 191 DiffustVity cioe io e EAR D EORR Qe ce eRe EDN eA Qe o e E pe esa S 191 PLOW eee ian dee te wag eek FERRE Reo The ro e Eee led E ba ap EE E RU d obey 192 LIVRE 193 RESULES RE 194 Calculation Interval sees 196 Calculation Res lts e eee egt eet tea Ee e d eee cas 196 Data Quality eite Pte eere eit e E ARR dan o dte 196 Graphs PEE 197 Printing Reports occas seacrencend reote o e ERR petu Ret E PRU RICE ta Dee ERI S 199 Chapter 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module 200 oum EDEN 200 Nomenclaturesss Rm 202 General Features oce ette erroe iru gad ere eoo mre Ee SER o DRE e dE 203 Theoretical Basis ocior etre tht Ro E RP RERO RUE UO Ee RR masons 204 Opening Project ote toe godere E bse eyes ETE ebd D P pine me decns 204 o donis cS 204 Existing ProJectszi seeset segete eee Pee apego t
203. expected The 10 128 KBtu hr needs to be transferred into each of the other three blocks which represent the other 20 hours of the day GLD performs the monthly partial load and the full load hours calculations automatically when it imports a file containing only monthly and peak loads data However if the designer knows more specific details about the installation in question he or she may want to place those loads more precisely in the actual in use periods of the day and consider also the daily occupation of the installation i e not in use on weekends etc However as long as the peak demand and partial monthly load factor remain the same the calculated length will also remain the same no matter what the representation since the daily and monthly pulses remain unchanged Review of Loads Entry in GLD The loads input methodology in GLD is not as complicated as it first may appear to be This system has been chosen for two main reasons First the advanced mathematical model the program employs allows the loads to be broken into hourly pulses throughout the day of peak demand the Design Day which should provide a better overall accuracy in the calculations Second GLD uses full load equivalent hours to reduce the total amount of data entry 68 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones GLD also accepts monthly total and peak loads as well as hourly loads in the average block loads module These data are only necessary for monthly and hourl
204. f metric to English units conversion tables that answer most common engineering conversion problems Below is a description of the included files Fluid Properties Fluid properties refer to any data related to the circulation fluid The five Fluid Properties tables in GLD are the following Table 1 Densities and Specific Heats of Various Solutions Table 2 Minimum Required Flow Rate for Non laminar Flow Tables 3 5 included only in English Units Table 3 Head Loss in SDR 11 HDPE Pipe 20 Propylene Glycol Table 4 Head Loss in SDR 11 HDPE Pipe 20 Methanol Table 5 Head Loss in SDR 11 and 17 HDPE Pipe Pure Water Some of these charts could have also been placed with the Pipe Properties tables but because they vary primarily with solution type they were placed here In an ideal world the Fluid Properties tables would include all of the graphs charts and tables for all of the parameters of all possible antifreeze combinations However because these variations are difficult to predict for specific projects only partial information has been included For the most accurate designs designers are encouraged to seek out their own favorite antifreeze combinations and determine the specific heat density and minimum required flow rate for non laminar flow 153 CHAPTER 8 Tables and Reference Files Soil Properties Soil properties refer to any data related to the soil The three reference files are listed below Table 1
205. fer different combinations of input parameters loads and monthly inlet temperatures that designers can choose among depending on their reporting needs More information on reports can be found in Chapter 7 References Francis E Editor Refrigeration and Air Conditioning 3 Edition Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute p 186 Prentice Hall New Jersey 1997 Incropera F and Dewitt D Introduction to Heat Transfer 2 Edition p 456 p 98 John Wiley and Sons New York 1990 Paul N The Effect of Grout Thermal Conductivity on Vertical Geothermal Heat Exchanger Design and Performance M S Thesis South Dakota State University 1996 110 CHAPTER 5 The Horizontal Design Module CHAPTER 5 The Horizontal Design Module This chapter describes the features and operation of the Horizontal Design module This module is used in the design of near surface horizontal systems It is one of the four design modules included with GLD The module can be used to design trench pit and horizontal bore systems Overview As with the Borehole and Surface Water Design modules the calculations made in the Horizontal Design module involve the combination of a large number of input parameters Care must be taken to assure that proper values are verified before use Assuming that reasonable values are provided to the software the software will provide a reasonable result General Features The Horizontal Design module in GLD al
206. from an Average Block Loads module by clicking the printer button in the controls A dialog window appears giving the designer the list of available report styles After the making a choice click OK to bring up the report window There are five different zone reports included with GLD Detailed Form Concise Form Equipment List Loads List Names List Detailed Form The Detailed Form zone report is the most detailed zone report It lists all of the information included in every zone along with full explanations of the listed parameters The format is open and easy to read However as with the project reports the detailed form produces a much longer printed report than any of the more compact versions Concise Form The Concise Form zone report contains most of the detail of the long report but it is packed into a smaller space It does not include zone names occupation days detailed pump information manufacturer series and type or full descriptions of the items listed It does however contain important information about the loads and the operational parameters of the equipment matched to those loads Equipment List The Equipment List lists only the equipment associated with each zone It provides detailed pump information including name number manufacturer series and type plus all of the operational data associated with that pump It is an ideal report for engineers or contractors who require equipment lists but d
207. from its neighbor by the given vertical separation Y starting from the bottom of the trench If the Offset box is checked each pipe layer will be shifted from the pipe layer below by the given horizontal separation X Two Pipe Vertical Alignment In this arrangement the user creates two pipe layers The number of pipes chosen defines how many layers will be included 2 4 6 etc Each vertical layer is separated from the one above or below by the given vertical separation Y If the Offset box is checked each pipe layer will be shifted from the pipe layer below by one half the given horizontal separation X 2 This arrangement can be utilized to model horizontal bores Three Pipe Vertical Alignment In this arrangement the user defines three pipe layers The number of pipes chosen defines how many layers will be included 3 6 9 etc Each vertical layer is separated from the one above or below by the given vertical separation Y If the Offset box is checked every layer will be shifted from the layer below by one half the given horizontal separation X 2 SLINKY PIPE CONFIGURATIONS In the case of the horizontal and vertical slinky configurations the user 116 CHAPTER 5 The Horizontal Design Module Pipe Configuration in Trench Loop Pitch P 10 0 in Loop Diameter D 35 0 in Fig 5 4 Slinky Variables may define the pitch and diameter of the Slinky Becaus
208. g the current series used in each particular zone For example if most of the pumps belonged to the same water to air series but one was a water to 48 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones water pump this control would determine the difference and update the pumps accordingly Note Custom pumps are not affected when the Update Reselect Current Pumps control is activated Working Series Selection in the Heat Pumps Tabbed Panel Figure 3 9 Shows the Zone Manager opened to the Heat Pump tabbed panel This panel is used to specify the working series for all of the automatic selection features described for the Loads tabbed panel In the Heat Pump tabbed panel the user simply selects the pump series that he or she intends to use for the matching session The selection may be changed at any time without affecting previously automatically selected units However if the Auto Select All Pumps button on the Loads panel is pressed every zone will be replaced with the current working series Additionally in this panel the user may define an inlet load temperature to be used in any automatic selection Choosing the Active Series The active heat pump series is the series of heat pumps used by the Auto Select features in the Loads panel ioi x Heat Pumps Loads mHeat Pump Selection And Design Load Temperatures r Select Heat Pump Manufacturer And Series Florida Heat Pump EV Series r Pumps Available in this Seri
209. ger Workplace with component relationships added GHX Module Supply Return Runout A A GHX Header Section 2 C C GHX Header Section 1 B B B C m B a C 2 2i A By A P d B 1 1 C C P 3 3 Circuit 1 Circuit 2 Circuit 3 parent child relationship 1 parent child relationship 2 parent child relationship 3 B sibling relationship 1 Fig 11 29 Direct Return Component Relationships in the Layout Manager Workspace The components in the system in figure 11 28 have the following titles which can be seen graphically in figure 11 29 Pipe Pair A Parent to Circuit 1 and Pipe Pair B Circuit 1 Child to Pipe Pair A Sibling of Pipe Pair B Pipe Pair B Child of Pipe Pair A Sibling of Circuit 1 Circuit 2 Child of Pipe Pair B Sibling of Pipe Pair C Pipe Pair C Child of Pipe Pair B Sibling of Circuit 2 Circuit 3 Child of Pipe Pair C This parent child nomenclature will be referred to from time to time throughout the rest of this manual Note that for reverse return systems this nomenclature is modified see below 241 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module CONCEPT THREE Parallel and Serial Flow Paths Parallel Flow Paths A parallel flow path is defined as one in which a flow path and component divides into two or more parallel flow paths and components Note that parallel does not mean equal It merely means that t
210. ger Workspace results option LAYOUT MANAGER WORKSPACE RESULTS The Layout Manager Workspace in addition to displaying the visual piping design also displays results that are matched to the individual components Viewing results in the Layout Manager Workspace is a faster way to review results across an entire system as well as to compare different components from a variety of perspectives Because the results data are comprehensive and too much to absorb at one time designers have control over which results they wish to see at any one time The 293 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module user can select which information to view using the Display icon button which is the far right button in the image below Calculate E When a user pushes this button an window similar to that in figure 11 83 will appear Pipe Pair Circuit Pipel Pipe 2 Size Length Flow Rate Velocity Reynold s Number Volume Pressure Drop Total Branch Pressure Drop Group Name Fig 11 83 Selecting Which Results to View in the Layout Manager Workspace The user can then proceed to select data sets of interest Note the user MUST select at least one option from each of the following two categories for results to display e Pipe Pair and or Circuit e Pipe 1 and or Pipe 2 If the user does not select at least one option from each of the above two categories results will not be displayed If the user selects cate
211. ging Flow Rate Data Entry Automatic Purging Flow Rate Calculations Auto Adjust Option If the designer wishes to have the CFD module calculate an appropriate purging flow rate for the GHX Circuits based on the system shown in the Layout panel all he or she has to do is check the Auto Adjust box and 220 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module input a target minimum purging velocity Doing so will activate the Purging Flow Rate Auto Optimizer tool which is described at the end of this chapter As can be seen in figure 11 13 when the user selects the Auto Adjust box the purging flow rate input box deactivates and the target velocity flow rates activate When only the Auto Adjust box is checked and the Auto Size box is unchecked the maximum purge velocity has no impact on the calculations and therefore is deactivated Note that for purging a system with water water is the standard fluid for purging and the fluid utilized automatically by the CFD module a minimum velocity of 2 ft s throughout the system to be purged is optimal After a user hits the Calculate button in the Layout panel the calculated required purging flow rate will update in the purging flow rate box in figure 11 13 the flow rate is calculated to be 68 3gpm based on the system in the Layout panel iv Auto Flow Auto Size Minimum Maximum Purging Target Velocity ft s 2 00 100 00 Fig 11 13 The Auto Adjust Option Purging Flow Rate
212. gner wishes to quickly reverse engineer a system etc Additionally when the borehole design module is linked to an Average Block loads module that has monthly or hourly loads data entered the program can calculate and report monthly and or hourly inlet temperatures and COP EER values A more complete description about how to enter data and perform calculations in the Borehole Design module is provided in Chapter 4 Theoretical Basis To continue providing geothermal system designers with the widest range of flexibility two separate theoretical models now are included within the GLD framework The first model and the original one used exclusively in GLD versions 1 4 is based on the cylindrical source model and allows for quick length or temperature calculations based on limited data input The second is based on a line source theory but is more detailed in its ability to generate monthly and or hourly temperature profiles over time given monthly loads and peak data and or hourly loads data This second model is also able to model the impact of balanced and unbalanced loads on loopfield performance and length requirements This second theory is popular throughout Europe and growing in popularity for its unique strengths in some academic and institutional circles and it is now included so that users can directly compare the two models results using an identical input data set Although the outputs of the two models do not always agree t
213. gories of information as can be seen in figure 11 84 then results will appear as they do in figure 11 85 Viewing this combination of results is useful for looking quickly at the overall piping structure of the GHX Module headering system 294 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Group Name Pipe Pair Circuit Pipel Pipe 2 Size Length Flow Rate Velocity Reynold s Number Volume Pressure Drop Fig 11 84 Desired Results to View Have Been Selected Layout Design and Optimization Calculate B GHX Module Supply Return Pipe 200 0 ft 200 0 ft 2 2 U Circuit 01 EB 2G GHX Header Section 01 20 0 ft 20 0 ft 2 2 U Circuit 02 El 2S GHX Header Section 02 20 0 ft 20 0 ft 2 2 U Circuit 03 El 2S GHX Header Section 03 20 0 ft 20 0 ft 2 25 U Circuit 04 Z9 GHX Header Section 04 20 0 ft 20 0 ft 2 2 U Circuit 05 96 GHX Header Section 05 20 0 ft 20 0 ft 2 2 U Circuit 06 2S GHX Header Section 06 20 0 ft 20 0 ft 2 2 U Circuit 07 iz 9 GHX Header Section 07 20 0 ft 20 0 ft 2 2 U Circuit 08 Fig 11 85 Selected Results Are Now Visible in the Layout Manager Workspace For another example if a user selects categories of information as can be seen in figure 11 86 then results will appear as they do in f
214. gure 11 45 where the final GHX Circuit Circuit 3 links to the return pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA On the supply pipe side fittings come before the pipe see A and A in figure 11 34 above On the return pipe side fittings come after the pipe see C and C t in figure 11 34 above This same formalism applies to both direct and reverse return systems in general supply side fittings come before the supply side pipe and return side fittings come after the return side pipe In the direct return example this can be seen in figure 11 28 where the return side fitting B comes after pipe B The GHX Module Supply Return Runout does not use the reverse return symbol because the reverse return system technically begins with the first GHX Circuit and ends with the last GHX Circuit To understand more clearly how the CFD Module displays reverse return systems an example will be explored Figure 11 45 is a three GHX Circuit reverse return system Figure 11 46 is an example of how the system is modeled in the Layout Manager Workspace 260 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module GHX Module Supply Return Runout A A GHX Header Section 2 C C GHX Header Section 1 B B H 1 B a 2 fu Circuit 1 Circuit 2 Circuit 3 Fig 11 45 Basic Reverse Return Loopfield Layout see a and re Fig 11 46 Basic Reverse Return Loopfield in Layout Manager Workspace Can you find the paralle
215. h can be seen below SIE If a user desires a fitting that is not included in the database the user can choose Other and enter his or her required parameters After the designer has completed his or her selection modification of fittings and pipes using the Pipe and Fitting Manager the designer can hit OK to save the 277 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module updates into the design If the designer hits Cancel all updated information will be lost All updates made in the Pipe and Fitting Manager can be seen in the Properties Window Using the techniques and tools described in this Manual Techniques section a user can design and build a near infinite range of geothermal GHX fields After the design is complete the user can see how it performs Calculations and performance will be addressed later in this chapter Automatic Methods The CFD module also offers a range of tools for the designer who desires to have the module automatically build a wide range of piping systems These automatic methods provide the designer with tremendous power flexibility and time savings While manually building and optimizing a GHX Module using the manual methods described above could take anywhere from a couple of minutes to an hour to complete the automatic methods described below can complete nearly any task in a matter of seconds Automated system building tools include o The GHX Module Builder direct and reverse retur
216. hat Customer will take all reasonable measures to maintain the confidentiality of all Confidential Information in Customer s possession or control which will in no event be less than the measures Customer uses to maintain the confidentiality of Customer s own information of equal importance Confidential Information will not include information that i is in or enters the public domain without breach of this End User Agreement ii Customer receives from a third party without restriction on disclosure and without breach of a nondisclosure obligation or iii Customer develops independently which Customer can prove with written evidence Customer acknowledges that the Software is a trade secret of Gaia the disclosure of which would cause substantial harm to Gaia that could not be remedied by the payment of damages alone Accordingly Gaia will be entitled to preliminary and permanent injunctive relief and other equitable relief for any breach of this Section Limited Warranty Gaia warrants that the Software will substantially conform to its published specifications for a period of thirty 30 days from the later of receipt of the Software or receipt of access to the Software Gaia further warrants that the media on which the Software is contained will be free from defects for a period of thirty 30 days from the later of receipt of the Software or receipt of access to the Software This limited warranty extends only to Customer as the original licensee
217. hat if any incentives have been entered into the Incentives tabbed panel these values are subtracted from the overall installation costs and the net result is displayed Printing Reports Financial reports can be printed at any time using the toolbar print button in the finance module A total of four reports including two finance reports and two inputs reports are available The concise finance report has information related to geothermal financials and energy usage The detailed finance report has information related to geothermal and conventional system financials and energy usage The concise inputs report has a truncated list of all the data inputs used in the financial calculations The detailed inputs report has a full list of the data inputs used in the financial calculations More information on reports can be found in Chapter 7 References Bloomquist R G 2001 The Economics of Geothermal Heat Pump Systems for Commercial and Institutional Buildings Proceedings of the International Course on Geothermal Heat Pumps Bad Urach Germany Cane D et al 1997 Survey and Analysis of Maintenance and Service Costs in Commercial Building Geothermal Systems Caneta Research Inc for the Geothermal Heat Pump Consortium RP 024 Chiasson A 2006 Final Report Life Cycle Cost Study of a Geothermal Heat Pump System BIA Office Bldg Winnebago NE Feasibility Studies and Life Cycle Cost Analysis Oregon Institute of Technology Do
218. he loopfield design into the input boxes and then must hit the Create button that can be seen in figure 4 7 Doing so will create a grid file The user can then export a scr file following the above bullet point instructions Note that if the user is using the standard input boxes for loopfield design he or she should be sure to deselect use external file after completing the export to AutoCAD process Boreholes per Parallel Loop The number of boreholes per parallel loop refers to the piping arrangement within the borehole pattern The calculation will give slightly different bore lengths depending on whether one two or more boreholes are included in one parallel circuit Remember that pumping costs will increase as the pipe lengths per parallel circuit become longer Pressure drop impacts can be fully explored in the new CFD module Fixed Length Mode By selecting fixed length mode the designer can specify the loop field length number of boreholes x length per borehole and have GLD calculate the entering water temperatures When in fixed length mode it is 82 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module important to note that both cooling and heating lengths are identical unlike in the fixed temperature mode where designers temperatures and calculate lengths The expanded user interface displays the design mode fixed temperature or fixed length as well as adjustable parameters associated with each mode For the fixed temperat
219. he Information and Extra kW panels are identical to those included in the Borehole Design module described in Chapter 4 so the reader is referred there for detailed information See Chapter 3 for a discussion of Loads entry Surface Water Use the Surface Water panel to enter data related to the body of water being used as the heat transfer medium Figure 6 2 shows the associated input screen 133 CHAPTER 6 The Surface Water Design Module Surface Water Design Project 1 Results Fluid Soil Piping Surface Water Extra kW Information Surface Water Temperatures at Average Circuit Pipe Depth Summer 46 0 F Winter 39 2 F Surface Water Temperatures at Average Header Pipe Depth Primary Summer 70 0 F winter 35 0 F Branches Summer 70 0 F winter 35 0 F Details Reference Only Surface Water Type Pond a Surface Area 4000 ft 2 Circuit Pipe Depth 12 0 ft Fig 6 2 Surface Water Panel Contents Surface Water Temperatures at Average Circuit Pipe Depth These are the temperatures in the body of water at the depth where the majority of the pipe will reside The Circuit Pipe refers to the main heat exchanger portion of the pipe and does not include the header pipe leading from the surface Temperatures in bodies of water naturally change from summer to winter Both temperatures at the circuit pipe depth should be included in this section Surface Water Temperatures
220. he Long Term Ground Temperature Change for both heating and cooling should be identical in a perfectly balanced system In other cases the designer just may seek a reduction in the total required system length rather than a perfect balance Using the slider control the designer can select the desired length and then note the required cooling tower condenser capacity as calculated by the program As the designer adds cooling tower capacity to a design the peak load of the geothermal system will decrease such that the total capacity of the geothermal system and the hybrid system equals the peak load as defined in the loads module Once the required cooling tower capacity is determined the designer can further modify the various cooling tower parameters to match them to his or her own system The standard equation used in the program Francis 1997 is Condenser Capacity Btu hr Flow Rate gpm x 500 x Temperature Difference F where the 500 is used for pure water and represents a factor derived from Specific Heat of Water 1 0 x 60 min hr x Density 8 33 lb gal 500 103 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module Note that GLD actually calculates this factor from the input fluid properties on the Fluids panel although pure water is a logical choice for most cooling dominated applications For example if the cooling range is increased above the initial minimum value the capacity of the condenser also is increased red
221. he New button Identical pumps may be created from any existing pump by bringing up that pump s data window and clicking the Copy button F Remove and Clear Pumps also can be deleted from the list Any zone can be removed from the list by bringing up the pump s data window and pressing the Remove button To delete all of the pumps in the list press the Clear button iE Renumber If several pumps are added or removed from the list click the Renumber button to reorganize the pumps This button renumbers the existing pumps from one starting with the first pump in the current list Figure 11 4 shows a system with three pumps added along with the total circulation pump power requirements listed at the top B Summary View Toggle Button 207 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module With the Summary View toggle button the user can at any time simultaneously review all of the circulation pumps A sample Summary panel is shown in figure 11 4A Circulation Pump Information Total Circulation Pump Power kW 7 9 Total Number of Circulation Pumps 3 bip B Pump Name Pump 1 Linked Element Supply Return Runout Required Pressure Drop ft hd Required Flow Rate gpm Required Input Power kW Pump Power hP Pump Motor Efficiency Fig 11 4 A Circulation Pump System Circulation Pump Information Total Circulation Pump Power kW 6 8 Total Number of Circulation Pumps 3 DI reg
222. he Tabbed Panels GLD s innovative tabbed panel system provides for easy organization of and direct access to the relatively large number of design parameters associated with a particular project This section describes the Information Extra kW Configuration Piping Soil Fluid and Results panels The Information and Extra kW panels are identical to those included in the Borehole Design module described in Chapter 4 so the reader is referred there for detailed information See Chapter 3 for a discussion of Loads entry Configuration Information pertaining to the trench configuration is in the Configuration panel This includes the trench layout the pipe configuration in the trenches and the modeling time The input screen is shown in figure 5 2 Trench number separation depth and width options also are visible and adjustable in the expanded user interface as seen in figure 5 3 Trench Layout This is the section where the user enters all parameters regarding the physical size and placement of the trenches The number of trenches may be modified at any time using the up down arrows and Separation refers to the center to center distance between adjacent trenches The program assumes all trenches will be equal in separation length depth and width Note that if the selected piping configuration does not fit into the selected trench size the program will automatically adjust the size of the trench to accommodate the selection
223. he Utility Costs panel while conventional system comparison choices are listed on the Conventional panel The idea is that everything related to a single financial project is presented simultaneously and is easily accessible at any time during the design process The tabbed panels can be seen in figure 9 1 below Results Geothermal Conventional Utilities Other Costs Incentives Fig 9 1 Financial Model Panel List The Financial module includes several additional features e Analyses and comparisons are based on o Energy usage costs C0 emissions costs Water usage costs Maintenance costs Mechanical room lease value opportunity costs Installation costs Salvage values costs Tax Incentives Adjustable inflation and discount rates 0000000 0 160 CHAPTER 9 The Financial Module Metric and English unit conversions Printed reports of all input and calculated data A Calculate button used to refresh the calculations Quick importation and modeling of systems designed in the vertical horizontal and pond modules Stand alone financial analysis capabilities e Comparison of a geothermal system with up to four alternative systems Theoretical Basis The financial module analyzes a number of hard and soft costs associated with geothermal and other HVAC systems It models these costs both for a single year and for the building lifetime Many of the factors required for these analyses are user definable and the level of an
224. he flow branches off in two or more directions When a parent is attached to two or more children the flow splits off in parallel Visually a parallel flow across four components can be thought of as looking like this gt m Series Flow Paths A series flow path is defined as one in which a flow path continues in one direction from one component to another component When a parent has one child the flow travels from parent to child in series Visually a series flow across two component elements can be thought of as looking like this gt mes As long as the designer recognizes that parallel flow involves three or more component elements a parent and at least two children and two or more flow directions and that series flow involves two component elements a parent and a child for example or in the case of reverse return systems a sibling and a sibling and one flow direction he or she is ready to proceed to the next section CONCEPT FOUR Direct and Reverse Return GHX Headers There are two general types of GHX Modules those with direct return headers figure 11 30 below and those with reverse return headers figure 11 34 below GHX Header design is of critical importance because a poorly designed system will be very difficult if not impossible to purge properly The two GHX header types are explained and compared below in regards to how they are represented in the CFD module 242 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Flu
225. heet into the Average Block Loads Module All three methods require the loads data to be in the following format Each row of data is for one month of the year with the first populated row representing January loads and the last populated row representing December loads Cooling Total Cooling Peak Heating Total Heating Peak kBtu kBtu hr kBtu kBtu hr 55287 335 382470 1060 46953 345 150525 1105 62 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones 106020 831 98665 745 194889 1008 37332 325 323767 1066 11014 115 424979 1252 291 22 567918 1325 0 516207 1260 0 0 381425 1245 61574 87 204515 938 98623 225 69766 377 144339 200 52249 347 206000 897 The first way to import the loads data is the copy paste method Select ONLY the 12 x 4 block of loads data and copy it Ctrl C In the Average Block Loads module click the Monthly Data button and figure 3 13 will appear Hit the Excel icon as shown in figure 3 13 and the data will be copied automatically into the Average Block Loads module The second way to import the loads data is to save the Excel file as a csv file into the Loads Files Monthly Data Files folder To import this csv file the user can click on the Import button at the top of the Average Block loads module It looks like this 2 Navigate to the csv file of interest and import it into GLD The third way to import monthly data from an Excel file is by using the Import Loads
226. hey do give the designer more information on which to base a final system design The vertical bore length equations used in the primary model in the Borehole Design module are based upon the solution for heat transfer from a cylinder buried in the earth The method was developed and tested by Carslaw and Jaeger Carslaw and Jaeger 1947 The solution yields a temperature difference between the outer cylindrical surface and the 15 CHAPTER 1 GLD Overview undisturbed far field soil temperature Ingersoll suggested using the equation and its solution for the sizing of ground heat exchangers in cases where the extraction or rejection occurs in periods of less than six hours where the simple line source model fails Ingersoll 1954 The borehole module s equations include the suggestions of Kavanaugh and Deerman who adjusted the methods of Ingersoll to account for U tube arrangement and hourly heat variations Kavanaugh and Deerman 1991 It also employs the borehole resistance calculation techniques suggested by Remund and Paul to account for pipe placement grout conductivity and borehole size Paul 1997 Additionally the software calculates the amount of energy absorbed by or withdrawn from the ground using the load information collected from the individual zones and their relationship to the equipment selected The calculations find the conditions for long term steady state operation of borehole fields based on the desired heat
227. horized reseller In the case of a lost dongle license key Customer will be charged the full list price of the Software to replace the lost dongle license key The authorized distributors of the Software who are appointed by Gaia are not permitted to alter the terms of this End User Agreement in any manner Disclaimer EXCEPT AS SPECIFIED IN THIS WARRANTY ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED CONDITIONS REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE NONINFRINGEMENT SATISFACTORY QUALITY OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING USAGE OR TRADE PRACTICE ARE HEREBY EXCLUDED TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY APPLICABLE LAW IN NO EVENT WILL GAIA OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST REVENUE PROFIT OR DATA OR FOR SPECIAL INDIRECT CONSEQUENTIAL INCIDENTAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES HOWEVER CAUSED AND REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE EVEN IF GAIA OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES IN NO EVENT SHALL GAIA S OR ITS SUPPLIERS TOTAL LIABILITY TO CUSTOMER WHETHER IN CONTRACT TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE EXCEED THE PRICE PAID BY CUSTOMER THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS SHALL APPLY EVEN IF THE ABOVE STATED WARRANTY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE BECAUSE SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION OF CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES THE ABOVE LIMI
228. hrmann D R and Alereza T 1986 Analysis of Survey Data on HBVAC Maintenance Costs ADM Associates Inc for ASHRAE Transactions 92 2A 186 CHAPTER 10 The Thermal Conductivity Module CHAPTER 10 The Thermal Conductivity Module This chapter describes how to use the GLD thermal conductivity module a module that enables designers to quickly analyze test data collected from thermal conductivity test units such as the GeoCube Overview For commercial vertical and horizontal heat exchangers an accurate assessment of soil thermal properties soil temperature conductivity and diffusivity is essential Even a small percentage error in thermal property estimates can lead to either excessive installation costs or system underperformance Consequently in many cases in situ thermal conductivity tests are well worth the investment Until recently two modalities have dominated conductivity testing In the first designers and engineers have outsourced conductivity testing and data analysis to third parties In the second they have conducted tests on rented equipment and then sent the data to third parties for analysis These modalities are costly and time consuming In addition these modalities limit the control designers have over the test and the analysis As this industry continues to grow more and more companies desire to have in house testing and analysis capabilities In light of this evolving situation GLD now includes a compreh
229. i o to eee M ERA pA BER POR Qe ED RR TENE DR ODAY 154 Conversion Sieisen ou Shae eds Qe g Meee te URS DAR CRIT d d les AETR L 155 Adding Customized Reference Files esses eee 155 Original Model sisi eee tt dete ceeds ber eR RR Ene RR RECEN EP ERG 155 HIME FUES 5 eara tes e ER PE POR Ent eg AOR E SUERTE 156 Editing Existing Pes s a oe etre REIR EROR EM E 156 Making a Table eet E led ERE MUERE TRPR 157 Adding a Picture Graph or Figure ssssseeserreserrrersrrrerrrrreses 157 Taking Care with Updates es ect ae ep pel t e ee eR re LIB Ede 158 Concluding Ret arks 2 cir eR EM bel RE UP OREENE Ted 158 Chapter 9 The Finance Module eese 159 OVERVIEW oec aida eh e E ote Gaia re ER REM T RON I ERE Re PRU REN ROAD NO TREES EARS 159 General Features i e RR RR ERE REOR ER IEEE 160 Theoretical Basis a rte Re rere CORRER ORE E EE ERR 161 Opening Projects ikke ee reta eit pr RR ORI EVI IE ERES 161 NEW Projects z oe pete Rr Dr chere os Veter corned 161 Importing Data from an Open Heat Exchanger Project 162 Existing Projects 22 iov eter teer RR s E VE ERN EQUI T Ud 162 Saving Projects ss eid RADIO INI ls aes ER ada eee 163 Typical Operations er e ET HI cae E ROI Ar eet 163 Entering Data into the Tabbed Panels sss 163 INCENTIVES icu ioc eie P ERE IN UI TOR EM REISEN DONE SET 163 Othe COSS EE 164 Emissions Costs orae nce he WS a
230. ible Days per Week This value represents the occupation of the installation in days per week The building in the example is only occupied during weekdays so the value 5 0 was entered Decimal values can be used for partial occupations and the amount can vary between zones If the heat loss calculations embody occupancy data then days per week can be left at the value 7 0 Again the occupation is unnecessary for a surface water design since long term buildup effects are unimportant If a loads module is linked to a Surface Water Design module the days per week will not be visible Pump Matching and Selection Every zone has heat pump equipment associated with it Equipment matching and selection is done within the zone data window in the lower section entitled Heat Pump Specifications at Design Temperature and Flow Rate In this section the designer has three choices when matching a pump to a zone e Automatic selection based on the active heat pump series e Manual selection from a list of all available pumps e Custom input of pump data Once selected the zone retains all of the information associated with the pump chosen This information includes the pump name the number of pumps and the capacity power consumption EER COP flow rate and partial load factor in both cooling and heating modes If obtained from the list of available pumps detailed information is also available including the manufacturer and series name th
231. ic systems that work and then use them over and over again It is very difficult to experiment on paper with a variety of systems because the calculations are onerous Furthermore reverse return calculations are impossible to perform by hand or calculator and therefore flow rate velocity and Reynold s Number predictions are just that predictions The GHX Header Design Optimizer solves all of these problems Note that while this tool is called the GHX Header Design Optimizer it also has the capacity of optimizing the design of Manifolds Vaults etc and does so automatically 301 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module To use the GHX Header Design Optimizer the designer must first return to the Fluid Panel and select the Auto Adjust and Auto Size check boxes As was seen previously the Auto Adjust check box option enables the CFD module to automatically adjust the purging flow rate to ensure the user defined minimum purging target velocity through the GHX Circuits The Auto Size check box takes this a step further The Auto Size check box automatically redesigns the Supply Return headering system by changing pipe diameters as necessary to ensure that the flow rates stay within the user defined minimum and maximum flow target velocities At the same time the program is analyzing the pipe diameters it is analyzing the flow rate as well to ensure an optimal comprehensive solution While the minimum target velocity
232. ical zones may be created from any existing zone by bringing up that zone s data window and clicking the Copy button Remove and Clear Zones also can be deleted from the list Any zone can be removed from the list by bringing up the zone s data window and pressing the Remove button To delete all of the zones in the list press the Clear button iE Renumber If several zones are added or removed from the list click the Renumber button to reorganize the zones This button renumbers the existing zones from one starting with the first zone in the current list 41 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones Summary View Toggle Button With the Summary View toggle button the user can at any time simultaneously look at the group of zones This view provides lists of the heat pump data in both cooling and heating modes as well as collective information about the set of chosen pumps This information includes the peak loads and when they occur and the total combined capacity the peak demand and the average efficiency of the selected equipment Although individual pumps cannot be added or removed in the Summary View changes made across the entire pump selection are directly observable A sample Summary panel is shown in figure 3 3 Note that more than one type of pump series is listed zisixi HEETE EH c amp F BoreholeSample zon Return Design Day Loads MBtu Hr Capacity Power COP Zone Pump 812 12 4 48 8 8 MBtu
233. id Dynamics Module Direct Return Systems General Description Direct return GHX Headers generally are easier to design easier to build and can require less total pipe and hence offer a lower total pressure drop compared to reverse return GHX Headers The return pipe of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout may be shorter in the direct return case compared to the reverse return case This is easily visualized look at the A return pipe of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout in both figures 11 30 and 11 34 return pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout in the direct return case is much shorter Of course if a reverse return GHX Header system follows the horseshoe approach the length of return pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout in the reverse return system could be nearly the same as return pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout in the direct return system thereby reducing the lower pressure drop benefit associated with direct return systems It all depends on the particular design GHX Module Supply Return Runout A A GHX Header Section 2 C C e GHX Header Section 1 B B O S B B C 5 a f B ERES 1 d m T m P e 2 2 Circuit 1 Circuit 2 Circuit 3 Fig 11 30 A Direct Return GHX Module The direct return system in the above figure 11 30 has three flow paths The three flow paths are 1 Fluid circulates from supply pipe A of GHX Module Supply Return R
234. ign parameters have been established The Studio Link System The Studio Link system is a powerful feature in GLD that gives users the ability to link or to unlink the loads modules to or from the design modules When a loads module is linked to a Borehole Horizontal or Surface Water Design module all of the data in that loads module is transferred to the design module Once the 57 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones connection is established the pertinent information is stored within the design module which makes transfers in from or out to the loads module as necessary Since the information is now held in the design module it is possible to add multiple design modules with only a single loads module open When studio links are established the information shown in the loads module will correspond to the active design project As long as a link is active design modules retain information about the type of link and the filename of the associated zone zon file This information is stored in saved project gld files so that the appropriate loads module can be opened and loaded when a project file is opened 3 Making a Link The most direct method of making a link between a loads and a design module is to open both modules to be linked activate click on the design module and then press the Link button on the toolbar Another option is to choose Link from the GLD Loads menu If there is only one type of loads module op
235. igure 11 87 Viewing this combination of results is useful for looking quickly at circuit flow characteristics and ensuring turbulent flow throughout the design It is also very useful for understanding the details of reverse return system performance notice the flow rate and Reynold s Number symmetry 295 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Group Name Pipe Pair Circuit Pipel Pipe 2 Size Length Flow Rate Velocity Reynold s Number Volume Pressure Drop Fig 11 86 A Different Set of Desired Results Has Been Selected Layout Design and Optimization Calculate B GHX Module Supply Return Pipe U Circuit 01 0 90 ft s 5091 2G GHX Header Section 01 U Circuit 02 0 89 ft s 5044 B 95 GHX Header Section 02 U Circuit 03 0 88 ft s 5013 26 GHX Header Section 03 U Circuit 04 0 88 ft s 4997 26 GHX Header Section 04 U Circuit 05 0 88 ft s 4997 2 GHX Header Section 05 U Circuit 06 0 88 ft s 5013 9G GHX Header Section 06 U Circuit 07 0 89 ft s 5044 92 GHX Header Section 07 U Circuit 08 0 90 ft s 5091 Fig 11 87 The New Set of Selected Results Are Now Visible While looking at the results in the Layout Manager Workspace offers many benefits in some cases it 1s easier to look at results in a non nested format If such results are desired the
236. ile providing designers with the flexibility they need for standard and non standard systems Outputs include flow rates fluid velocities Reynold s numbers pressure drop fluid volume and the like for every single point in a dynamic geothermal piping system The GLD CFD Module is the first tool in humanity s toolbox for modeling the complex fluid dynamics in geothermal heat exchanger systems e 8760 Hourly energy simulations With a new g function engine based off of recent heat transfer research advances GLD can now model the bore and fluid temperatures and equipment performance hour by hour over one or more design years The hourly simulation provides the highest degree of design accuracy and optimization and enables for example advanced solar thermal recharge simulations and more precise average annual consumption and performance COP EER calculations e A suite of new visualization tools A set of new tools enables instant visual review of critical design parameters and results Now users can visualize loads in 2 D color graphs and graph a variety of monthly and hourly results from within the Design Studio e The updated heat pump module and heat pump database can now store recommended and minimum heat pump pressure drop and flow rate data e An updated user interface An updated user interface with the new design dashboard enables a designer to compare designs with greater speed e Enhanced industry integration GLD now features bi direc
237. image that the user would like to have available in GLD Note GLD requires the FluidTables html SoilTables html and PipeTables html files and their metric counterparts FluidTablesMetric html SoilTablesMetric html and PipeTablesMetric html as the initial files when opening the associated tables They can be edited but if they are deleted the associated tables cannot be opened at all 155 CHAPTER 8 Tables and Reference Files HTML Files HTML refers to Hypertext Mark up Language It is the language used on web pages and commonly used in software to quickly provide linked information to users HTML files can be created with an HTML editor like those distributed with common browsers or with a simple text editor They must however follow a certain format and have a htm or html extension Editing Existing Files Existing files may be edited by simply opening up the original file into a text editor or HTML editor making changes and then saving the file again For example if a user wishes to add a new pipe table to the list he or she first will create the table i e PipeTable4 html and then will add a link to it on the PipeTables html file Additionally if the user wishes to add additional information to an existing table or figure he or she only has to open the appropriate HTML file in a text editor or HTML editor and make and save the desired changes For example if adding a new link PipeTables4 html to th
238. in 197 CHAPTER 10 The Thermal Conductivity Module on the area of interest This process can be repeated multiple times Users can right click the mouse at any time to zoom out to the original view There are four types of graphs Temperature vs Time Temperature vs LN time Power vs Time and Flow vs Time An overview image can be seen in figure 10 7 The Temperature vs Time graph and the Temperature vs LN time graph are graphed according to the requirements of the Line Source analysis methodology The Power vs Time and Flow vs Time graphs are included for test quality control purposes Upon initial CSV data file importation only the raw data are graphed as seen below in figure 10 8 After the Calculate button is pushed in the Results tab the data are analyzed and the calculated line is graphed as an overlay This can be seen in figure 10 9 The overlay calculated line depends on the user specified calculation interval specified in the Results tab Users can adjust this calculation interval and recalculate as necessary to bring the raw data and calculated lines as close together as possible This is useful for determining the optimal calculation interval For example if a user finds that the over the 12 to 40 hour time interval the two lines do not overlap closely the user might view the power vs time graph If the power vs time graph indicated a power supply instability between hours 35 and 38 the user could change th
239. in the geothermal tabbed panel Hybrid Type At present time the user has the option of selecting a boiler Fuel Type The user can select from among seven fuel options Hybrid System Capacity Here users can enter the installed capacity of the hybrid system This value automatically is entered when the user imports a heat exchanger design project that is a hybrid system design into the finance module Hybrid Unit Efficiency The user can enter the boiler s thermal efficiency here 183 CHAPTER 9 The Financial Module Additional Power Here the user enters extra power requirements for the system such as fans circulation pumps etc Installation Area In this section the user enters the floor space square footage required by the selected heating equipment For example if the boiler requires 600 ft of floorspace the user can enter 600 ft here Water Usage Rate The user can enter the water usage rate if any for the boiler Results All of the cost emissions results for both the geothermal and alternate systems can be viewed at any time on the Results panel After all data have been entered or any changes have been made the user can calculate interim or final results using the Calculate button A sample screen for this panel can be seen in figure 9 10 The Calculate panel is divided into two sections On the top is the Annual Cost section On the bottom is the Net Present Value NPV Lifecycle Costs section
240. in the Borehole and Horizontal Design modules because the hourly data ultimately determines the contributions to the daily and monthly pulses of heat to the ground GLD performs calculations based on daily monthly and annual heat pulses In this type of situation GLD will use the peak demand and total monthly loads to determine a monthly partial load factor PLFm for the peak design month where PLFm actual run time per month run time if at full load per month Once the program calculates the PLFm it automatically determines the relationship between off peak period loads and peak period loads to assure that the monthly partial load factor matches that of the imported data The program assumes that the peak demand occurs during the top four hour period multiplied by the number of days in the month If the total heat gains or losses provided for the peak month still exceed this value the remainder of the total monthly loads are evenly split between the other time periods in the day making up the remaining 20 hours If not the demands of all other periods are set to 0 The peak and its time block will be used for the daily pulse The monthly pulse utilizes the data in the off peak periods to recalculate the PLFm A sample PLFm calculation is presented below Assume the monthly calculation gives a total monthly load in January of 10000 KBtu kWh and the corresponding peak demand from noon to four p m is 30 KBtu hr kW In this case
241. ing and cooling should be identical in a perfectly balanced system 127 CHAPTER 5 The Horizontal Design Module In other cases the designer just may seek a reduction in the total required system length rather than a perfect balance Using the slider control the designer can select the desired length and then note the required cooling tower condenser capacity as calculated by the program Once the required cooling tower capacity is determined the designer can further modify the various cooling tower parameters to match them to his or her own system The standard equation used in the program Francis 1997 is Condenser Capacity Btu hr Flow Rate gpm x 500 x Temperature Difference F where the 500 is used for pure water and represents a factor derived from Specific Heat of Water 1 0 x 60 min hr x Density 8 33 Ib gal 500 Note that GLD actually calculates this factor from the input fluid properties on the Fluids panel although pure water is a logical choice for most cooling dominated applications For example if the cooling range is increased above the initial minimum value the capacity of the condenser also is increased reducing the total number of operating hours However in the same case decreasing the required flow rate is another option that would keep the condenser capacity and operating hours unchanged The only limitations are the required temperature difference and the minimum condenser capacity neede
242. ing pairs are covered below in the Supply Return Header Design Optimizer The designer must first have designed a system in the Layout panel before he or she can use the Purging Flow Rate Auto Optimizer After the designer has laid out a satisfactory first draft system the user can activate the Purging Flow Rate Auto Optimizer from the Fluid Panel The user has to select the Auto Adjust check box indicating that the CFD module will auto adjust the purging flow rate to achieve the user defined purging target velocity and then define the minimum purging target velocity In figure 11 91 the minimum target velocity is set to 2 ft s the standard for purging with water Also note that the purging flow rate is deactivated when the designer chooses Auto Adjust This is because the program will automatically calculate and display the necessary purging flow rate here after the calculation is completed Note that when performing purging calculations the CFD module always uses water properties and ignores the fluid properties selected in the lower half of the Fluid panel 299 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Fluid Information Peak Load Flow Rate gpm 30 00 Installed Capacity Flow Rate gpm 60 00 Purging Flow Rate gpm 90 00 z Nas Fine Minimum Maximum Purging Target Velocity ft s 2 00 100 00 Fig 11 91 Activating the Purging Flow Rate Auto Optimizer Calculating Results with the Purging
243. ing tower if used The lower entry box Additional Power Requirements is for all other elements besides the heat pump units in the system that may require energy input For example heat recovery units require additional energy that can be recorded in this box so that it can be used in the overall calculation of the System EER COP In the Circulation Pumps section the Required Input Power is calculated from the Pump Power required by the pump s for the system in question and the average Pump Motor Efficiency It is not possible to edit the Required Input Power values directly However if the pump motor efficiency is set to 100 the Pump Power and Required Input Power will be the same 13 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module PT Borehole Design Project verticalsampleforManual E E Results Fluid Soil U Tube Pattern Extra kW Information Circulation Pumps Required Input Power 18 kw Pump Power 20 NhB Pump Motor Efficiency 85 9s Optional Cooling Tower Pump Required Input Power 0 2 kW Power 0 2 hP Motor Efficiency 85 Yo Additional Power Requirements Additional Power 10 kw Pump Power Calculator Fig 4 3 Extra kW Panel Contents If an optional cooling tower is used for hybrid applications the demands of the pump and fan may be included on this panel The tower pump is selected based on the water flow and the total head these also determine the
244. ion Peak Load Flow Rate gpm 30 00 Installed Capacity Flow Rate gpm 60 00 R Be zs v Auto Flow Purging Flow Rate gpm 90 00 Ao e Minimum Maximum Purging Target Velocity ft s 2 00 100 00 Solution Properties Automatic Entry Mode by Weight by Volume Fluid Type 100 Water Design Temperature 32 0 F Specific Heat Cp 1 00 Btu F lbm Density rho 62 4 lb ft 3 Dynamic Viscosity u 3 738E 5 Ibf s ft 2 Check Fluid Tables Fig 11 11 Fluid Panel Contents Fluid Information In this section users may enter flow rates for peak load installed capacity and purging These three flow rate options handy for comparison purposes are used to calculate fluid dynamics results in the Layout tab Note that users can switch between the three entered flow rates in the Layout tab and so do not have to keep returning back and forth to the Fluid tab during the piping optimization process Peak Load Flow Rate The peak load flow rate is the flow rate necessary to cover the peak heating or cooling load The peak flow rate typically calculated in the heat exchanger design modules is based on the peak load and the flow rate in GPM ton or its metric equivalent The user can enter the peak flow 219 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module rate here or it can be automatically transferred in when a user imports a design project into the CFD module Installed Capacity Flow R
245. ion Calculate Bl E GHX Module Supply Return Pipe B U Circuit 01 Fig 11 73 Two Circuits Per One Way Length Series Flow 282 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Supply Return Pipe Information In this section the designer enters the one way length of the supply return pipe pair that connects the GHX Module with its parent component in the design typically a Manifold Vault or circulation pump house The user also enters the supply return pipe diameter here Note that the GHX Module Builder is pre populated with design parameters These default parameters can be updated modified as necessary in the Automation Panel and on the GHX Module subpanel OK and Cancel Buttons After the designer has reviewed and modified the parameters he or she can hit the OK button and the GHX Module will be auto built in the Layout Manager Workspace An example of an auto built reverse return GHX Module can be seen in figure 11 74 Layout Design and Optimization Calculate Bl 4 GHX Module Supply Return Runout U Circuit 01 9G GHX Header Section 01 U Circuit 02 El 2 GHX Header Section 02 U Circuit 03 E 26 GHX Header Section 03 U Circuit 04 2S GHX Header Section 04 U Circuit 05 9 GHX Header Section 05 U Circuit 06 El 9 GHX Header Section 06 U Circuit 07 B 26 GHX Header Section 07 U Circuit 08 Fig 11 74 An Auto Built Reve
246. ional Buildings ASHRAE 1997 Parker J D Bose J E and McQuiston F C ASHRAE Design Data Manual for Ground Coupled Heat Pumps ASHRAE Research Project RP 366 1985 Paul N The Effect of Grout Thermal Conductivity on Vertical Geothermal Heat Exchanger Design and Performance M S Thesis South Dakota State University 1996 24 CHAPTER 2 Adding Editing Heat Pumps CHAPTER 2 Adding Editing Heat Pumps To effectively use any of the design modules included with GLD it is important to understand how the system models heat pump data For the purpose of adding new or editing existing heat pumps to GLD s Heat Pump Database the Add Edit Heat Pumps Module is included as a separate module in the Design Studio This chapter describes the theory of the module and gives an example of how to enter heat pump data A more detailed example can be found online and accessed through the Help menu web resources option Heat Pump Model Description For convenience the Loads modules in GLD predict how heat pump characteristics will vary with changes in the input design parameters If the designer changes the inlet source or load temperatures or the system flow rate the capacity and power data of the units may also change The easiest and most accurate way of realizing these changes is to employ an internal model which the software uses to update the pump data automatically Using GLD the designer can concentrate on the effects of 25
247. ior to performing its calculations If only cooling or only heating loads data are to be used all of the non used slots should remain as zeroes Only the side with the loads provided will be calculated Annual Equivalent Full Load Hours The hours entered into the lower section of figure 3 4 are determined from detailed annual loads data for the system being designed They represent the annual number of hours the system will be running if operating at full load and are a measure of the system running time 43 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones This system is used both to limit the amount of data the user must enter and to simplify the calculations It is identical to methods that require input of all the monthly data but more concise since it represents the total energy input to the ground in terms of the peak load Month to month variations are not necessary in the annual monthly daily pulse model used in GLD For example if a loading report provides the number of Btus required by this zone each month the hours per month will be obtained by dividing the monthly Btu requirement by the peak Btu h value The resulting number will be the monthly equivalent full load hours To get the annual full load hours the value will need to be obtained for every month that required heating or cooling and then combined to finally get the annual equivalent heating or cooling hours If exact values are not available an estimate should be made with regard to
248. ipes 1 and 2 are longer than those attached to the supply header pipes 1r and 2s There is no requirement that each subcomponent in a particular component has a uniform length Indeed the designer has as much control as he or she desires As introduced before it is important to understand how parallel and serial flow paths are displayed in the Layout Manager Workspace Parallel Flow Paths 253 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module oo gt In figure 11 39 a parallel flow path occurs where supply pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout branches into two components Circuit 1 and supply pipe B of GHX Header Section BB The fluid flows in Circuit 1 and supply pipe B of GHX Header Section BB therefore are in parallel Circuit 1 and supply pipe B of GHX Header Section BB are siblings because they share the same parent In the CFD Layout Manager Workspace parallel flow paths or siblings are vertically stacked directly above one another This can be seen in figure 11 40 where Circuit 1 is directly above GHX Header Section BB Series Flow Paths gt gt In figure 11 39 a series flow path occurs where supply pipe B of GHX Header Section BB continues into Circuit 2 The fluid flow from supply pipe B of GHX Header Section BB to Circuit 2 is therefore in series Supply pipe B of GHX Header Section BB is the parent of Circuit 2 and Circuit 2 is the child of supply pipe B of GHX Header Se
249. irectly into the loads modules Importing Loads Into the Average Block Loads Module The Average Block Loads module can accept the importation of monthly and hourly loads data sets For monthly and hourly loads sets users can import loads files from 3rd party building simulation tools or can import csv files from Excel 59 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones For monthly loads users have the additional option of quickly copying pasting monthly loads data from Excel and into the Average Block Loads module Importing Monthly and Hourly Loads From 3rd Party Programs To import a file from a commercial loads program the user can click on the Import button at the top of the Average Block loads module It looks like this a Doing so automatically opens the file dialog box in the Loads Files folder There may be several subfolders in which users should store the loads data files that GLD will be using Users can select one of these folders to display all of the files that can be imported from that particular folder Note that in previous versions of GLD the file dialog box in the Zones folder would open up Monthly Loads Data When the user selects a valid monthly import file the program automatically transfers the data into the active Average Block Loads module Note that any previously existing loads will be overwritten If the user is importing a monthly geothermal template GT file from the Trane Trace program an Import Loads win
250. izing the data back to its original state can be accomplished by hitting the Calculate button again When more than one nested component family ie more than one GHX Module a GHX Module and a Manifold etc is present in a design the designer will benefit from displaying the Group Name option The Group Name option allows a designer to sort and resort a large system by Group Name when he or she clicks on the Group Name column The Group Name column can be seen in figure 11 90 Layout Design and Optimization Calculate B Name e ipe pe i Reynold s Number Pipe 2 Reynold s Number GHX Module Supply Return Pipe U circuit 01 9 GHX Header Section 01 U Circuit 02 96 GHX Header Section 02 GHX Module 01 U Circuit 03 GHX Module 01 92 GHX Header Section 03 GHX Module 01 U Circuit 04 GHX Module 01 36 GHX Header Section 04 GHX Module 01 U Circuit 05 GHX Module 01 9C GHX Header Section 05 GHX Module 01 U Circuit 06 GHX Module 01 96 GHX Header Section 06 GHX Module 01 U Circuit 07 GHX Module 01 2 GHX Header Section 07 GHX Module 01 U Circuit 08 GHX Module 01 U Circuit 01 GHX Module 02 2 GHX Header Section 01 GHX Module 02 U circuit 02 GHX Module 02 C GHX Header Section 02 GHX Module 02 U Circuit 203 GHX Module 02 926 GHX Header Section 03 GHX Module 02 U Circuit 04 GHX Module 02 9 GHX Header Section 04 GHX Module 02 U Circuit 05 GHX Module 02 96 GHX Header Sec
251. izontal or vertical orientation designed to transfer energy to and from the ground Typically a number of GHX Circuits are fusion welded to a GHX Header that is in turn fusion welded to a Supply Return Runout Heat transfer fluid is circulated through the assembly to a building U Tube An assembly of two lengths of HDPE pipe connected on one end with a molded purpose built U bend GHX Header Connection points between Supply Return Runout piping and GHX Circuits GHX Headers are buried in the ground adjacent to the GHX Field and are comprised of an assembly of fusion welded fittings and pipe Fittings and pipe are manufactured using HDPE resin and are connected using heat fusion butt fusion socket fusion or electro fusion Supply Return Runout Supply Return Runout refers to the high density polyethylene HDPE piping installed to connect the GHX Circuit piping to the Pump House header The Supply Return Runout has both a supply pipe and a return pipe 202 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module GHX Manifold Connection point for Supply Return Runout piping from GHX field A GHX Manifold is typically located inside a building or in a geothermal Vault located away from the building GHX Module Completed assembly of GHX components including GHX Supply and Return Runouts GHX header and GHX Circuits GHX Field Assembly of all GHX Modules connected to a single building or group of buildings via GHX Manifold s Vault s
252. k heating columns there are two input boxes for the number of hours the system is expected to operate at the peak The initial value is set at 3 0 hours and shown in bold face Only the Monthly Data or second model of the Borehole Design module uses this Hours at Peak value in its calculations The number entered hear determines the number of sequential hours the peak load is applied to the system For example if the peak cooling load is expected to last from 12 noon until 4pm on July 21st then the user can enter 4 0 cooling hours at peak Except for a process load it is probably rarely the case 53 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones where the peak load is applied for more than 4 6 hours The impact of modifying the hours at peak input on final results can be viewed most clearly in the new Graphing Module in GLD 2010 which is described below and in the calculated peak entering and exiting water temperatures shown in the Monthly Design method see below The Design Day heat transfer model utilizes the 4 or 8 hour time period already fixed in the Design Day Loads section After entering the loads data hit the Update button to return to the main loads panel screen Notice that the program automatically converts the monthly loads into the design day format following the calculations described on pages 65 66 Hourly Loads Hourly loads data are useful for predicting the system performance of a particular geothermal loopfield configuration an
253. kBtu hr Average Heat Pump Efficiency 22 0 EER 3 8 COP Circulation Pump Input Power qua kw 12 kW Pump Power 15 IRE 15 bP Motor Efficiency 90 90 Additional Power 0 0 kW 0 0 kw Installation Area 300 0 MESS Fig 9 6 Geothermal Panel Contents Geothermal Project Power Summary Panel The top third of the Geothermal panel displays several features of the geothermal system including the modeling time period the energy usage and fuel type for the geothermal system This can be seen below in figure 9 7 Geothermal System 20 0 bs Import COOLING HEATING TOTAL years Manual Geothermal Power 2608 4 kWh 120890 5 kWh 123499 0 kWh Hybrid Power 0 0 kwh 0 0 kWh 0 0 kWh Total Annual Power 2608 4 kWh 120890 5 kWh 123499 0 kWh Water 0 0 Gallons 0 0 Gallons 0 0 Gallons Other None None Fig 9 7 Geothermal Project Power Summary Panel 177 CHAPTER 9 The Financial Module The modeling time period The modeling time period is necessary for calculating the NPV lifetime costs of the design When a user imports a design project into the finance module the modeling time period automatically is set to match the modeling time period use in the heat exchanger design In such a case the modeling time period is grayed out indicating that the value was imported If a user wishes to override this value he or she can do so by first selecting the Manual option and then entering the time period of interest
254. l hybrid and more standard HVAC systems Furthermore it enables decision makers to compare simultaneously the financial profiles of multiple systems 159 CHAPTER 9 The Financial Module The finance module either can be used on a standalone basis or in conjunction with a heat exchanger system designed in GLD On a standalone basis users can enter minimal data for a quick energy cost and emissions estimate or can enter detailed data for a more comprehensive financial analysis Users also can model the financials of a heat exchanger system designed in GLD The program automatically transfer the applicable parameters into the finance module and reports the financial and emissions analysis As with the other modules in Ground Loop Design it is important to remember that the calculated results are only as good as the quality of the user defined inputs Assuming that reasonable values are provided to the software the software will provide reasonable results It is also important to note that the finance module is only an estimation tool and for a variety of reasons installed HVAC systems may have costs and emissions that vary significantly from the estimates General Features To aid in the data entry process the Finance module in Ground Loop Design consists of a set of panels grouped by subject through which the designer can enter and edit the input variables efficiently For example parameters related to the utility costs are listed on t
255. l be set to 0 0 until the Calculate button is pushed Layout Design and Optimization Calculate E Peak Load Alphabetic Categorized Fittings Return Fittings Supply Flow Rate El General Group Name GHX Module 01 Name Main Supply Return Runout Pipe Pai E Pipe 1 Supply Pipe 1 Diameter Inner ir U Circuit 01 GHX Header Section 01 U Circuit GHX Header Section 02 U Circuit 03 Pipe 1 Diameter Oute t Pipe 1 Length ft 100 Pipe 1 Length Extra ft 0 00 Pipe 1 Name Supply Pipe 1 Size 3 in 80 mm Pipe 1 Type SDR11 Pipe 1 Volume gal 7 El Pipe 2 Return Pipe 2 Diameter Oute 3 50 Pipe 2 Length ft 100 Pipe 2 Length Extra ft 0 00 Pipe 2 Name Return 3 in 80 mm Pipe 2 Type SDR11 Pipe 2 Volume gal Pressure Drop Reynold s Number Velocity Volume Pipe Size Radial dimension of pipe Fig 11 63 Properties Can Be Modified With the Properties Window 273 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module The designer can also control details about the Supply Side and Return Side fittings in the Properties Windows for the same pipe pair the Supply Return Runout from the above figure It is important to remember where these fittings are located in the model see the GLD Piping Language section of this chapter In figure 11 64 below some of the fitting options can be seen in the drop down menu Note that if a user wishes to manually enter a
256. l flow paths in figure 11 46 Remember parallel flow paths are vertically stacked The following paths are in parallel e Circuit 1 and supply pipe B of GHX Header Section BB are in parallel coming out of supply pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA Circuit 1 and supply pipe B of GHX Header Section BB are siblings that share the supply pipe A of GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA as a parent e Circuit 2 and supply pipe C of GHX Header Section CC are in parallel coming out of supply pipe B of the GHX Header Section BB Circuit 2 261 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module and supply pipe C of GHX Header Section CC are siblings that share the supply pipe B of the GHX Header Section BB as a parent Can you find the serial flow paths in figure 11 46 Remember serial flow paths are stacked with indentation and for reverse return systems can be found in the series sibling relationships The following paths are in series e Supply pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA Circuit 1 e Supply pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA Supply Pipe B of GHX Header Section BB Circuit 2 e Supply pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA Supply Pipe B of GHX Header Section BB Circuit 2 Supply Pipe C of the GHX Header Section CC Circuit 3 e Return Pipe of Circuit 1 Return pipe B of GHX Header Section BB Return pipe C of GHX Header Section CC Return pipe A of the GHX Mo
257. le Supply Return Runout U Circuit 01 Sees GHX Header Section 01 ow U Circuit 02 ER GHX Header Section 02 U Circuit 03 El GHX Header Section 03 U Circuit 04 El GHX Header Section 04 U Circuit 05 E GHX Header Section 05 U Circuit 06 EI GHX Header Section 06 U Circuit 07 GHX Header Section 07 U Circuit 08 Fig 11 57 Click on the Minus Box To Hide The Entire GHX Module Calculate E g E m GHX Module Supply Return Runout Fig 11 58 The Entire GHX Module is Now Hidden Deleting Pipe Pairs and Circuits Deleting components and nested component families is as easy as creating them To delete an individual component the user merely has to select the component right click and select delete This can be seen in figure 11 59 and figure 11 60 270 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Layout Design and Optimization Calculate B GHX Module Supply Return Runout U Circuit 01 GHX Header Section 01 U GHX Head Add New Pipe Pair Jenn U Circi Add Reverse Return Pipe Pair X Add New Circuit E 1 Add New Ultra Manifold Add New Manifold Add New GHX Module Pipe and Fitting Manager Copy Selection Paste Selection Delete Fig 11 59 Select the Component of Interest Right Click and Choose Delete Layout Design and Optimization Calculate B E GHX Module Supply Return Runout U Circuit 01 sz Ei GHX Header Section
258. le with a design her or she optionally may run an hourly simulation over a design year to estimate system performance based on the more fine hourly loads data Note that after the user starts the hourly calculation a cancel button will appear that enables the user to end the process if necessary For the Hourly Data results the reporting section is separated into five subsections and one Graphing Module Results that are unique to the Hourly Data results compared to the Design Day results are displayed in green A sample screen for Hourly Data results can be seen in figure 4 26 The two lists on the Results panel are for heating and cooling In fixed length mode both heating and cooling results are printed in bold type so that they stand out The reason is that in fixed length mode performance calculations for both the dominant and non dominant sides are based on the actual designer selected length of the heat exchanger Results for both sides are therefore relevant The first subsection deals with the bores including the total length the borehole number and the borehole length for one bore A common way to adjust the borehole length to a desired value is to change the borehole number or pattern on the Pattern panel The second subsection presents the predicted long term ground temperature change with respect to the average ground temperature of the installation When calculating Hourly Data results the average ground temperature chang
259. lete the dongle light will turn on After Dongle Installation is Complete Now that the dongle is installed you can access the full functionality of the GLD version that you purchased If you remove the dongle the program will revert to demo mode If you reattach the dongle the program will reactivate again How To Transfer the Program Between Computers The dongle licensing system allows the user to transfer the license from one computer to another If a user decides to transfer GLD from one computer to another all he or she has to do is the following e Install GLD onto the target computer e After the demo version of the program is running on the new computer attach the dongle and follow the above instructions regarding dongle driver installation Dongle Activation for Apple Macintosh Computers Use this command in the Darwin Unix window of the Terminal Utility in the Utilities folder there is no need to restart the computer or Parallels sudo launchctl unload Library LaunchDaemons com aladdin aksusbd plist CHAPTER 1 GLD Overview CHAPTER 1 GLD Overview This chapter is an introduction to the GLD Premier 2010 Edition software package It introduces new features the Design Studio the Heat Pump and Loads Modules the Borehole Horizontal and Surface Water Design Modules the Finance Module the Thermal Conductivity Module the reporting functions and the data reference files There is also an explanation of th
260. llected and analyzed in several studies by Bloomquist Cane et al Hughes et al and Dohrmann and Alereza suggest the following range of maintenance costs for geothermal and conventional HVAC systems Below is a table on maintenance costs adapted from Hughes et al HVAC System Type Maintenance Costs Air cooled chiller gas fired water boiler 0 94 m yr 0 088 ft7 yr Geothermal system 0 99 m yr 0 093 ft yr Water cooled chiller gas fired steam boiler 1 45 m yr 0 135 ft yr Water cooled chiller gas fired water boiler 2 01 m yr 0 187 f lyr Below is a table on maintenance costs adapted from Cane et al System Type Average Mean Maint Costs in Age 1997 dollars Geothermal system 5 1m7 yr 0 093 ft7 yr Water source heat pump 18 3 3m yr 0 3 1 ft yr Packaged air to air 2 5m yr 0 4 7 ft yr Split air to air 24 4m yr 0 37 ft yr Reciprocating chiller 2 4 40m7 yr 0 4 ft yr Centrifugal chiller 20 5 5m yr 0 52 ft yr Absorption chiller 29 8m yr 0 75 ft yr Below is a third table with data based off of an analysis conducted by Dohrmann and Alereza 169 CHAPTER 9 The Financial Module System Type Age of System years 0 2 5 10 20 Geothermal system 2 2m7 yr 2 3m7 yr 2 4m yr 2 6m yr 2 96m yr 0 208 f yr 0 215 fC yr 0 226 f yr 0 243 f
261. look at two more basic direct return examples to solidify our understanding It is important to note that the visual grammar that the CFD module uses is not to scale The graphics used to describe the pipes and their relationships are identical in size even if the underlying pipe properties are different For example in figure 31 circuit 1 could be 100 ft deep and circuit 2 could be 200 feet deep BASIC DIRECT RETURN LOOPFIELD LAYOUT 3 Figure 11 43 is the layout of a four circuit two GHX circuits per bore GHX Module The two circuits per bore or double U tubes according to some nomenclature are in parallel they are vertically stacked 257 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Layout Design and Optimization Calculate E El GHX Module Supply Return Runout A A U Circuit 01 U Circuit 02 EE U Circuit 03 U Circuit 04 Fig 11 43 Basic Direct Return Loopfield Layout 3 in Layout Manager Workspace Can you find the parallel flow paths in figure 11 43 Remember parallel flow paths are vertically stacked The following paths are in parallel Circuit 1 and Circuit 2 are in parallel coming out of supply pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA and returning to return pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA Circuit 1 and Circuit 2 are siblings that share the GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA as a parent Similarly Circuit 3 and Circuit 4 are in parallel coming
262. losses However this type of reduction is not always necessary or desirable Other ways of increasing the maximum allowable number of parallel circuits include changing the system flow rate or the minimum circuit flow rate for non laminar flow The second section lists different temperature variables The first two of these are Source inlet and outlet temperatures The final variable is the approach temperature which is the difference between the pond temperature and the desired inlet source temperature Note In surface water heating applications although the solution within the pipe may not freeze the freezing temperature of the body of water is generally 32 F If the heat pump outlet temperature is too far below this value the water may freeze on the pipe greatly reducing its heat transfer characteristics and potentially leading to system failure The designer must always pay attention to the outlet temperature value for this reason As with the Borehole Design module the third section lists the total unit capacity the peak loads and the demand of all the equipment followed by the calculated heat pump and system efficiencies The peak load is the maximum determined from whichever time period across all the zones has the highest load The peak demand includes all pumps and external energy requirements including those listed in the Extra kW panel Care must be exercised when equipment energy requirements listed in the Extra kW panel refer
263. low Rate Pressure Drop gpm ft hd Recommended 0 0 0 0 Minimum 0 0 0 0 Fig 2 2 Pump Edit Pane Pump Series Controls The Pump Series control buttons shown in figure 2 3 are found above the list and the pump data panels They include the Pump Edit controls New 29 CHAPTER 2 Adding Editing Heat Pumps Copy Remove Reorder and Clear the pump Save control the Edit Pump Information control and the Delete Series control Dp 3 xi Fig 2 3 Pump Series Controls 3 ig m Pump Edit Controls The Pump Edit Control buttons are designed to work directly with the pump list New pumps are added by pressing the New button Copies of existing pumps are added with the Copy button Remove is used to remove a pump from the list Reorder is pressed to reorganize the list both alphabetically and numerically Clear is used to delete all pumps from the current list Be careful not to accidentally delete pumps fac Save Control The Save control button can be used at any time to save the current pump information E Edit Pump Information Control The Edit Pump Information control button allows the user to edit both the series and the manufacturer information for a given pump Note however that if the manufacturer information is changed it will change for every series connected to that manufacturer Proceed or Cancel will return the user to the Pump Edit Pane x Delete Series Control The Delete Series
264. luid Dynamics Module It is important for the designer to confirm that he or she is using the appropriate flow rate selection Besides having three general types of results there are also three primary ways of reviewing results These include e Properties Window results e Layout Manager Workspace results e Review Panel results Each is described in turn below PROPERTIES WINDOW RESULTS After the fluid dynamics for a particular system have been calculated the user can review the results for every component one at a time in the Properties Window For example in figure 11 82 below the Peak Load Flow Rate set at 30 gpm in the Fluid tab has been selected and results for the GHX Circuit 4 Pressure Drop Reynold s Number and Velocity are displayed as follows Pressure Drop 2 5 ft hd Reynold s Number 4997 Velocity 0 88 ft s Remember that these results are for the Peak Load Flow Rate and for the selected fluid which is water in this example If a user changes the flow rate or the fluid type results will change as well 292 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Layout Fluid Automation Circulation Pumps Layout Design and Optimization Calculate Bl Peak Load gt Ei GHX Module Supply Return Pipe Alphabetic Categorized U Circuit 01 m Fittings End E 9 GHX Header Section 01 s Corre Fittings Pipe 1 U Circuit 02 ie EJS GHX Header Section 02 ittings Pipe 2 Flow Rate
265. luid and the undisturbed ground dominates the overall resistance In 1985 in the ASHRAE Design Data Manual for Ground Coupled Heat Pumps Parker et al outlined a method by which this field resistance or soil resistance could be estimated and applied to determine piping and trench length requirements for a buried pipe system In the case of horizontal pipe systems located near the ground surface the mathematics necessitate the inclusion of mirror image pipes into the calculations These mirror image pipes are located the same distance above the surface as the buried pipes are below it In a multiple pipe system the soil temperature in the vicinity of any single pipe is determined by both the undisturbed earth temperature and by the thermal interference from other pipes in the same and in adjacent trenches Parker Bose and McQuiston 1985 The current Horizontal Module effectively employs a combination of the cylindrical model of Carslaw and Jaeger and the multiple pipe methodology of Parker et al Additionally as in the Borehole Module the equations also include modifications suggested by Kavanaugh and Deerman that adjust the methods of Ingersoll to account for physical arrangement and hourly heat variations Kavanaugh and Deerman 1991 However time step based rates of rejection and extraction also previously were discussed in some depth by Parker et al The two Slinky options available on the Configuration panel
266. lume When a user selects Volume all of the volumes within the selected component types pipe pair and or circuit and pipes pipe 1 and or pipe 2 are displayed Pressure Drop When a user selects Pressure Drop all of the pressure drops within the selected component types pipe pair and or circuit and pipes pipe 1 and or pipe 2 are displayed Total Branch Pressure Drop When a user selects this the program displays pressure drops across entire systems of elements Group Name Group Name Group name is a meta property that applies to all components in a particular component family such as a GHX Module a Manifold etc The group name is used to sort and organize components when viewing results in the Review panel Note that in using this system a user must select at least one component type pipe pair circuit one pipe Pipe I Pipe 2 and one characteristic length size etc before results will be actively displayed Also note that a user has to build a piping system before piping system results can be seen Notice in figure 11 18a which options are selected from the Display button Pipe Pair Circuit Pipe 1 Length and Reynold s Number Next notice that lengths and Reynold s Numbers for the supply side pipe Pipe 1 for both the Pipe Pairs and Circuits and are displayed in figure 11 18b 227 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Review Pipe Pair Circuit Pipel Pipe 2 Size Length
267. ly loads data from Excel or another spreadsheet program and into GLD Premier 2010 Loads data must be in the following format Chillers load kBtu h Boilers load kBtu h 0 0 002 0 09 0 188 0 987 2 38 6 586 193 683 CO O O O O O O0 O In this format one hour of cooling heating data is in each row The three blank rows after the top title row are critical and must be included to ensure import fidelity Save the file as a csv file into the Loads Files Hourly Data Files The csv file can then be imported using the import button 2 Importing Loads Into the Zone Manager Loads Module Importing loads into the Zone Manager is a simpler proposition because the Zone Manager uses only Design Day and annual energy loads data for its calculations at present time Monthly and hourly data sets are not used by the Zone Manager for design work 64 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones Users can import commercial loads programs data by clicking on the Import button found in the Zone Manager loads modules and import Excel files data by using the Import Loads command from the Design Studio Loads menu Importing Design Day Loads From 3rd Party Programs Users can import Design Day and annual energy loads from the Trane Trace program for example one zone at time if desired The user first can select a zone of interest see description of Zone Manager above and then can hit the import
268. m mee IE Pressure Drop ft hd Flow Rate gpm Fig 11 4A Summary View of Circulation Pumps 208 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Circulation Pump Details This section stores information related to each individual circulation pump Pump Name In this section the designer specifies the pump name Linked Component In this section the name of the component in the Layout panel that has the circulation pump associated with it is displayed here If the designers adds a pump directly from the Circulation Pumps tabbed panel and not through the Layout panel the linked component will be left blank Note that most designers find it more efficient to add pumps from within the Layout panel Required Pressure Drop In this section the designer specifies the required pressure drop for the pump Again if the designer adds the circulation pump from the Layout panel the required pressure drop automatically will be transferred from the Layout panel results which store the calculated fluid dynamics results Note that when the designer adds a circulation pump in the Layout panel the details of the pump are stored and updated dynamically in the Circulation Pump panel When the fluid dynamics are updated in the Layout panel the results are dynamically updated in the Circulation Pump panel as well Required Flow Rate In this section the designer specifies the required flow rate for the pump Again if the d
269. module Capacity Power and Flow Rates The capacity power and flow rate information pertaining to the source side flow for both heating and cooling are entered into the two tabbed panels labeled Cooling and Heating in the Pump Edit pane An example of the Cooling panel is shown below in figure 2 4 The Heating panel follows an identical format although the temperatures will be different General g Heating Load Temperatures Load Flows Heat Pump Specifications for Cooling SOURCE FLOW RATE 1 FLOW RATE 2 EWT Capacity Power Capacity Power degF MBtufhr kw MBtu hr kw 77 0 95 0 115 0 Coefficients Capacity Power Flow Factor Calculate Coefficients Fig 2 4 Heat Pump Specifications Cooling 31 CHAPTER 2 Adding Editing Heat Pumps As can be seen from the figure the source entering water temperature EWT is listed to the left and the capacity and power requirement of the unit at different flow rates are listed to the right Once the values are input the coefficients and flow factor can be calculated from the entered data The Calculate Coefficients button turns red when values are changed indicating that new coefficients must be calculated before proceeding Note If data for only one flow rate are available only the first capacity and power requirement data must be included under the section entitled FLOW RATE 1 The data under FLOW RATE 2 can be l
270. module Closing without saving edited data will initiate a dialog box that reminds the user to save the data before closing Heat Pump File Descriptions There are two types of files created by the Edit Add Heat Pumps module The first is the Pumplist gld file which maintains the current master list of manufacturers and the series associated with those manufacturers The 35 CHAPTER 2 Adding Editing Heat Pumps Pumplist gld file also includes the filenames without the hpd extension of the heat pump data files associated with the individual series The second type of file is the hpd heat pump data file for each individual series of pumps This file type keeps track of all the data input by the user as well as the pump names and the coefficients calculated within the module Since hpd files cannot be deleted by the program unless they are accidentally overwritten many difficulties usually can be overcome by just adding new pump sets or if necessary editing the Pumplist gld file directly The format of the Pumplist gld file is given in the Preface page 3 Adding Pump Sets Obtained From External Sources To provide the greatest amount of flexibility to the user GLD allows the user to obtain heat pump data files hpd files from external sources For example a heat pump set may be copied from a fellow designer or even downloaded from a participating heat pump manufacturer s website Since the original Pumplist gld file
271. mong three cooling systems air cooled chillers water cooled chillers and unitary air conditioners Please note that since these systems have different efficiency rating systems the efficiency units change depending on the system selected Power Source Users can select from among electricity natural gas and propane Installed Capacity Here users can enter the cooling system s installed capacity Note that in general the installed capacity for conventional systems exceeds the peak capacity of geothermal systems This is because conventional mechanical equipment is usually significantly oversized compared to the equipment in a well designed geothermal system Efficiency Here users enter the expected overall system efficiency for the selected cooling equipment Note that the measurement units vary depending on 174 CHAPTER 9 The Financial Module the selected system i e kW ton for water cooled chillers and EER for unitary air conditioners Extra Power Here users enter extra power requirements for the system such as circulation pumps etc Installation Area In this section users enter the floor space square footage required by the selected cooling equipment For example if a water cooled chiller is selected and it requires 1000 ft of mechanical room space the user can enter 1000 ft here Water Usage Rate If the selected cooling equipment consumes water the user can enter the water usage rate here Heating I
272. n o The Manifold Vault Builder o The Ultra Manifold Ultra Vault Builder The GHX Module Builder The GHX Module Builder is a powerful tool that automatically builds flow balanced GHX Modules of any size and complexity The GHX Module Builder can be accessed from within the Layout Manager Workspace in the Layout Panel The user can right click the mouse while inside the Layout Manager Workspace to see the menu in figure 11 68 appear 278 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Layout Fluid Automation Circulation Pumps Layout Design and Optimization Calculate E Peak Load Alphabetic Categorized Add New Pipe Pair Add Reverse Return Pipe Pair Add New Circuit Add New Ultra Manifold Add New Manifold Add New GHX Module Pipe and Fitting Manager Copy Selection Paste Selection Delete Fig 11 68 Right Click to Access the GHX Module Builder After the user selects New GHX Module the GHX Module Builder will appear as it does in figure 11 69 279 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module GHXModule and Manifold Group Name Group Name IGHX Module 01 Return Piping Style Return Type Reverse Return Circuit Information Number of Circuits Circuit Separation ft One way Circuit Length ft 300 0 0 0 Circuit Pipe Size SDR11 1 in 25 mm Header Pipe Size SDR11 5 2 in 50 mm 1 Circuits Per Parallel Loop Circuits Per One Way Length
273. n Pipe Pair Add New Circuit Add New Ultra Manifold Add New Manifold Add New GHX Module Pipe and Fitting Manager Copy Selection Paste Selection Delete Fig 11 65 Accessing the Pipe and Fittings Manager for Circuit 2 After doing so the Pipe and Fitting Manager for the selected component a GHX Circuit in this case will open The Manager can be seen in figure 11 66 275 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Pipe Section Name Circuit 02 Pipes Fittings Pipe 1 Pipe Properties Pipe 1 Name Pipe 1 Length ft 2000 Extra Length ft a Size 1in 25mm Type sui e Volume gal 1 26 M Copy Input Values to Return Pipe Fig 11 66 The Pipe Section in the Pipe and Fitting Manager The Pipe and Fitting Manager is divided into two sections In the upper section the user can choose between adjusting Pipes or Fittings properties by clicking on one or the other The lower section has detailed input and options boxes for the selected item pipe or fittings Pipes The pipes section is broken into two identical tabbed panels Pipe 1 and Pipe 2 In the Pipe 1 panel the user can enter the Pipe 1 name length extra length pipe size and pipe type The volume is auto calculated from the pipe geometry and reported as well Beneath the Pipe 1 properties is a option box entitled copy input values to return pipe This option if selected will apply changes made to
274. n the left and right arrows as seen below System a al gt Please note that if a system has not been defined see below power and fuel type information can not be displayed In general a user will select a system system 1 for example and then proceed to define the system in the system details section After defining system one the user can choose to define another system by selecting system two and then entering the relevant information for it The user can repeat the procedure for up to five alternate systems 173 CHAPTER 9 The Financial Module System Details In this section the user can enter details about the system he or she selected system 1 5 in Alternate Systems above Please note that some of the details are locked out For example the equivalent full load hours values cannot be changed by the user Full load hours are entered in the Geothermal tabbed panel and transferred automatically into the conventional panel This is to ensure that the comparison between the geothermal system and the conventional systems is based off of an equal number of full load hours Cooling In this column the user can enter details about the alternate cooling system s Equivalent Full Load Hours These values are transferred from the Geothermal panel and can not be changed by the user If the user wishes to change these values he or she must do so from the Geothermal tabbed panel Equipment Type The user can select from a
275. n this column the user can enter details regarding the alternate heating system s Equivalent Full Load Hours These values are transferred from the Geothermal panel and can not be changed by the user If the user wishes to change these values he or she must do so from the Geothermal tabbed panel Equipment Type The user can select from among four heating systems boilers furnaces air source heat pumps and gas fired heat pumps Please note that since these systems have different efficiency rating systems the efficiency units change depending on the system selected Power Source Users can select from among electricity fuel oil natural gas propane wood coal or biomass biomass excluding wood 175 CHAPTER 9 The Financial Module Installed Capacity Here users can enter the heating system s installed capacity Note that in general the installed capacity for conventional systems exceeds the peak capacity of geothermal systems This is because conventional mechanical equipment is usually significantly oversized compared to the equipment in a well designed geothermal system Efficiency Here users enter the expected overall system efficiency for the selected heating equipment Note that the measurement units vary depending on the selected system i e efficiency for boilers and COPs for air source heat pumps Extra Power Here users enter extra power requirements for the system such as circulation pumps etc In
276. nager Workspace sse 228 Section 3 Flow Type Selection sssesseeeeeeeeeeen 231 Section 4 Properties Window sss 232 Section 5 Circuit Confirmation Calculator esse 234 GLD Piping Language iie cett eite eR vi ere ope e ue rh petet pue bee ere 234 Piping Components ete Rene ie pe Piste ep ETE EDEF PI US 235 Basic GTAIIIAE i eo See a E EEE end e ete O E E EA ae ELE EO On 240 Concept 1 Component Families cesse 240 Concept 2 Component Relationships eee 240 Concept 3 Parallel and Serial Flow Paths cece eee eee eee ee 242 Concept 4 Direct and Reverse Return Headers esses 242 Sample Loopfield Layouts ccc cece cece eee A I m e 252 Building Piping SyStens oos deeds re EE EP sata ERR E PE EO ERE Rev dp opo eode des 262 Manual Methods etes ee oo oor ee e EUR eS Pe re epo Ue eee S ede d 262 Adding Pipe Patrs 4 i ice ti er A M nO Heo etie 203 Adding CIrcults dened crocs ates ette Cem RH ote set mec iie ettet eii A00 Drag and Drop dee eee ertet I tert tegee nens 1200 Copy atid Paste gerettet ee tera reae 207 Hide and Display d inte pee meten rene 269 Deletews2ss deo eh ID eI pn deeem 209 Using the Property Window 0 0 ccc eee ce cece cece eee eeceseetetsensees 288 Using the Pipe Fitting Manager seen 275 Automatic Method
277. ng system For example if a designer cannot use 2 1 2 pipe for whatever reason he or she can navigate to the Automation tab and then click on the Pipe Sizes tab The designer can then de select any pipes he or she he wants to exclude from the auto 302 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module designer s database For example in figure 11 94 pipe sizes 2 1 2 and 3 1 2 have been de selected and therefore will not be used in any of the auto designs Manifold and GHX Module Automation Presets List of Available Pipe Sizes 3 8 1 2 5 8 3 4 4 11 4 13 27 2 21 25 ze 3 1 2 4 5 6 F jos ESI IS S ST IST ST ST IST ST K ST Fig 11 94 Selecting Pipes to Exclude From the Design Optimizer Calculating Results with the GHX Header Design Optimizer The designer may now return to the Layout tab select the Purge Results Type from the dropdown menu and hit the Calculate button again Results from the 8 GHX Circuit GHX Module described in figure 11 87 above are available for view in figure 11 95 below Notice how now the circuits and header sections all have velocities that are at 2 ft s or higher Also notice that the header pipe sizes have changed In the previous example figure xx and before the GHX Header Design Optimizer tool was used all the header pipes were 2 on the supply and return side Now the optimized reverse return headering system has reducing headers that start at GHX He
278. nges on average annual power consumption Finally the system flow rate is listed in its own subsection The system flow rate is calculated from the peak load divided by 12 000 Btu ton and then multiplied by the flow rate in gpm ton chosen on the Fluid panel It represents the flow rate from the installation out to the buried pipe system A The Graphing Module 100 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module Users also can view a range of monthly data results using the new Graphing Module In the expanded user interface a graphing icon button will appear after hitting the Calculate button as seen in figure 4 23 Remember the user can access the expanded user interface by double clicking on any of the tabs Galea ee i Figure 4 23 Monthly Data Graphing Button Yer Users can also access the graphs from the Tools dropdown menu selecting the Graph Data option and then importing the data of set of interest into the Graphing Module Figure 4 24 is a screenshot of the Graphing Module z gt Graph of Results cJ ea a U a MonthlyData 07 20 2010 18 55 57 txt E Graph Data o0 Average EWT Monthly Data ra i Power TBorewall rm 70 4 Average Exit WT v Average EWT Minimum EWT Maximum EWT 5 60 s 2 5 Iv Show Title M Show Legend 50 40 1 1 L L 0 36 72 108 144 180 Time Months I 2 Figure 4 24 The Graphing Module The new
279. ngle year Costs include the energy costs C02 emissions costs water usage costs maintenance costs and mechanical room lease opportunity costs Costs are reported as 0 00 if one or more of the required and user defined variables used in the calculations have not been set For example if the user has selected a natural gas boiler as an alternate heating system but has not specified the maintenance costs for such a system then the maintenance costs will be reported as 0 00 Upon seeing the 0 00 the user can go back to the Other Costs panel input the maintenance costs return to the Results page and then hit Calculate again to recalculate the results NPV Lifecycle Costs The NPV Lifecycle Costs section presents costs associated with running the geothermal system and alternate system over the time frame specified on the Geothermal tab Costs include lifetime energy costs lifetime C0 emissions costs 185 CHAPTER 9 The Financial Module lifetime water usage costs lifetime maintenance costs lifetime mechanical room lease opportunity costs installation costs and salvage value if any at the end of the building lifecycle All of these lifecycle costs are calculated using the inflation and discount rates that the user has specified on the Utilities panel Once again the report will output a value of 0 00 if the user has not input the pricing parameters necessary for performing the calculation Also please note t
280. nnual and NPV lifetime basis for only the geothermal system Detailed Form The Detailed Form finance report is the most detailed finance report It lists the fuel energy usage and costs on an annual and NPV lifetime basis for both geothermal and conventional HVAC systems Concise and Detailed Inputs Forms The Concise Detailed Inputs Forms contain lists of all of the inputs used in the financial analysis 150 CHAPTER 7 Reports Financial Analysis Form The Financial Analysis Form finance report provides a useful financial comparison of the geothermal and one conventional system In addition it provides simple payback summary results Thermal Conductivity Report The Thermal Conductivity report is printed directly from the Thermal Conductivity module The report includes all inputs and calculated results including a number of color graphs Computational Fluid Dynamics Reports Reports related to the CFD module are described in chapter 11 Concluding Remarks There are no data in GLD that are not expressible in a printed form The designer can organize and share information both during the developmental stages of a project and after the design is complete 151 CHAPTER 8 Tables and Reference Files CHAPTER 8 Tables and Reference Files This chapter covers the tables and reference files of GLD It starts with a description of the included files and then explains how the user may add customized files to the existing
281. not through the Layout Manager Workspace then the user must manually delete the circulation pump from the Circulation Pumps panel as well Printing Reports Both a CFD piping report and a circulation pump report can be exported from GLD and into a csv file format for easy review and subsequent use in spreadsheet programs 308 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module The process for doing so is as follows Exporting a Piping Report To export a piping report the user must first complete a design and go to Review mode An example can be seen in figure 11 101 below Layout Design and Optimization Calculate Bl El B Pipe 1 Size Pipe 2 Size i i Pipe 1 Flow Rate Pipe 2 Flow Rate 1 GHX Module Supply Return Runout 2 2 200 0 ft 90 00 qpm 90 00 gpm U Circuit 01 11 37 gpm 11 37 gpm 9 GHX Header Section 01 5 3 78 63 gpm 11 37 gpm U Circuit 02 11 27 gpm 11 27 gpm 9 GHX Header Section 02 67 36 gpm 22 64 gpm U circuit 03 11 20 gpm 11 20 gpm 95 GHX Header Section 03 56 16 gpm 33 84 gpm U Circuit 04 11 16 gpm 11 16 gpm 5 GHX Header Section 04 45 00 gpm 45 00 gpm U Circuit 05 11 16 gpm 11 16 gpm 96 GHX Header Section 05 33 84 gpm 56 16 gpm U Circuit 06 11 20 gpm 11 20 gpm 36 GHX Header Section 06 22 64 gpm 67 36 gpm U Circuit 07 11 27 gpm 11 27 gpm 96 GHX Header Section 07 11 37 gpm 78 63 gpm U circuit 08 11 37 gpm 11 37 gpm Fig 11 101 Preparing to Export a Design The user must firs
282. nother four circuit two GHX circuits per bore GHX Module The two circuits per bore or double U tubes according to some nomenclature are in series Layout Design and Optimization Calculate E E m GHX Module Supply Return Runout A A U Circuit 01 U Circuit 02 GHX Header Section B B 5 U Circuit 03 P Circuit 04 Fig 11 44 Basic Direct Return Loopfield Layout 4 in Layout Manager Workspace Can you find the parallel flow paths in figure 11 44 Remember parallel flow paths are vertically stacked The following paths are in parallel e Circuit 1 and supply pipe B of the GHX Header Section BB are in parallel as they both come out of supply pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA Circuit 1 and supply pipe B of the GHX Header Section BB are vertically stacked are siblings and share the parent supply pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA Can you find the serial flow paths in figure 11 44 Remember serial flow paths are stacked with indentation The following paths are in series e Supply pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA Circuit 1 Circuit 2 e Supply pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA supply pipe B of the GHX Header Section BB Circuit 3 Circuit 4 BASIC REVERSE RETURN LOOPFIELD LAYOUT 1 Reverse return systems and how they are modeled in the CFD Module were introduced before Key features are presented again here as a review Rev
283. nter calibration data The calibration process does not have to be complex To collect these data a user can monitor the pressure drop for three flow rates a flow rate can be determined with a stop watch and a bucket of defined volume After these data are collected the user can select Other under the TC Unit Model Name enter the pressure 192 CHAPTER 10 The Thermal Conductivity Module drop flow rate data and hit the Calculate Coefficients button Hit the save button to store the data for the current analysis Calibration data are stored in the following file Main Drive Program Files GLD2010 ThermalConductivity ModelCoefficients txt In GLD 2010 the Thermal Conductivity automatically determines flow rates for units that have flow meters rather than pressure sensors For those units with flow meters the flow calibration process does not apply ET The onductivity Calculation Project E Project File None ala a Import Data File None Results Bore TC Unit Model Name GeoCube Standard Flow Pressure Coefficients a 12 632 b 645 C 0 013 Pressure Drop Flow Rate Ib in 2 gpm 20 Fig 10 3 Flow Panel Contents Bore Input parameters related to the test borehole are located in the Bore panel as shown in figure 10 4 While the bore length and ground temperature are integral to the calculation all other parameters are for reference only and are included in the rep
284. nto a body of water acts as the heat exchange medium All three modules utilize the same loads module formalism and are linked to loads modules using the Studio Link system All three modules also include an expanded user interface function as can be seen in figure 1 2 By double clicking on any of the tabbed panels Results Fluid Soil U Tube etc an expanded calculation view appears which enables the designer both to see the calculated results immediately after any parameter has been modified and also to access the parameters that are most commonly adjusted during the design optimization process 13 CHAPTER 1 GLD Overview Ri Borehole Design Project GLDv5 Lengths Temperatures z COOLING HEATING COOLING HEATING acm Total Length ft 42240 7 43551 7 Unit Inlet F 85 0 50 0 Ru Borehole Design Project GLDv5 Borehole Length Ft 234 7 242 0 Unit Outlet F 95 2 43 7 Results ria l Soil U Tube Pattern Extra kw Information Results ria Soil U Tube Patter Extra kW Information ED COOLING HEATING Calculate COOLING HEATING Total Length ft 42240 7 43551 7 Monthly Data Total Lenath ft 42240 7 435517 ER dro D Eum Prediction Time 10 0 years Borehole Number 180 180 B T i Borehole Length ft 234 7 242 0 Ground Temperature Change F 0 4 0 4 DOSQUTAEHrO Ground Temperature Change F 0 4 0 4 Unit Inlet F 85 0 50 0 Fixed Temperature i of ae iam Unit Inlet F 850 50
285. nto the active Average Block Loads module At present time GLD can accept hourly data files from the IES lt VE gt and Trane Trace software products as well as from CSV files If a user wishes to see GLD integrated with other 3rd party simulation tools please contact GLD support As mentioned previously when an hourly data file is imported into the Average Block Loads module the Hourly Data checkbox will be checked as can be seen in figure 3 19 below indicating that the loads data in the Average Block Loads module is powered by an hourly data set Design Day Loads 7 0 Days Week Hourly Data Fig 3 19 Hourly Data Check Box Because the hourly data set is so extensive it is not possible to review the data set hour by hour from within GLD However it is possible to view the hourly data organized into a monthly data format by hitting the Monthly Loads button on the Average Block Loads module after importing the hourly data This can be seen in figure 3 15 Note that when viewing the hourly data in the Monthly Data framework the Update button is deactivated indicating that the hourly data can not be modified from within the GLD framework If the designer wishes to modify the hourly loads data set the designer must do so from within his or her energy simulation program Importing Monthly and Hourly Loads From Excel and Spreadsheets Monthly Loads Data There are three ways to import monthly loads data from Excel or another spreads
286. nto the text boxes as needed Note By pressing the Check Pipe Tables button the Pipe Properties tables will open If the user wants to enter an experimentally determined pipe resistance or requires more precise calculations he or she can enter these values directly into the Pipe Resistance text box overriding all pipe resistance calculations The user also selects the U tube configuration and radial pipe placement for the designed installation A single U tube refers to two pipes placed in the bore while a double U tube refers to four pipes placed in the bore The radial pipe placement can be one of the following Close together 1 8 average distance between the pipes Average pipes are centered at a point halfway between the wall and the center of the bore e Along outer wall pipes are against the outer wall Illustrations are included to clarify the choices Note The Double U tube configuration at this stage is added more for reference than for practical use Currently the values GLD uses are based on experimental data and a new theoretical model accounting for a lower pipe and convective resistance and a larger displacement of the grout Designers should be aware of this fact and remember that a single U tube is the standard option Borehole Diameter and Backfill Grout Information The user can enter the borehole diameter and the grout thermal conductivity directly into their respective
287. o be determined independently by the designer Note once again that changes in the inlet source temperature or the system flow rate will cause an automatic update of the selected pumps Fixed Temperature Inlet Temperatures 55 0 9E 36 0 bs Fig 6 8 Inlet Temperature Controls in Expanded User Interface Results There are several significant differences between the Surface Water Design module s Results panel and the Borehole Design module s Results panel These differences relate to the nature of the calculations as well as to the inclusion of the head loss calculation results Figure 6 9 shows a typical view of the Results panel Figure 6 10 shows the results display in the expanded user interface Figure 6 11 shows the Calculate button in the expanded user interface Again there are two lists shown on the Results panel one for heating and one for cooling Although all of the numbers resulting from both sets of calculations are valid the side with the longer length is printed in bold type so that it stands out The longer length usually determines the installation size and for this reason the 142 CHAPTER 6 The Surface Water Design Module shorter length system results lose relevance However in cases where the cooling and heating lengths are similar care must be taken to assure the safest design Fj Surface Water Design Project SurfaceWaterSample Results Fluid Soil Piping Surface Water
288. o not necessarily need to know further details about the design Loads List The Loads List lists only the loads associated with each zone It provides the Design Day loads at the different periods during the day in both heating and cooling modes For the Borehole Design module the Loads report includes the annual hours and weekly occupation information 149 CHAPTER 7 Reports Names List The Names List is just a list of the full reference names of the different zones combined with the zone number pump name and number of pumps required for the zone It makes a convenient compact link between zone name and number and is especially useful when the project consists of many separate zones Finance Reports Finance reports are printed directly from the Finance module They include the project information and financial data presented in different formats Four different finance reports exist A finance report is printed directly from the Finance module by clicking the printer button in the controls A dialog window appears giving the designer the list of available report styles After the making a choice click OK to bring up the report window There are five different zone reports included with GLD Concise Form Detailed Form Concise Inputs Form Detailed Inputs Form Financial Analysis Form Concise Form The Concise Form finance report is the simplest finance report It lists the fuel energy usage and costs on an a
289. o sections On the top is the reporting section which presents the calculation results The lower Optional Cooling Tower Boiler section is included to assist in the sizing of a cooling tower and or boiler This is a convenient tool for hybrid type designs which may be desirable when the cooling length exceeds that of heating or when the heating length exceeds that of cooling The cooling tower and boiler options are discussed in more detail below Design Day Results Results Subsections Fixed Temperature Mode In fixed temperature mode where the designer selects target EWTs and the program calculates borehole depths the reporting section is separated into five subsections A sample screen for fixed temperature design day results can be seen in figure 4 17 The two lists on the Results panel are for heating and cooling Although all of the numbers shown are valid and respond to changes the side with the longer required length is printed in bold type so that it stands out The non dominant side heat exchanger results are grayed out because in the actual installation heating and cooling installed lengths are identical In the results in fixed temperature mode non dominant side results are short looped compared to the actual installation are not applicable to the actual installation and therefore lose 92 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module relevance For example in figure 4 17 the heating side borehole length is listed at
290. of a component family is a GHX Module Because the details of each piece in a component family are well understood complex systems consisting of numerous nested component families can be analyzed effortlessly by the CFD module algorithms The term nested is used because of how the component families are displayed in the Layout Manager Workspace they appear nested This will become clear shortly CONCEPT TWO Parent Child and Sibling Component Relationships Parent Child and Sibling Definitions are as follows note that a single component can fulfill multiple roles Parent a component that has one or more directly connected downstream components All components except the last component in a flow path play the role of parent component Child component that has a directly connected upstream parent component Most child components except the last one in a flow path play the role of parent as well to one or more downstream components Fluid flow from parent to child is in series Sibling a component that along with one or more other components shares the same parent Fluid flow from parent to two or more siblings is in parallel 240 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module This parent child sibling nomenclature can be explained through the below figures Figure 28 is a schematic drawing of a direct return three GHX Circuit GHX Module Figure 29 is a screenshot of the same design in the Layout Mana
291. of entering and modifying pipe information The Properties Window provides the most detail but 233 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module it also offers the slowest entry method Other faster entry methods are described below Section Five The Circuit Confirmation Calculator The fifth section is the Circuit Confirmation Calculator panel When a designer is designing a larger commercial system the Circuit Confirmation Calculator keeps track of both the number of GHX Circuits and the total length of circuit pipe The Circuit Confirmation Calculator by default is hidden To view the Calculator a user can push the following button which can be found in the bottom right corner of the Layout Panel When a user hits the above button the Circuit Confirmation Calculator will appear at the top of the Layout panel as can be seen in figure 11 25 Layout Design and Optimization Required Included Difference Total Circuit Length ft 0 0 0 0 0 0 Total Circuit Number 0 0 0 Fig 11 25 The Circuit Confirmation Calculator is Visible The user can enter the total circuit length and total circuit number required at the start of a design and the Calculator will count down towards O as the user adds circuits This calculator ensures that a designer does not have too many or too few circuits and that the total calculated circuit length equals the total expected circuit length The GLD Piping Language Now that the primary c
292. of the supply side pipes in the piping system design for both pipe pairs and GHX Circuits are enabled to display the selected fluid dynamics results Pipe 2 When a user selects Pipe 2 all of the return side pipes in the piping system design for both pipe pairs and GHX Circuits are enabled to display the selected fluid dynamics results Note that the CFD modules uses the notation to indicate return side flow Length Size Flow Rate Velocity Reynold s Number Volume and Pressure Drop Size When a user selects Size all of the pipe diameters for the selected component types pipe pair and or circuit and pipes pipe 1 and or pipe 2 are displayed 226 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Length When a user selects Length all of the pipe lengths for the selected component types pipe pair and or circuit and pipes pipe 1 and or pipe 2 are displayed Flow Rate When a user selects Flow Rate all of the flow rates within the selected component types pipe pair and or circuit and pipes pipe 1 and or pipe 2 are displayed Velocity When a user selects Velocity all of the velocities within the selected component types pipe pair and or circuit and pipes pipe 1 and or pipe 2 are displayed Reynold s Number When a user selects Reynold s Number all of the Reynold s Numbers within the selected component types pipe pair and or circuit and pipes pipe 1 and or pipe 2 are displayed Vo
293. oftware calculates results such as the energy consumed by the selected systems the C0 emitted from the systems the water consumed by the systems if any etc The input information is organized into six panels as shown in figure 1 6 Results Geothermal Conventional Utilities Other Costs Incentives Fig 1 6 Lifecycle Costing and CO Panel List Using these six panels Results Geothermal Conventional Utilities Other Costs and Incentives the user can enter describe and compare project specific financial and emissions estimates 20 CHAPTER 1 GLD Overview A more complete description of this module can be found in Chapter 9 Thermal Conductivity Module The Thermal Conductivity module enables designers to quickly analyze thermal conductivity test data from the GeoCube a product from Precision Geothermal LLC as well as from other test units Outputs from this analysis include formation thermal conductivity diffusivity and borehole thermal resistance See Chapter 10 for a full description of the Thermal Conductivity module Additional Modules GLD s Design Studio has the potential for additional modules that may be included in later versions These modules would also be able to take advantage of the Design Studio s heat pump and loads models Reports GLD s reporting features allow the designer to make hardcopies of both the data entered and the resulting calculations These reports are design records and
294. oiler options are discussed in more detail below Reporting Section The reporting section is further separated into several subsections The first deals with the trenches including the total length the number of trenches and the length for one trench A common way to adjust the trench length to a desired value is to change the trench number on the Configuration panel The associated pipe length both total and for a single trench directly follow the reported trench lengths The pipe lengths are a function of the selected configuration of pipe in the trench so the length of trench is always less than the length of pipe when anything other than a single pipe configuration is chosen The following subsection of the report lists the heat pump inlet and outlet temperatures of the circulating fluid The next subsection lists the total unit capacity the peak loads and demand of all the equipment and the calculated heat pump and system efficiencies The peak load is the maximum and is determined from whichever time period across all the zones has the highest load The peak demand includes all pumps and external energy requirements including those listed in the Extra kW panel Finally the system flow rate is listed in its own subsection The system flow rate is calculated from the peak load divided by 12 000 Btu ton and then multiplied by the flow rate in gpm ton chosen on the Fluid panel It represents the flow rate from the in
295. omponent families and partial nested component families can be copied and pasted as well This is very convenient if a designer spends some time building for example a GHX Module with 10 GHX Circuits and wants to have several of these GHX Modules After the designer finishes one all he or she has to do is select the component at the top of the GHX Module the top parent component and then copy and paste The entire GHX Module will be instantly replicated Hiding and Displaying Nested Component Families Nested component families consist of two or more components that are in parent child relationships Figure 11 57 is an example of a nested component family The nested components combine to form one GHX Module made up of 8 GHX Circuits seven GHX Header sections and one GHX Module Supply Return Runout As can be seen through the GHX Module there are a number of boxes with minus signs The user can click on any of these boxes to hide all the components that are children of the selected box When a user closes the top box in a nested component family the entire family is hidden This can be seen in figure 11 58 This option to hide and display components and nested component families can be useful when a designer is working with a large system and wishes to focus on one area of the system without distraction 269 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Layout Design and Optimization Calculate Al cum 4GHX Modu
296. omponents of the CFD module as well as the user interface have been introduced it is possible to begin understanding the GLD piping language The GLD piping language consists of two fundamental components and a grammar that describes how the components interact This section describes the fundamental components and explains via several practical examples how to use the visual piping grammar to model piping systems including direct and reverse return systems Please note that while the below description is quite detailed it is not necessary to remember everything because the CFD module automatically handles nearly all of these features and functions However having a basic understanding of the system will give a designer the power to modify and adjust his or her systems quickly and effortlessly 234 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Piping Components As mentioned previously two components power the entire CFD module They are aGHX Circuit with at least three fittings inlet end outlet a Supply Return Pipe Pair with at least two fittings one supply side fitting generally before the supply side pipe and one return side fitting generally after the return side pipe y The GHX Circuit An individual GHX Circuit consists of the following five subcomponents A Fitting for attachment to parent header pipe optional A Supply side pipe Agu End fitting that connects Pipe A and Pipe A optional A Retu
297. on pump house or equivalent One Way Length Here the user enters the one way length of the supply pipe The return pipe will default to the same length Pipe Size Here the user enters the Supply Return Runout pipe size Both the Supply and Return Runout will be the same size but they can be adjusted independently if necessary an explanation of how to do this comes later Ultra Manifold Details related to an individual Ultra Manifold can be seen in the Ultra Manifold tabbed panel in figure 11 9 Note that in the CFD module an Ultra Manifold is defined as a Manifold or a Vault that is connected to other child Manifolds Vaults Ultra Manifolds are only applicable for use in the largest of commercial projects that require nested levels of Vaults Manifolds 215 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Manifold and GHX Module Automation Presets GHX Module Manifold Pipe Sizes Return Piping Style Return Type Direct Return Section Outlet Information Section Outlet Number 5 Extr a Section Outlet Separation ft 6 0 0 0 Section Outlet Pipe Size SDR11 3 in 80 mm Supply Return Runout Information Extra One Way Length ft 200 0 0 0 Pipe Size SDR11 4 in 100 mm Fig 11 9 Ultra Manifold Information Panel Contents Return Piping Style This section stores information related to direct and reverse return systems Return Type Return type is locked at direct
298. onductivity 1 30 Btu h ft deg F Soil Rock Specific Heat Dry 0 230 Btu deg F lbm Soil Rock Density Dry 120 0 bjft 3 Moisture 0 20 20 0 Close Fig 5 8 Diffusivity Calculator Ground Temperature Corrections at Given Depth In a horizontal configuration the ground temperature around buried pipes can vary significantly simply due to the proximity to the surface To account for this variation at different depths the regional Swing temperature and phase shift are used in a sinusoidal equation The program determines the depth of each pipe in the chosen configuration and then calculates the expected temperature at that depth Regional Air Temperature Swing This is the temperature swing for the location of interest It is a measure of the average temperature variation of the region during the warmest and 121 CHAPTER 5 The Horizontal Design Module coolest months as compared to the yearly average temperature Regions with temperate climates have a lower temperature swing than regions that have large differences between summer and winter temperatures Coldest Warmest Day in Year These are the actual days of the year on a 365 day scale when the temperature is usually coldest or warmest For example if February 3 is approximately the coldest day of the year the value entered will be 34 31 days in January plus 3 days of February Fluid The circulating fluid parameters may be
299. opy and paste pipe pairs and circuits Hide and display nested component families Delete pipe pairs and circuits Modify parameters with the Properties Window Modify parameters with the Pipe and Fitting Manager Each of these will be explored in detail below Adding a New Pipe Pair Adding a new pipe pair is typically the first step a designer will take when manually designing a system He or she can do so from the Layout Panel On the panel the user can move the mouse into the Layout Manager Workspace see figure 11 16 and then right click to bring up window as see in figure 11 47 Note that the reverse return pipe pair option is inaccessible at this preliminary design stage Manually building a reverse return flow system requires that a standard pipe pair act as a parent to the first reverse return pipe pair Reverse return systems are described in some detail above 263 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Required Total Circuit Length ft 00 Total Circuit Number 0 Cekuate B 0 Peak Load Alphabetic Categorized Add New Pipe Pair Add New Circuit Add New GHX Module Add New Manifold Add New Ultra Manifold Manage Fig 11 47 Manually Adding a Pipe Pair The user can select Add New Pipe Pair and then a pipe pair will appear at the top of the Layout Manager Workspace as can be seen in figure 11 48 264 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Layout Flui
300. ort Users must enter the appropriate bore length to ensure accurate results 193 CHAPTER 10 The Thermal Conductivity Module In Automatic Estimator Mode The program automatically estimates the undisturbed ground temperature from the in situ data set as it is imported When Automatic Estimator Mode is not selected the user must manually enter the undisturbed ground temperature It is recommended that users manually determine the undisturbed ground temperature usual industry accepted standards Note that the undisturbed ground temperature impacts the Borehole Thermal Resistance BTR calculations Therefore for those designers wishing to use the BTR in a design it becomes critical to have an accurate undisturbed ground temperature Thermal Conductivity Calculation Project E Project File None LIE Import Data File None Results Bore Flow Diffusivity Information Borehole Length Undisturbed Ground Temperature Details Reference Only Borehole Diameter T in Pipe Size 1 in 25 mm X Grout Thermal Conductivity 1 00 Btu h ft F Drilling Method Standard Drilling Time 5 0 hr Fig 10 4 Bore Panel Contents Results All of the results for the conductivity analysis can be viewed at any time on the Results panel and in the Graphing Module After all data have been entered or any changes have been made the user can calculate interim or final results using the Calculate button Each
301. ot peg eg e eU nbde esee et pes 205 Saving ProJects z reper al esse er e E D oed ipse Ra rei GE Se pec ed n SR p eden 205 Typical Op ration 2 deme tree Ure et rose e Or HUE P de qe o Eds 205 Entering Data into the Tabbed Panels sss 206 Vil CONTENTS Circulation Pump six iiic a Re RR IPTE S EARETE TREE UR 206 Managing Circulation Pumps 207 New and Copy tee tte dette tte tete 207 Remove and Clear onte t tret 207 R numb er 42e tee e aee otio tre 207 Summary View Toggle iicn nres eeni 207 Circulation Pump Details sese aa is 209 AULOMAN EE 210 GHX Module ir dieere P eet EH e etn 211 Return Pipe Styles eese ee He e ern 211 Circuit NIO ae dee e Er e IR ge dare 211 Header Into 2 oae neri 212 Supply Return Info sss 213 Mamtold 4 etae eia asin seus ardet dete 213 Return Pipe Style tii nsec eb Saou 214 Section Outlet Info eese 215 Supply Return Info sese 215 Ultra Manifold e erae ee ERO UR 215 Return Pipe Style i iere vere ER RR ES 216 Section Outlet Info essent 216 Supply Return Info sese 217 Fluid Unt HC 219 Solution Properties ee cert e eSI Rete 222 LOY OUT ii istum Gules beanies P E es ee ea RR gage ey Roe eroe Deseo a esi seu AD Section 1 Calculate and Results Display Buttons 224 Section 2 Layout Ma
302. ot to vary as much as the C0 emissions associated with electrical power generation the program uses standard C02 emissions coefficients for these other fuel types These emissions coefficients are from the 2006 IPCC Guidelines for National Greenhouse Gas Inventories Volume 2 The C02 emissions cost enables GLD to put a price tag on the CO emitted from a range of HVAC systems While at present time many consider this a soft cost soon it may be a hard cost that influences investment decisions As a result it is especially important to consider the CO emissions costs over a project s lifetime While emissions costs estimates vary within the range of 5 USD ton to 80 USD ton it is likely that the cost will hover somewhere around 30 USD ton in the future The effective initiation delay is included because while at present time there are few enforced CO emissions regimes eventually C05 emissions will have a financial cost associated with them This delay allows designers to estimate the lifetime C0 emissions costs starting at a point in the future that is defined by the effective initiation delay For example if the designer anticipates that 5 years from now the C0 emissions from the HVAC system will be taxed the designer can enter 5 into this box When the program performs the Lifetime NPV costs of the system it will begin including C0 emissions costs starting at year five The effective initiation delay enables designers to ma
303. ound Temperature Corrections at Given Depth s 121 Regional Air Temperature Swing eese 121 Coldest Warmest Day in Year essen 122 Eluld ue ERE eve pdutgesve ue Ae I a eee tenen 122 Design Heat Pump Inlet Fluid Temperatures eseeseeesse 122 Design System Flow Rate cesssseeseee 122 Solution Properties uir E HET Qux eerte PESE TER reet yas 123 DIA D ET 124 Reporting Secon wick ise ee b tex ree ee G 126 Optional Cooling Tower and Boiler cece eee ce eee ee eee e ee en es 126 Printing Repotts i iere er eee feet as he a a me ie IER ud 129 iv CONTENTS Chapter 6 The Surface Water Design Module 130 cuu P EET 130 General Peatures eo ecco cette ee e supe eee Ede er Aeg e ree er ede 130 Opening Projects oreet ERE EMI EUER NIS x Oe AA IE Des 131 NEW Ptojects e ERIS IINE PENIS 132 Existing Projects c eoiese des obs nates EEUU aT e RO RUE ges 132 Saving PLOJSCIS 234 nesses tues sore taki od De REIR IU Bien ude RES SERE E ese 132 Typical Operation 2 25 iot ESSERI E ESI PO eite i Ie exon 132 Before You Begin i e iei eI OR IRE 133 Entering Data into the Tabbed Panels c sss 133 Surface Waters ie et E RU SUPR mee ir dessin ERE 133 Surface Water Temperatures at Average Circuit Pipe Depth 134 Surface Water Temperatures at Average Header Pipe Depth 134 Prima
304. ourth subsection lists the total unit capacity the peak loads and demand of all the equipment and the calculated heat pump and system efficiencies The peak load is the maximum and is determined from whichever time period across all the zones has the highest load The peak demand includes all pumps and external energy requirements including those listed in the Extra kW panel 95 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module Finally the system flow rate is listed in its own subsection The system flow rate is calculated from the peak load divided by 12 000 Btu ton and then multiplied by the flow rate in gpm ton chosen on the Fluid panel It represents the flow rate from the installation out to the buried pipe system Calculation results for lengths and temperatures are always available in the expanded user interface as seen in figure 4 18 above Calculations can be performed at any time in the expanded user interface as well Optional Cooling Tower Fluid Cooler and Boiler Section Cooling towers and boilers can be added to designs via the sliders that are located on both the Results panel figure 4 17 and in the expanded interface as seen in figure 4 20 The Cooling Towers and Boilers can be run independently or together in order to balance required lengths or temperatures D o D 9 5 Load Balance Fig 4 20 Cooling Tower and Boiler Controls in Expanded User Interface Cooling Towers Although typically not recomm
305. ovide the flow characteristics essential for efficient heat transfer all while minimizing pumping and operational costs Up until now piping optimization has been a time consuming difficult and iterative process The present state of the art for geothermal piping design is based on homegrown spreadsheets rule of thumb estimates and piping specification sheets Indeed a mid sized commercial design could easily take an experienced designer a half day or more to try to optimize Modeling reverse return systems with any accuracy is particularly difficult when using spreadsheets and hand calculations 200 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module The new Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD module in GLD 2010 Premier changes all this The CFD module provides designers and engineers with a level of design control and power that until now has not existed in our collective toolbox This module specialized in designing the loopfield piping systems The module can be used in conjunction with other piping software solutions that specialize in building internal piping systems The patent pending CFD module utilizes a new and easy to learn visual drag and drop language for describing any possible loopfield configuration including direct and reverse return ground heat exchangers supply and return runouts manifolds vaults the fittings that connect everything together and circulation pumps The user has the ability to define each and every pa
306. oxes become inactive If GLD is unable to read the grid file for example if the formatting is incorrect then GLD will revert to the standard rectangular grid rows across and rows down Click the Show button to review the selected grid file at any time When a gridfile is selected it is indicated in the expanded user interface as seen in figure 4 8 Use External File Borehole Number 16 Filename GridData txt Fig 4 8 Use of External File Indicated in Expanded User Interface 81 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module Sei G Function Calculator The G Function Calculator is a built in function that generates a g function on demand for any loopfield configuration These g functions enable GLD to perform advanced monthly and hourly simulations Sei Export to AutoCAD New in GLD 2010 is the ability to export a loopfield design to AutoCAD To export to AutoCAD the designer must be using an external grid file If the designer is designing a non rectangular loopfield then all the user has to do is the following e Confirm that the grid file is selected e Navigate to the File dropdown menu at the top of GLD e Choose the Export File option and export the AutoCAD file of choice e GLD will export an scr file into the GLD2010 CAD Files folder that can be read into AutoCAD If the designer is designing a loopfield using the rows across and rows down input boxes and not using a grid file the user must first input t
307. panded user interface as well Lengths Temperatures COOLING HEATING COOLING HEATING Total Lenath ft 15197 0 6348 2 Unit Inlet F 90 0 35 0 Borehole Lenath ft 253 3 105 8 Unit Outlet F 100 1 29 2 Fig 4 18 Calculation Results in Expanded User Interface Results Subsections Fixed Length Mode In fixed length mode where the designer selects the target borehole depth and the program calculates EWTs and pump performance the reporting section also is separated into five subsections A sample screen for fixed temperature design day results can be seen in figure 4 19 The two lists on the Results panel are for heating and cooling In fixed length mode both heating and cooling results are printed in bold type so that they stand out This is different from fixed temperature model above The reason is that in fixed length mode performance calculations for both the dominant and non dominant sides are based on the actual designer selected length of the heat exchanger Results for both sides are therefore relevant The first subsection deals with the bores including the total length the borehole number and the borehole length for one bore A common way to adjust the borehole length to a desired value is to change the borehole number or pattern on the Pattern panel The second subsection presents the predicted long term ground temperature change with respect to the average ground temperature of the installation Both 94
308. panel A sample input screen is shown in figure 4 15 Note that automatic fluid data entry mode is available as an option in this version of GLD Design Heat Pump Inlet Fluid Temperatures The heat pump inlet fluid temperatures are included in the Fluid panel The designer can input the desired inlet source temperatures for both heating and cooling here When changes are made to these values the heat pumps in all zones are updated automatically Since the new calculated equipment capacities can lead to changes in selected equipment the designer must be aware of the changes Customized pump values must be manually adjusted The inlet fluid temperatures also can be viewed and modified in the expanded user interface as seen in figure 4 9 above Note inlet temperatures can only be modified in fixed temperature mode Design System Flow Rate The system flow rate per installed ton is included on the Fluid panel This is the system flow rate per ton of peak load not installed capacity This is because it is assumed that all units will not be running at full load simultaneously even in the peak load condition The impact of installed capacity flow rates and purging flow rates on system performance can be explored in the new CFD module 89 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module mi Borehole Design Project verticalsampleformanual Results Fluid sail U Tube Pattern Extra kw Information Design Heat Pump Inlet Fluid Temperatures
309. peak load as defined in the loads module Once the required cooling tower capacity is determined the designer can further modify the various cooling tower parameters to match them to his or her own system The standard equation used in the program Francis 1997 is Condenser Capacity Btu hr Flow Rate gpm x 500 x Temperature Difference F where the 500 is used for pure water and represents a factor derived from Specific Heat of Water 1 0 x 60 min hr x Density 8 33 Ilb gal 500 97 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module Note that GLD actually calculates this factor from the input fluid properties on the Fluids panel although pure water is a logical choice for most cooling dominated applications For example if the cooling range is increased above the initial minimum value the capacity of the condenser also is increased reducing the total number of operating hours However in the same case decreasing the required flow rate is another option which would keep the condenser capacity and operating hours unchanged The only limitations are the required temperature difference and the minimum condenser capacity needed to meet the chosen design length With GLD users have the flexibility to choose the parameters that fit best in their designs Boilers In GLD boilers are similar to cooling towers except that they are added in order to reduce the overall heating load on the system In this case the user may actuall
310. play controls which are explained in great detail later in this chapter For now they are included for illustrative purposes Note that there are seven GHX Header Sections for 8 GHX circuits which are not displayed Figure 11 32 clearly shows that the supply side Pipe 1 and return side Pipe 2 pipes reduce symmetrically from GHX Header Section 1 all the way down to GHX Header Section 7 2 pipe reduces to 1 1 2 pipe which reduces to 1 1 4 pipe and finally down to 1 pipe on the GHX Header sections Pipe 1 Size Pipe 2 Size I GHX Module Supply Return Runout GHX Module 01 2 GHX Header Section 01 GHX Module 01 9 GHX Header Section 02 GHX Module 01 2 GHX Header Section 03 GHX Module 01 2 GHX Header Section 04 GHX Module 01 2 GHX Header Section 05 GHX Module 01 1 1 2 GHX Header Section 06 GHX Module 01 1 1 4 GHX Header Section 07 GHX Module 01 I Fig 11 32 Optimized Direct Return Reducing Headers System Pipe 1 Size Pipe 2 Size Pipe 1 Reynold s Number Pipe 2 Reynold s Number VW circuit 01 GHX Module 01 5801 5801 U Circuit 02 GHX Module 01 1 1 5486 U Circuit 03 GHX Module 01 1 1 5246 U Circuit 04 GHX Module 01 1 1 5072 U Circuit 05 GHX Module 01 1 P 4956 U Circuit 06 GHX Module 01 1 1 4756 U Circuit 07 GHX Module 01 1 1 4570 U Circuit 08 GHX Module 01 1 i 4403 Fig 11 33 Imbalanced Reynolds Numbers in an Optimized Direct Return Reducing
311. ps are located in the ceilings above the classrooms the user might leave this value at 0 Conversely if the geothermal equipment is located in a small closet in each classroom the designer could multiply the square footage of each closet by the number of closets in the school to calculate a cumulative value for entry in this text box 181 CHAPTER 9 The Financial Module Hybrid Component Tab Cooling In this column the user can enter details about the hybrid component of the geothermal cooling system s Equivalent Full Load Hours The user can enter the equivalent full load hours here if the user has not imported the data automatically from a heat exchanger project design Note that by default the equivalent full load hours value in the hybrid panel matches the full load hours in the geothermal panel If the user changes the value in the geothermal tabbed panel the value in the hybrid component panel changes as well The user does have the option though of changing this value in the hybrid tab so that it does not match the value in the geothermal tabbed panel Hybrid Type At present time the user has the option of selecting a cooling tower Fuel Type Electricity is the only option for the cooling tower at this time Hybrid System Capacity Here the user can enter the installed capacity of the hybrid system This value automatically is entered when the user imports a heat exchanger design project that has a hybrid compon
312. pump inlet temperatures In order to provide an optimum design and prevent system failure the combination of parameters must allow for proper extraction or dissipation of energy from or to the earth at the location of interest For the first model the most complete description of the calculations and input data can be found in Chapter 3 of the book Ground Source Heat Pumps Design of Geothermal Systems for Commercial and Institutional Buildings by S P Kavanaugh and K Rafferty 1997 In extensive tests this model consistently proved to be the most accurate when compared with calibrated data from actual installations Hughes and Shonder 1998 The second model within the Borehole Design module is based on the solution to the purely heat conductive problem in a homogenous medium which was solved by approximating the borehole as a finite line sink Eskilson 1987 The steady state solution relates to the case where heat is extracted continuously from the borehole without ever exhausting the heat source making it a fully renewable source of energy As implemented in GLD the difference between the second model and the first is that with the second model it is possible to when a constant heat extraction rate Q is extracted from the borehole It makes use of a dimensionless G function concept to model the temperature variations taking into account the ratio of the borehole radius and length and the physical layout of the bore field B
313. r for simplification average peak loads for the design day or the day of heaviest usage in the year for both cooling heat gains and heating heat losses modes of operation can be input for up to four separate times of the day These include morning 8 a m to 12 noon afternoon 12 noon to 4 p m evening 4 p m to 8 p m and night 8 p m to 8 a m This method of input not only provides the total load but also identifies when the equipment will be in use for the heat exchanger calculations m Design Day Loads Design Day Loads Days Occupied Time of Day Heat Gains Heat Losses per Week MBtu Hr MBtu Hr 5 0 8 a m Noon Transfer paccm 4 p m 8 p m Calculate Hours 8 p m 8 a m l Annual Equivalent Full Load Hours 1050 220 Fig 3 4 Sample Loads Input Data If only one peak value during the day is provided to the designer it can be entered into one or several of the time slots depending on how the loads will be expected to change during the course of a day Slightly reduced values can be added for off peak hours if the building still will be in operation but not at full load Insignificant time slots can be left at zero Note If only one peak load value is provided per zone the designer will need to be consistent in placing it in the same time slot for every zone This is because the software loops through all of the zones to determine which time of day has the highest loading requirements pr
314. r the Program Between Computers 6 Macintosh Computers iernii areia eaen ae eee 6 Chapter 1 Ground Loop Design Overview 7 General Program Features seisoon citroner oninini renin dae aaa e meme N ES 7 New in Premier Financial 2010 Edition eee 7 The Design Studio 1 2 9 9 det d tere one FIDE REESE SS 8 CU StoTmilzatiOn 42x ado ooi eatis ete E ect ten ec eite i ess red eee eee e ERE ox Custom LE0908 o rdg oem Eleg E te Ree En ete OO Metric Enghshi Units z etait eet ORE Sae edad eee inta 10 InternationaliZation 53 4e eter p ERR HD VI RR SHE URS cewek PEE 10 Heat Pump and Zone Loads Models Introduction esses 11 Heat Pump Module eese oerte eie HERR en ces beo reet be este esee a Nee 11 Zones Loads Modul s ntt teet eroe qt N 11 Zone Manager Loads Module sees 12 Average Block Loads Module ccceeceeeeeee ene eeeeeeeeeeeaeenees 12 Design Modules e ES Borehole Desin Module Seer Maite ere ee sede hich cvace ts ice eese eere I ee a adores BRE dS 14 Description in sod rte er eere ORE edt ERR RU E URS 14 Theoretical Basis eere e es vate RR hae ee 15 Horizontal Design Module cce sce eee ence nee ee eee eem 17 JBIXTor IEEE 17 Theoretical Basis 5 tert D HEP MR AD 17 Surface Water Design Module sessi 19 Descrip
315. r the borehole length calculated in Design Day mode and then add the hybrid system until the desired peak inlet temperatures are reported Hourly Data Results Results Subsections Fixed Length Mode For Hourly Data calculations fixed length mode is the only option available This is because the loopfield geometry must be fully defined including borehole depth before the calculations can be performed As a result when a designer selects the Hourly Data calculation methodology the program switches to and locks in to fixed length mode 104 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module GLD calculate hourly inlet temperatures for a user defined modeling time period see figure 4 12 It is highly recommended that a designer changes the modeling time period to one year prior to hitting Calculate Extending the modeling time period beyond one or two years results in a geometric increase in required calculations While a smaller loopfield modeled over a single year could take a few minutes to process a large loopfield modeled over several years could take GLD an entire evening to process Note that during the calculation process the Studio Link status lights at the bottom of the module will flash and cycle indicating that GLD is working Because hourly simulations are computationally intensive it is recommended that the design optimize a design using the Design Day and Monthly Data methodologies described above first After a designer is comfortab
316. ral GHX Circuits Circuits 4 and 5 Also note how the Reynold s Numbers vary only by 12 between the center Circuits 4 and 4 and outer Circuits 1 and 8 GHX Circuits Compare this to the 25 difference in Reynold s Numbers in the direct return case above and it becomes clear that reverse return systems provide significant flow balancing benefits notice that the direct and reverse return designs fluid types and flow rates are identical in all regards except for the return piping style and therefore the calculated difference is a valid theoretical result 251 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Modeling reverse return GHX Header systems mathematically in a non trivial task As a result reverse return GHX Header systems in the CFD module in the current version of GLD have certain requirements including e Reverse return systems must include at least two reverse return pipe pairs and three GHX Circuit in one nested family of components and can handle only one circuit per reverse return pipe pair level e The system is currently not enabled to handle parallel double or triple circuits in parallel in the reverse return configuration Remembering these reverse return requirements will enable a designer to design more quickly Now that the four core concepts have been reviewed component families component relationships parallel and series flow and direct reverse returns we will examine five loopfield designs Four a
317. rature of the soil below the surface layer where there is no longer a seasonal swing This value may be determined from regional data or by recording the actual stabilized temperature of water circulated through pipe in a test bore Soil Thermal Properties The soil thermal properties are a little harder to define and care must be taken to provide accurate values especially for the thermal conductivity The thermal diffusivity relates to the density of the soil and its moisture 120 CHAPTER 5 The Horizontal Design Module content Typical values of thermal conductivity and diffusivity for sand clay and different types of rocks can be found in the Soil Properties tables However it is recommended that designers perform soil tests to obtain these values The thermal conductivity in particular has a large effect on the calculated bore length and should be determined with care through in situ tests or comparison with other projects installed in the local vicinity GLD does not encourage the use of ex situ data Diffusivity Calculator For the designer s assistance GLD includes a Diffusivity Calculator that can be used to determine the actual diffusivity if all pertinent soil parameters including the thermal conductivity the dry specific heat and density and the moisture level in the soil are known E Diffusivity Calculator Ioj xl Thermal Diffusivity Calculator Thermal Diffusivity 0 75 ft 2 day Thermal C
318. re direct return and one is reverse return SAMPLE LOOPFIELD LAYOUTS BASIC DIRECT RETURN LOOPFIELD LAYOUT 1 Figure 11 39 is an illustration of a direct return two GHX Circuit GHX Module The Supply Return Runout GHX header section and their associated fittings are in black The GHX Circuits and their associated fittings are in red Note that pipe and fitting lengths within a single component do now have to be the same length For example the return pipe of the Supply Return Runout A is longer than the supply pipe of the Supply Return Runout A Between each connection a space has been added to visibly separate different sections of the system for easy comparisons with the layout structure in the CFD module Figure 11 40 is the identical layout in the CFD module 252 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module GHX Module Supply Return Runout A A GHX Header Section 1 B B pu 4 BY B Circuit 1 Circuit 2 Fig 11 39 Basic Direct Return Loopfield Layout 1 Layout Design and Optimization Calculate Bl El GHX Module Supply Return Runout A A U circuit 01 E I 4GHX Header Section B B U Circuit 02 Fig 11 40 Basic Direct Return Loopfield Layout 1 in Layout Manager Workspace Note that in figure 11 39 the layout consists of a combination of the two components the pipe pair and the GHX Circuit Also note that for both circuits 1 and 2 the fittings for attachment to the return header p
319. required in the system which in turn determines the length of an individual circuit Changing the pipe size requires a change in the minimum required flow rates which can either increase or decrease the maximum recommended number of parallel circuits and their lengths However this also can have substantial effects on the piping head losses which must also be considered in order to reduce the pumping costs To fully optimize a system in the Surface Water Design module the designer thoroughly must understand the relationship between the system flow rate the minimum required flow rates the pipe size the head loss per length of pipe and the preferred number of parallel circuits GLD can conveniently make all the appropriate calculations but the designer must first have a grasp of all of the individual inputs required and the relationships among them Finally the surface water designing process actually involves an additional stage of optimization that is not included with the Borehole Design module The Surface Water module includes a piping calculation component to assist the designer in selecting the best pipe sizes and circuit lengths Entering Data into the Tabbed Panels GLD s innovative tabbed panel system provides for easy organization of and direct access to the relatively large number of design parameters associated with a particular project This section describes the Surface Water Piping Soil Fluid and Calculate panels T
320. results Annual Inflation Rates In this section users can enter the expected fuel inflation rates for each fuel type as well as the overall discount rate Because inflation rates vary depending on fuel type users can enter the inflation rate for each fuel type for the highest levels of modeling accuracy To enter the fuel inflation rate for each fuel type the user first selects a fuel type from the dropdown menu and then enters the appropriate inflation rate The user can then repeat the process for the other fuel types Note that if the user selects a HVAC system but does not include a fuel inflation rate appropriate for that system then an accurate NPV analysis cannot be performed For example if the user does not enter the inflation rate for fuel oil yet selects a fuel oil boiler as part of a geothermal hybrid system then the program will not be able to take into account the fuel oil inflation rate when performing the NPV calculations This could lead to an inaccurate final cost analysis Enter the discount rate in the other text box This discount rate is used in the overall NPV calculations Conventional The finance module enables designers to compare the costs of a geothermal system with up to five different conventional systems These conventional systems can include any combination of heating boiler furnace air source heat pump water source heat pump and cooling air cooled chiller water cooled chiller unitary air condi
321. rface Water Loads ceci eese re ete dente ne eels Tete e eoe Egal ROS 70 Chapter 4 The Borehole Design Module 71 OVERVIEW ics csse cede onec eese dp e ees REESE SAR bite oe ties Qus dee mee QURE AP etii ees 71 General Features cueste rte eet v Cae EU queer etse Poo dur ea ey deeds 71 Opening Projects dre Sab tees Aue etes ds dere oet e dodo 73 New Projects ior dons ee teet diss Sates Pee he Se dee ties eu EET Maas 73 Existing Projects sx i sean eren e e Pek e ete E dag tat rgo 73 Saving Projects oi ooa dre eee e vate eder ssepe ipQeve ve the dp IS ey 73 Typical Operations i ero e eerie e Mie ates eas dy dede er dte eet 73 Entering Data into the Tabbed Panels esses m mener 74 Informat on e e eye ek aes aad oa Soe ede t Maes SER Meese th teens 74 Extrd KW oi anced ote Po ERN YES ech obed e utto teli etre e vatianeess 75 Pump Power Calculator essssesee 76 Pateh E TI Vertical Grid Arrangement 0c ccc eee ee eect eee e TI Separation between Vertical Bores ese eee TI External Gnd Piles rettet ee p beh prete 79 G Function Calculatot io ERR ete d vtedes 82 Export to AutoCAD erepti ded ctu E Ine E R gen DE deys 82 Bores per Parallel Loop cesessee 82 Fixed Length Mode teret rer et e Rees 82 U T b i ees to NEVER ERE eU E EUN EA e REM DEOS De n eed 83 Pipe P
322. rn side pipe usually length A length A A r Fitting for attachment to child header pipe optional sa Ll Aw 235 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Note arrows indicate supply return flow directions Also the space between sections is intentional to illustrate the individual subcomponents Each of these subcomponents has a large number of user definable characteristics associated with it including Fittings A Afu and A Fitting type socket tee branch butt tee branch etc Fitting pipe size Fitting equivalent length Fitting name Fitting volume Pipe A and A Pipe size Pipe type Pipe inner diameter Pipe outer diameter Pipe length Extra pipe length Pipe name Pipe volume Note that each section can have multiple fittings in case a design requires a series of reducing fittings or butt fusions Also note that while the range of control can seem overwhelming in automatic mode most of these variables are selected automatically for the designer by the CFD algorithms In this version of the software note that the fittings are not automatically selected by the CFD algorithms Within the CFD Layout Manager Workspace a single GHX Circuit appears in figure 11 26 Note that the Workspace is on the left side of the screen and the right side contains a Properties Window The properties window can be expanded as necessary to view all of the characteristics for all five subcomponents of each
323. rop Down Menu the Properties Window on the right and the Circuit Confirmation Calculator invisible in figure 11 16 Section One Calculate and Results Display Buttons At the top are the Calculate and two or three types of results display buttons as can be seen below Calculate E Three Buttons in Peak Load and Equipment Flow Rate Modes Calculate Al B Four Buttons in Purge Flow Rate Mode 224 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module After the user has created or modified a design he or she can hit the Calculate button to see the updated fluid dynamics results The other results display buttons fulfill a special role in the Layout panel The CFD module produces a large range of results At certain times in the design process one subset of results may be applicable At another stage in the design process a different subset of results may be applicable At the end of the design process the designer may wish to view all results Because of the diverse processes involved in the design process users have the flexibility of selecting which specific results they wish to see at a particular time and how they wish to see them Users can do so via the two results display buttons z El When the user hits the left button the Review button the Review panel appears The Review panel is well suited for quickly reviewing a design It is explained in more detail later in this chapter When the user hits the righ
324. rs related to the body of water are listed on the Surface Water panel while piping choices are listed on the Piping panel Everything related to a project is presented simultaneously and easily is accessible throughout the design process In the expanded user interface mode which can be expanded by double clicking on any of the tabs the most commonly modified parameters as well as calculation results are always visible as seen below in figure 6 1 130 CHAPTER 6 The Surface Water Design Module rj Surface Water Design Project SurfaceWaterSample Lengths Temperatures COOLING HEATING COOLING HEATING Total Length Ft 4087 2 8187 8 Unit Inlet F 55 0 36 0 Circuit Length Ft 371 6 545 9 Unit Outlet F 64 2 30 1 Results Fluid Soil Piping Surface Water Extra kW Information Calculate Circuit Firen Parameters Fixed Temperature Circuit Pipe Size 1 in 25 mm Inlet Temperatures 55 0 oF 36 0 oF Number of Parallel Circuits Cooling 11 Heating 15 Number of Parallel Circuits Circuit Style 11 5 Slinky Circuit Style Primar C Col Slinky 7 Cooling D 9 ft hd Heating ESE ft hd Extra Equivalent Length per Circuit 33 1 ft Fig 6 1 Expanded User Interface The Surface Water Design module includes several additional features Metric and English unit conversion Printed reports of all input and calculated data Convenient buttons to bring up tables and calculators A
325. rse Return GHX Module At this point the designer can make copies of the GHX Module if so desired using the copy paste functionality In addition the designer can add to or change the module using the manual techniques outlined above 283 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module The Manifold Vault Builder The Manifold Vault Builder is a powerful tool that automatically builds Manifolds Vaults Note that conceptually in the CFD module Manifolds and Vaults are identical The Manifold Vault Builder can be accessed from within the Layout Manager Workspace in the Layout Panel The user can right click the mouse while inside the Layout Manager Workspace to see the menu in figure 11 75 appear Layout Fluid Automation Circulation Pumps Layout Design and Optimization Calculate El Peak Load Alphabetic Categorized Add New Pipe Pair Add Reverse Return Pipe Pair Add New Circuit Add New Ultra Manifold Add New Manifold Add New GHX Module Pipe and Fitting Manager Copy Selection Paste Selection Delete Fig 11 75 Accessing the Manifold Vault Builder After the user selects New Manifold the Manifold Vault Builder will open as can be seen in figure 11 76 284 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module _GHXModule and Manifold Buil Group Name Manifold 01 Return Type Diret Reun v Section Outlet Number 5 Extra Section Outlet Separation ft 6 0 0 0 Section O
326. rt ee ded a tpe og e e eee tenes 111 Opening Projects iiec ceee teeth dee ra eter a Rr e o D ERR e be eres 112 NEW Projects c C m 113 Existing Projects societe Mi e RENE EEE E e HAE TSSA 113 Saving ProJectS2 ees PUNCH SEHEN VPE e EROR abate wees ta added 113 Typical Operation eoi eoo bre SIRE Re SUE MN UNE EUST IPIS Oe C iter ADLER ed 113 Entering Data into the Tabbed Panels esses I me m meme 114 Configuration aen ie CS ORE ERU ENDS UEM Leto E eei iie ean 114 Trench Layout erea coss rore reo ees AO ue ERES wad eg QUIAE EE 114 Pipe Configuration in Trench 0 cece cece e cence nee e nena eee 115 Straight Pipe Configurations cece cece e cee e eee e ne ee eee enes 116 Single Pipe Vertical Alignment cece eee 116 Two Pipe Vertical Alignment eese 116 Three Pipe Vertical Alignment eese 116 Slinky Pipe Configurations ssssesssseee I 116 Vertical SDK ys ect Re ERR Rs 117 Horizontal Slinky eese e 117 Modeling Time Period 00 cece cee eee ence nee ee eee A ATERRAR SE a 117 PIPING ease coves Set i x a swede cov ute dav RR cha Me does QUEE EROS TERI ES TES 118 Piping Parameters ceret Re et RR RRRTUMET 118 AILES 120 Undisturbed Ground Temperature esseeee 120 Soil Thermal Properties sess 120 Diffusivity Calculator esse 121 Gr
327. rt of the entire design down to the smallest detail if he or she so desires Doing so of course could take some time This is why the CFD module also includes a suite of intelligent algorithms that optimize piping design automatically and nearly instantly fittings in the 2010 version require manual selection These algorithms efficiently calculate for example the proper supply and return header piping reductions to ensure that user defined purging flow rates are maintained throughout any piping design They also make it very easy to have a flow balanced system After the CFD module has auto sized the system excluding the fittings the user can look at a variety of fluid dynamics characteristics for each and every part of the design These characteristics include pipe length pipe size flow rate velocity fluid volume Reynolds number and pressure drop among others If the user needs to make a minor or major modification to the auto calculated system such as manually changing the diameter of a particular pipe section he or she is able to do so easily and then view the impact of the change on the overall system Below are two more representative examples of how the CFD module can be used e Ifauser wishes to see what happens to the overall pressure drop in a GHX Module and the Reynolds number in a single GHX Circuit if he or she switches from 20 to 10 propylene glycol he or she can do so easily e If a designer has a system that is unbalanced
328. rting Data from an Open Heat Exchanger Design Project If a designer wishes to perform a financial and emissions analysis of a vertical horizontal or pond project that he or she designed with GLD he or she can do so by following these steps 1 Open the project file vertical horizontal or pond of interest and make sure that the loads file zone manager or average block that is linked to the project file is open as well 2 Push the import button on the toolbar at the top of the finance module It looks like this 3 A window similar to the image below will appear Finance Module Import Design Module Selection Select the design module from which you would like to import data leforManual Horizontal Design Project HorizontalSample 4 Select the project design module of interest and click Ok 5 The relevant design parameters automatically will be loaded into the finance module Please note that if a user imports a surface water project the user must manually enter equivalent full load hours into the geothermal tab This is because in GLD the surface water loads modules neither have nor require full load hours inputs see Chapter 6 and page 156 Existing Projects Existing Finance projects may be opened at any time from within the Finance module by choosing Open from the Finance module toolbar 162 CHAPTER 9 The Financial Module Saving Projects Finance projects may be saved at any time
329. ry Headet i iti EO GI IRIS 135 Branches 42e oett ere Ree ere oe PUO RUE De CEPR 135 Details Reference only Juien ira ea g I mee 135 PUDDING HT PTS 135 Circuit Paranieters scettr RR e RET P TR EE RC aeea 136 CarcuitPIpe S1Z6 i cu rdg dete ee ds dus Etre ev aa ERES 136 Number of Parallel Circuits eese 137 Carcuit Styles isset e Rer pedet ar eR e E ENS 137 Circuit Head Loss per 100 feet esee 137 Extra Equivalent Length per Circuit eeseseusesss 137 Header Parameters 1i etm ra Erin 138 Number of Lanes i eo eer e eheu 139 Pipe SiZ ie cR Go MENGE IP tuper 139 Header Length Average Branch Length 139 Head Eoss per 100 feet io emt 140 Ap EE 140 Ground Temperature Corrections at Given Depth 141 Depth of Header in Soil 0 n E E cece e ne ene ee eens 141 Soll Type ost Sets be ret y eee e Res tae et ae tue 141 Regional Air Temperature Swing eeseeeseess 141 Coldest Warmest Day in Year esee 141 Corrected Temperature csessssssseeee e 141 Fluid ae Ee e ete TS e Up t IRA TUS 141 Results igi ET 142 Reporting Secon auci aoe HT RE IR ER eee 144 Printing Reports Rm 145 Chapter 7 REDONS caisiic sates arsncenctcinieeiinrauiiunieannnie 146 Overview THEMEN LAS The Report Preview WindoW ende cei rte t pe e e e cous 146 Project Reports coc iet t etae
330. s rrr cei IRR aer rre RE E RM EYP I 278 GHX Module Builder cese 278 Manifold Vault Builder sees 284 Ultra Manifold Vault Builder eene 288 Calculating and Reviewing Results ssssssesse e 290 Calculating Results o re Trench EER A pE TETAS RR ERIS 290 Reviewing Results s re xr ere bri bre rb pri ipe avr Pe rene 291 Properties Window Results 0 cece cece cece e eee ence nm 292 viii CONTENTS Layout Manager Workspace Resullts 0c ce sees 293 Review Panel Results ite tae eer e REED nda 297 Auto Optimization Tools irte erem EI eR RR LEUR RR ere lire y DES 299 Purging Flow Rate Auto Optimizer cesses 299 GHX Header Design Optimizer sese m eene 301 Adding Circulation Pumps uec eee eee Rr Rep e RE IR ETR D noh 304 Adding a Circulation Pump sss e 205 Deleting a Circulation Pump csesssesese eee 308 Printing Reports nice Rex epar e Rit eere onte 308 Exporting Piping Reports esses emm SOD Exporting Circulation Pump Reports csse 309 Concluding Remarks e et e eO ee e M 310 viii PREFACE PREFACE Before You Begin This chapter describes the typical uses and users of the software It also describes the installation procedure and hardware and software requirements for the Ground Loop Design GLD program Additionall
331. s that are connected for return flow but actually flow in the down 249 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module direction are like the reverse of Parent Child relationships Hence they are termed reverse child parent relationships In the Layout Manager Workspace these reverse return child parent relationships become apparent in figure 11 35 Notice how the supply and return flows are more or less in parallel and in the same direction down Only at the last GHX Circuit does the return flow actually begin flowing in the return up direction to return pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout Again this can be seen in figure 11 34 in which the return pipes B and C of the GHX Headers flow in parallel with the supply flow in supply pipes B and C until the last GHX Circuit 3 at which point the return flow reverses course and flows through the return pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return runout and heads into the return direction A straightforward way to think about how CFD Module models reverse return systems is as follows In reverse return systems GHX Circuits are like relays that send the flow farther down the GHX Module It is only at the last GHX Circuit where the flow heads back up to where it started Remember that direct returns are different In the direct return systems the GHX Circuit is like a U turn that sends the flow back up to where it started Design for Purging When a revers
332. s a view of the piping controls in the expanded user interface Figure 6 5 is the input screen for the piping header panel 135 CHAPTER 6 The Surface Water Design Module r Surface Water Design Project 1 Results Fluid Soil Piping Surface Water Extra kW Information Circuit Circuit Parameters Circuit Pipe Size 1 in 25 mm gt Number of Parallel Circuits Cooling 11 Heating 15 Circuit Style C Coil Slinky Circuit Head Loss per 100 feet Cooling D 9 ft hd Heating lesu ft hd Extra Equivalent Length per Circuit 33 1 ft Fig 6 3 Piping Circuit Panel Contents Pipe Layout Number of Parallel Circuits 11 15 Circuit Style C Col Slinky Fig 6 4 Piping Controls in Expanded User Interface Circuit Parameters Circuit Pipe Size This is the size of the pipe used in the primary heat transfer circuits Although larger pipes offer better heat transfer designers generally prefer smaller sizes 3 4 1 because of ease of handling and lower pipe costs 136 CHAPTER 6 The Surface Water Design Module Number of Parallel Circuits This is the number of parallel circuits required to maintain the required minimum flow rates defined by the designer If the number of circuits entered here is greater than the allowed number of circuits this value will be overwritten automatically with the limiting value when the calculations are performed Even if the circuits
333. s and load temperatures can be entered at the bottom of the module and the active heat pump series and load temperatures may be changed on the Heat Pumps tabbed panel Manual Select If an automatically selected heat pump is for any reason undesirable or a different pump series from the same manufacturer or even from a different manufacturer is required the Select button may be used This button allows the designer to choose any of the stored pumps As with the Auto Select button all of the associated fields are calculated automatically once the pump is selected When the Select button is pressed the selection panel appears as shown in figure 3 7 After a pump is chosen pressing Select Pump will place the pump in the zone and automatically calculate all of the associated parameters Cancel will return the user to the main display without changing any pumps Note Unlike with Auto Select a pump that is manually selected may or may not match the loads in the zone It is the responsibility of the designer to make sure the pumps match the zones 46 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones mHeat Pump Specifications at Design Temperature and Flow Rate Florida Heat Pump WP Series Water to Water Pump Name WPO36 Select Pump Cancel Number of Units 1 Fig 3 7 Pump Selection Panel Details Specific details about a given pump may be obtained by clicking the Details button Additionally the details panel is where the d
334. s for use in the financial module After having selected a system type and an appropriate fuel type for the system the user can then enter the per square foot installation cost value If for example a user wishes to have the program perform comparisons involving both natural gas and fuel oil boilers the user must be sure to enter the installation cost data for both types of boilers Please note that the finance module breaks the conventional system analysis into separate heating and cooling systems analyses If a user wants the program to estimate installation costs for a roof DX gas boiler system the user must first select the unitary air conditioner choose a fuel type and then enter the installation costs associated with the DX system The user must then select a boiler choose the appropriate fuel type and 168 CHAPTER 9 The Financial Module then enter the installation costs associated with the gas boiler This system while slightly more labor intensive for the user provides for the highest degree of analysis flexibility Experienced HVAC engineers also oftentimes have a good rule of thumb estimate for the per square foot per year maintenance costs for a variety of HVAC systems Once again some research has been published comparing commercial geothermal system maintenance costs to those of more standard systems Because younger systems have lower maintenance costs than older systems maintenance costs increase over time Data co
335. s the expected COP for the heating side of the system if the user has not imported the data automatically from a heat exchanger project design Note that if the user has imported the data from a vertical heat exchanger project that has monthly data calculated see chapter 4 then the imported COP is the average COP over the system lifetime and not the peak conditions COP Generally using the monthly data provides for a higher COP and lower operating costs since average fluid temperatures tend to be less extreme than the fluid temperatures during peak load conditions Circulation Pump Input Power Pump Power and Motor Efficiency The circulation pump input power automatically is calculated from the pump power and motor efficiency These values can be imported from a heat exchanger design project or manually entered Additional Power The user can enter power for all other elements in the system besides the heat pump units that may require energy input For example heat recovery units require additional energy that can be recorded in this box so that it can be used in the overall calculation of the System COP Again these data can be imported from a heat exchanger project if the data are in the project or can be entered manually Installation Area In this section the user enters the floor space square footage required by the geothermal mechanical equipment For example if a school geothermal system is decentralized and the heat pum
336. ser Agreement Software shall also include and the terms and conditions of this End User Agreement shall apply to any upgrades updates bug fixes or modified versions collectively Upgrades or backup copies of the Software licensed or provided to Customer by Gaia or an authorized distributor for which Customer has paid the applicable license fees and holds the corresponding software keys Notwithstanding the foregoing Customer acknowledges and agrees that Gaia shall have no obligation to provide any Upgrades under this End User Agreement If Upgrades are provided Customer acknowledges and agrees that i Customer has no license or right to use any such additional copies or Upgrades unless Customer at the time of acquiring such copy or Upgrade already holds a valid license to the original Software Notices of Proprietary Rights Customer agrees to maintain and reproduce all trademark copyright patent and notices of other proprietary rights on all copies in any form of the Software in the same form and manner that such trademark copyright patent and notices of other rights are included on the Software Except as expressly authorized in this End User Agreement Customer shall not make any copies or duplicates of any Software without the prior written permission of Gaia Customer may make such backup copies of the Software as may be necessary for Customer s lawful use provided Customer affixes to such copies all trademark copyright patent
337. so includes a set of panels grouped by subject through which the designer can enter and edit the input variables in a straightforward and efficient manner For example parameters related to trench configuration are listed on the Configuration panel while piping choices are listed on the Piping panel Everything related to a project is presented simultaneously and easily is accessible throughout the design process In the expanded user interface mode which can be expanded by double clicking on any of the tabs the most commonly modified parameters as well as calculation results are always visible as seen below in figure 5 1 111 CHAPTER 5 The Horizontal Design Module Yd Horizontal Design Project HorizontalSample usermanual5 Lengths SEE ERES Temperatures COOLING HEATING COOLING HEATING Total Trench Length ft 4145 9 8177 4 Unit Inlet F 85 0 50 0 Single Trench Length Ft 207 3 408 9 Unit Outlet F 95 2 44 0 Results Fluid Soil Piping Configuration Extra kW Information Calculate Trench Layout Prediction Time 10 0 years Number 20 ES Depth 24 0 40 ft Separation 10 0 ft Width 124 0 in Fixed Temperature Pipe Configuration in Trench Inlet Temperatures 85 0 dr 50 0 ur c C C Trench Number 20 Separation 10 0 t z C Depth 240 ft Total Number of Pipes 3 width 24 9 in j Vertical Separation Y 24 0 in Horizontal Separation X Cooling Tower Boiler
338. some convenient flow rates required for proper purging of a piping system 154 CHAPTER 8 Tables and Reference Files Conversions The Conversions table has two separate lists of metric to English conversions placed together in one file As already mentioned the user can obtain multipliers for most common metric English unit changes by going through the listed conversions Adding Customized Reference Files The user can create customized reference files by editing the existing HTML files with the table lists and making new links The process is simple and requires only a very basic knowledge of HTML Original Model The original model included with GLD consists of these files English Metric FluidTables html FluidTablesMetric html FluidTable1 html FluidTable1Metric html FluidTable2 html FluidTable2Metric html FluidTable3 html FluidTable4 html FluidTable5 html SoilTables html SoilTablesMetric html SoilTable1 html SoilTable1Metric html SoilTable2 html SoilTable2Metric html SoilTable3 html SoilTable3Metric html SoilTable4 htm SoilTable4Metric html PipeTables html PipeTablesMetric html PipeTable1 html PipeTable1Metric html PipeTable2 html PipeTable2Metric html PipeTable3 html PipeTable3Metric html To add a new file the FluidTables html the SoilTables html or the PipeTables html must be edited The user must create a link in one of the three aforementioned html files to the new file which contains the table graph or
339. spect to the subject matter hereof superseding and replacing any and all prior agreements communications and understandings both written and oral regarding such subject matter Conventions Used in This Document The following symbols are used in this document to highlight certain information and features included in the User s Guide and GLD software program This caution symbol notifies the user that care must be taken at the specified location This star shaped symbol highlights new features in GLD Premier 2010 The round symbol highlights suggestions for using the program more effectively or for improving designs CONTENTS Contents Preface Before You Begin eee 1 Typical Uses and Users a wives Sieve is wel System Requirements for Installing Ground Looe Design ensi tUe Meade bik win eels 2 Hardware requirements uo eerte ecrire mne eee advan Hace ER veiavbeooutes 2 Software requirenients 5 o aset e EO a P ORO EO Ge 2 Operating system requirements 0 cece cece e cence ee 3 Internet browser requirements csse 3 Installation procedure oer eS pe EEUU RR ges 3 Initial installations 2 oio te eR eR E ERU SE e opel EE 3 Installation of updated versions or re installation 3 Program Licensing sore ECCO ee tee etie Den etui ue 5 Software License Dongle 0 cece cece eee ee eee ne neces ee ee ens 5 How to Transfe
340. ss Untitled zon Monthly Load Data Updat C Heating amp es Total Peak Total Peak Cancel kgtu 2 kBtu hr 2f kBtu 2 kBtu hr 2l 1 758 January 0 February March April May June July August September October November e December 811 Total 478544 3 0 3 0 Hours at Peak Hours at Peak Flow Rate ERE fioi Unit Inlet F 90 0 40 0 ooo Fig 3 15 Hourly Data as Seen in Monthly Loads Data Viewing the hourly data set in the monthly framework is useful for exploring the heating cooling load distribution The load distribution can impact borefield design considerations in several different ways which are outside the scope of this User Manual The user can hit Cancel at any time to return to the main Average Block Loads module screen GRAPHICALLY VIEWING HOURLY AND MONTHLY LOADS Viewing the monthly and hourly data set graphically is quite useful in the early stages of the loopfield design process because balanced loads and imbalanced loads can require different design strategies As such GLD now offers a graphing button that enables designers to view graphed monthly peak and total loads This button can be found at the top of the monthly loads data panel and provides outputs such as the following 55 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones Graph Data Total Cooling Loads Monthly Loads Total Heating Loads 7 Total Cooling Loads M Total Heating Loads Show Title
341. st data for both types of boilers Please note that the finance module breaks the conventional system analysis into separate heating and cooling systems analysis If a user wants the program to estimate maintenance costs for a roof DX gas boiler system the user must first select the unitary air conditioner choose a fuel type and then enter the maintenance costs associated with the DX system The user must then select a boiler choose the appropriate fuel type and then enter the maintenance costs associated with the gas boiler This system while slightly more labor intensive for the user provides for the highest degree of analysis flexibility Experienced HVAC engineers also may have a good rule of thumb estimate for the per square foot salvage value for a variety of HVAC systems Users can enter per square foot salvage values for the different systems following the methods outlined above If a designer is doing a financial comparison and not getting any output results for installation costs maintenance costs or salvage values it is worthwhile confirming that the baseline cost data have been entered If the data have not been entered results can not be calculated 170 CHAPTER 9 The Financial Module Utility Costs Input parameters relating to utility costs are located in the Utility Costs panel as shown in figure 9 4 These include summer and winter utility costs for a range of fuel types the expected annual inflation rates for e
342. stallation Area In this section users enter the floor space square footage required by the selected heating equipment For example if a central boiler system is selected and it requires 1000 ft of mechanical room space the user can enter 1000 ft here Water Usage Rate If the selected heating equipment consumes water the user can enter the water usage rate here Geothermal In this section users enter parameters and values pertaining to the geothermal system As mentioned previously users have the option of importing relevant data for the financial analysis from an open heat exchanger design project Conversely users can manually enter the geothermal project data directly into the financial module An overview of the Geothermal panel is shown in figure 9 6 The Geothermal panel is divided into two sections a summary panel and two details tabbed sub panels 176 CHAPTER 9 The Financial Module IS Finance Module HorizontalSample Results Geothermal Conventional Utilities Other Costs Incentives Geothermal System CI 20 5 POT COOLING HEATING TOTAL years Manual Geothermal Power 2608 4 kwh 120890 5 kwh 123499 0 kwh Hybrid Power 0 0 kwh 0 0 kwh 0 0 kwh Total Annual Power 2608 4 kwh 120890 5 kWh 123499 0 kWh Water 0 0 Gallons 0 0 Gallons 0 0 Gallons Other None None Primary Geothermal Hybrid Component COOLING HEATING Eqv Full Load Hours 255 ho 4023 hr Peak Capacity 197 7 kBtu hr 373 5
343. stallation out to the buried pipe system Optional Cooling Tower and Boiler Section Cooling towers and boilers can be added to designs via the sliders that are located on both the Results panel figure 4 16 and in the expanded interface as seen in figure 5 14 The Cooling Towers and Boilers can be run independently or together in order to balance required lengths or temperatures SSS Load Balance Fig 5 14 Cooling Tower and Boiler Controls in Expanded User Interface 126 CHAPTER 5 The Horizontal Design Module Cooling Towers Although typically not recommended because of increased running and maintenance costs the user may elect to add a cooling tower to a cooling dominated geothermal system to reduce the total boring lengths and therefore the total initial installation costs To facilitate this design choice GLD offers the cooling tower or hybrid option In any case where the calculated trench lengths for cooling are longer than those for heating the difference in the lengths can be eliminated through the use of a cooling tower tied in parallel to the geothermal ground loop This requires that either the cooling tower capacity is chosen such that both the peak load and the annual load to the ground are balanced or if a full balance is unnecessary a capacity is chosen that allows for downsizing the loop to an acceptable length To aid in the sizing process a Load Balance control is provided in the Op
344. t yr 0 277 ft yr WLHP 3 84m yr 3 92m yr 4 03m yr 4 21m yr 4 58m yr 0 36 f yr 0 367 ft yr 0 378 f yr 0 395 ft yr 0 429 ft yr DX cooling Electric 4 08m yr 4 14mi yr 4 26m yr 4 38m yr 4 8m yr heating 0 382 f yr 0 388 fC yr 0 399 f yr 0 416 ft yr 0 45 f yr 2 pipe fan coil w 5 58m yr 5 66m yr 5 77m yr 5 95m yr 6 3m yr boiler and chiller 0 523 ft7 yr 0 530 ft yr 0 5A1 f yr 0 558 ft yr 0 592 ft yr VAV w boiler and 6 77m yr 6 84m yr 6 95m yr 7 13m yr 7 5m yr chiller 0 634 f yr 0 641 fC yr 0 651 f yr 0 668 ft yr 0 703 ft yr 4 pipe fain coil with 7 32m yr 7 4m l yr 7 5m yr 7 7m lyr 8 1m yr boiler and chiller 0 686 fC yr 0 693 ft yr 0 703 ft yr 0 720 fC yr 0 755 ft yr The above data are included in this manual as a convenience and general reference for Ground Loop Design software users It is of course the responsibility of the designer to determine the exact maintenance cost parameters for use in the financial module After having selected a system type and an appropriate fuel type for the system the user can then enter the per square foot per year maintenance cost value If for example a user wishes to have the program perform comparisons involving both natural gas and fuel oil boilers the user must be sure to enter the maintenance co
345. t Pump EER COP 12 5 3 9 System EER COP 12 5 3 9 System Flow Rate gpm 60 8 Optional Cooling Tower Boiler Condenser Capacity kBtu hr Cooling Tower Flow Rate apm Boiler Cooling Range F Annual Operating Hours hr yr Condenser Capacity kBtu hr A load Gal Cooling Tower D oO Fig 5 11 Results Panel Contents Lengths Temperatures COOLING HEATING COOLING HEATING Total Trench Length Ft 4145 9 8177 4 Unit Inlet F 85 0 50 0 Single Trench Length ft 207 3 408 9 Unit Outlet F 95 2 44 0 Fig 5 12 Results Display in Expanded User Interface The two lists on the Results panel are for heating and cooling Although all of the numbers shown are valid and respond to changes the side with the longer required length is printed in bold type so that it stands out The longer length determines the installation size and for this reason the shorter length system results lose relevance The Results panel is divided into two sections On the top is the reporting section which presents the calculation results The lower Optional Cooling Tower Boiler section is included to assist in the sizing of a cooling tower and or boiler This is a convenient tool for hybrid type designs which may be desirable when the cooling length exceeds that of heating or when the heating length 125 CHAPTER 5 The Horizontal Design Module exceeds that of cooling The cooling tower and b
346. t button the Display button a pop up window will appear as can be seen in figure 11 17 ook Layout Fluid Automation Circulation Pumps Layout Design and Optimization Calculate B I Multi Select Review Pipe Pair Circuit Pipel Pipe 2 Sae Length Flow Rate Velocity Reynold s Number Volume Pressure Drop Total Branch Pressure Drop Group Name Fig 11 17 Display Options Pop Up Window 225 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module As can be seen in figure 11 17 display options are broken into four groups Multi Select Review Component types Pipe Pair and Circuit Supply and Return Pipes Pipe 1 and Pipe 2 Details Size Length Flow Rate Velocity Reynold s Number Volume Pressure Drop and Group Name Each group is explored below Multi Select and Review Multi Select Selecting this option opens up a new window that enables a designer to select multiple parameters at the same time Review Selecting this option opens up the Review panel explained below Pipe Pair and Circuit ie the component types Pipe Pair When a user selects Pipe Pair all of the Pipe Pairs in the piping system design are enabled to display the selected fluid dynamics results Circuit When a user selects Circuit all of the GHX Circuits in the piping system design are enabled to display the selected fluid dynamics results Pipe 1 and Pipe 2 Pipe 1 When a user selects Pipe 1 all
347. t can be entered into the GLD Load Temperatures panel directly Notice how in figure 2 5 five points of data are included for cooling but only three are included for heating The software requires a minimum of three data points for its coefficient 32 CHAPTER 2 Adding Editing Heat Pumps calculation More data may be input if desired However no boxes may be left blank Other temperature and coefficient values must be set to zero in this case As a convenience 0 buttons are included to quickly set rows to zero General Cooling Heating Load Temperatures Load Flows Test Temperature Corrections LOAD COOLING HEATING EAT WB Capacity Power EAT DB Capacity Power degF Factor Factor degF Factor Factor 4 ose sss 02563 0 0000000 Calculate Coefficients Fig 2 5 Heat Pump Load Temperatures Panel Note If correction factors are unknown or unnecessary they can all be left at the constant value of 1 0 which is the initial condition that exists when a new pump is first added Load Flows Panel Similar to the Load Temperatures panel the Load Flows panel allows the user to enter corrections for variation in load side flow rates The system used here is different however Every pump is assigned a nominal flow rate and the data is input as percentages of the nominal flow rate A sample Load Flows panel is shown in figure 2 6 To get a capacity factor at a flow rate of 80 percen
348. t describes the relationships between and among them This language is introduced later in this chapter Opening Projects There are two ways to open CFD projects One is by using the New Piping command from the Design Studio File menu or toolbar and the other is by opening an existing CFD project pip file from within the CFD module In the design studio only one CFD module can be open at a time New Projects New CFD projects may be opened at any time from the Design Studio by choosing New Piping from either the Design Studio File menu or the 204 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module toolbar New projects open with several default values that the user can modify as necessary for new projects The module opens directly into the Layout panel New CFD projects can be for a stand alone analysis or for use in conjunction with an existing heat exchanger design project For use in conjunction with an existing heat exchanger design project see below t Existing Projects Existing CFD projects may be opened at any time from within the CFD module by choosing Open from the CFD module toolbar Saving Projects CFD projects may be saved at any time by clicking the save button on the CFD module toolbar When the user closes the program or module the program automatically asks the user if he or she wants to save the CFD project Typical Operation Although each user will have his or her own unique me
349. t display the results he or she wishes to export using the display controls described earlier in this chapter After the desired results are visible the user can hit this button and then name a csv file By default the file will be exported to the Piping folder Exporting a Circulation Pump Report To export a circulation pump report the user must first add pumps and then go to the Summary panel in the circulation pumps tab An example can be seen in figure 11 102 below 309 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Circulation Pump Information Total Circulation Pump Power kW 4 4 Total Number of Circulation Pumps 2 Pump Fig 11 102 Preparing to Export a Circulation Pump Design The user can then hit the following button and then name a csv file By default the file will be exported to the Piping folder Concluding Remarks The new CFD module is a powerful program We appreciate your feedback and suggestions for the module so that we can continue to improve it over time 310
350. t of nominal for example the capacity of the unit at 80 percent of nominal would be divided by the capacity at the nominal flow rate The procedure is identical for the power factors Data is usually taken at standard source temperatures and flows and at the standard load 33 CHAPTER 2 Adding Editing Heat Pumps temperature Quite often the manufacturer provides lists of these variations that can be input directly Once again a minimum of three points is necessary for the coefficient calculations and 0 buttons are provided for quickly setting the unused rows to zero Remember boxes must be set to 0 if they are not used General Cooling Heating Load Temperatures Load Flows Test Flow Corrections LOAD Nominal Flow Rate CFM HEATING COOLING of Capacity Power Nominal Factor Calculate Coefficients of Nominal Capacity Power Factor Factor 0 000000 Fig 2 6 Heat Pump Load Flows Panel Testing Input Data The Test panel is provided as a final check after a pump s data has been input into the Heat Pump module Without testing the data directly there is no way to know if mistakes were made during the input process A sample Test panel is shown in figure 2 7 As can be seen from the figure both source and load entering water and air temperatures as well as flow rates can be edited directly Clicking the Test button performs the calculation to see what capacity
351. t type of project For example the English metric unit conversion tool can convert a single window without affecting the rest of the open windows Project reports can also be printed from the studio desktop Customization GLD offers the user a great deal of freedom in how he or she enters and uses information Rather than conforming designs to the software this software package allows some modification and variation in its included features Some of the most common areas of customization in GLD include the entry of loads and the selection of equipment Although fully automatic modes are available the user also has the ability to customize or override the automatic features For example detailed load information may be included for precision designs while extremely limited data is enough for rough calculations Additionally if the data are available the designing engineer can enter his or her own pump sets to take full advantage of the automatic selection procedures Also different families of pumps can be used within a single project and even individual pumps not included in the pre defined pump sets can be employed as required Another area where customization is possible is in the data reference files which are based on HTML With a simple HTML editor the user can include any tables data pictures graphs charts or any other useful information that meets the user s needs User added files can supplement or replace the data referenc
352. tems also can be called Palindromic Reverse Returns es CT ae Ln eee Lese I GHX Module Supply Return Runout GHX Module 01 26 GHX Header Section 01 GHX Module 01 26 GHX Header Section 02 GHX Module 01 2 2 GHX Header Section 03 GHX Module 01 2 2S GHX Header Section 04 GHX Module 01 2 926 GHX Header Section 05 GHX Module 01 1 1 2 96 GHX Header Section 06 GHX Module 01 1 1 4 2S GHX Header Section 07 GHX Module 01 3 4 Fig 11 37 Optimized Direct Return Reducing Headers System For comparison in a direct return system the header pipes reduce identically all the way down the cascade on both the supply and return side as can be seen above in figure 11 32 Pipe 1 Size Pipe 2 Size Pipe 1 Reynold s Number Pipe 2 Reynold s Number M Circuit 01 GHX Module 01 U Circuit 02 GHX Module 01 U Circuit 03 GHX Module 01 U Circuit 04 GHX Module 01 U circuit 05 GHX Module 01 U circuit 06 GHX Module 01 U Circuit 07 GHX Module 01 U Circuit 08 GHX Module 01 Fig 11 38 Balanced Reynolds Numbers in an Optimized Reverse Return Reducing Headering System As mentioned previously reverse return GHX Header systems are inherently flow balanced This can be seen in figure 11 38 above which shows the eight GHX Circuits that branch off of the seven GHX Header Sections in figure 11 37 above Notice how the Reynold s Number drop off symmetrically from the cent
353. ter to air or the water to water pump type option 27 CHAPTER 2 Adding Editing Heat Pumps Entering Data into the Add Edit Heat Pumps Module The user opens the Edit Add Heat Pumps module from the Design Studio Heat Pumps menu Note that one module can be open at a time When the module opens there are two selection boxes present in the upper pane while no pump data is displayed in the lower pane In the left box the user can choose to select either one of the manufacturers from the list of existing manufacturers or New Series If a manufacturer is selected the associated list of pump series available for that particular manufacturer appears in the box on the right When a series is chosen the data for that series appears in the lower panel Creating a New Series and or Manufacturer If the user chooses New Series from the manufacturer list on the left the lower pane becomes active with another selection box that requests direction as to whether to use an existing manufacturer or to create a New Manufacturer After the user makes a selection the panel changes to show information about the manufacturer and series The manufacturer information will be editable if the series belongs to a new manufacturer The Edit Add Heat Pumps module with an open Pump Information panel is shown in figure 2 1 ia Edit Add Heat Pumps 2 xl New Series hd Series Name Pump Information New Manufac
354. the monthly partial load factor is PLFm 10000 KBtu 30 KBtu hr 24hr 31 days 0 448 If this value is to be transferred correctly into the Design Day Loads boxes in the loads modules the 0 448 must remain the same Noon to four p m represents four hours out of twenty four in a day Loads not included in that four hour period must be included in the other twenty hours of the day The following equation is used to determine the relationship between off peak loads and peak loads so that the PLFm is maintained Note that this automatic calculation also assumes that the installation is running 7 days per week and changes the Days per Week value to reflect this If other occupation times are desired the values will need to be changed manually to reflect proper distribution over the course of a month PLFm 67 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones Days per Week 7 days x 4 hr x Peak Demand 8 12am 4 hr x Peak Demand 12 4 4 hr x Peak Demand 4 8 12 hr x Peak Demand 8pm 8am 24 hr x Top Peak Demand 0 448 7 days per Week 7days x 4 hr x 30 KBtu hr t 4 hr x Y 4 hr x Y 12 hr x Y 24 hr x 30 KBtu hr or solving for Y Y 30 KBtu hr x 24 hr x 0 448 30 KBtu hr x 4hr 20 hr Y 322 56 KBtu 120 KBtu 20 hr Y 10 128 KBtu hr To preserve the partial load factor when transferring into the Design Day Loads 30 KBtu hr has to be transferred to the noon to four p m block as
355. thod the typical operation of the CFD module would include the following steps 1 Open anew CFD module 2 Choose metric or English units 3 If necessary enter modify automation details in the Automation Panel 4 If necessary modify flow rate details in the Fluid Panel Modify fluid type as necessary In the Layout tab design a new one use wizards or manual building techniques Adjust the size of the CFD module to maximize viewing flexibility Hit the Calculate button to analyze the system Hit the Display button to choose which results to review 0 Select to have the program automatically determine the purging flow rate and or auto size the piping systems to ensure the user defined purging flow rate 11 Make modifications as necessary 12 Add circulation pumps 13 Save and or print the CFD piping report a EO oos 205 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Entering Data into the Tabbed Panels Ground Loop Design s innovative tabbed panel system provides for easy organization of and direct access to the relatively large number of design parameters associated with a particular project This section describes the Circulation Pumps Automation Fluid and Layout panels Circulation Pumps General information pertaining to a piping system s circulation pumps can be entered and found in the Circulation Pumps panel as seen in figure 11 2 below b Piping Module eee Layout Fluid Automation Circ
356. thodologies enhances design confidence On the flip side results discrepancies between the two theories can enable designers to hone in on potential design issues Note that absolute peak temperatures are sensitive to the hours at peak input which can be seen in figure 3 13 The fourth subsection lists the total unit capacity the peak loads and demand of all the equipment the calculated seasonal heat pump efficiency the calculated design day efficiency and the calculated average annual power consumption The peak load is the maximum and is determined from whichever time period across all the zones has the highest load The peak demand includes all pumps and external energy requirements including those listed in the Extra kW panel In GLD Premier 2010 the calculated seasonal cooling and heating heat pump efficiency values over the design lifetime are quite useful for lifecycle cost and CO emissions analyses in the Finance Module The design day efficiency is the predicated heat pump performance on the cooling and heating design day The average annual power consumption is calculated by summing up the monthly heat pump power draw over the design lifetime and dividing by the number of years Including the system loads the dynamic fluid temperatures and the dynamic heat pump performance there is no more accurate way to estimate the power consumption of a geothermal design Designers may find it interesting to see the impact of borehole spacing cha
357. time the user hits the Calculate button the graphs will be automatically updated A sample screen for this panel and the Graphing Module can be seen in figures 10 5 and 10 6 The Calculate panel is divided into three sections On the top is the Calculation Interval input section In the middle are the Calculation Results At the bottom is the Data Quality section 194 CHAPTER 10 The Thermal Conductivity Module Immediately to the right of the Calculate button is a Save Calculated Graph Data button If the user checks this box before hitting the Calculate button then all of the raw data used in the graphs is exported as a text file into the Thermal Conductivity Thermal Conductivity Report Data Files folder The designer can import these data into Excel to create his or her own graphs if so desired Bore Flow Diffusivity Information Calculate Save Calculated Graph Data T Calculation Interval Start 12 0 hr End 42 0 hr Thermal Conductivity 1 60 Btu h ft F Slope 2 95 Average Heat Hux 17 4 W ft Average Power 5216 2 Watts BH Thermal Resist BTR 0 31 h ft F Btu Thermal Diffusivity 1 23 ft 2 day Average How Rate 8 20 gpm Data Quality v Power Standard Deviation v Power Variation v Temperature X Flow Rate Vv Slope Stability v Water Flow Test Fig 10 6 Results Tabbed Panel F3 Thermal Conductivity Graph we g amp o Graph Data Hourly Data
358. tion i rb Iti RR DU ened 19 Theoretical Basis tre ER emet er RR M ati EAD 19 Lifecycle Costing and C02 2 3 s e teer tere rrt RE Rer ERRAT 20 Thermal Conductivity Module 0 eee eee eee cece eee e eee ee ea ene ened 21 Additional Modules cos t eter ts otek teret perte tede rol RepOTUsz iiim oe tiee o i E dive re rr deuten svg oh Sek E so eU epe A dated dled dan 21 Project Reports eor er RI EO RE Re E OS REED Ee SESTO eee eee ET 21 Monthly and Hourly Inlet Temperature Reports eene 21 Zone LEoads Reports une de E PEE Ro ERES 22 Lafecycle Reports eost eee ee rex RR ei era A EVER ETe Ve vien 22 Thermal Conductivity Report 0c cece cece eee e cece m eta ene eae naes 22 CED Module Reports 2 pere Dre obs pokes eos er Hees ee 22 Data Reference Files 9 re RR ee PERI t E INA Program Help and Support rper Eom ere T dave 23 References cu ios tS ee ie eR m Bee ie p dit Pese Sabie eeu 23 CONTENTS Chapter 2 Adding Editing Heat Pumps 25 Heat Pump Model rocni tioii ote ehe rone Rr E EEEE ER RE EA EEA RT 25 Descnption ie es te rhe eese hr eR de TAL poc RID Ere BR der e ah 25 Theoretical Basis ooo e eet o eimi dee Capacity and POWEL o c DR Ule See e te te E us 26 Flow Rate orto Ete REED i EIS EM otrue 27 Eoad Side Corrections eoe o RO OE pe RENS IB 27 Entering Data into the Add Edit Heat Pumps Modyule
359. tion 05 U circuit 06 C GHX Header Section 06 U circuit 07 95 GHX Header Section 07 U circuit 08 Fig 11 90 Using the Group Name to Sort Larger Systems 298 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Auto Optimization Tools The CFD module provides one more invaluable set of tools for the designer who desires to have the CFD module automatically optimize a piping system of interest These auto optimization tools provide the designer with tremendous power and will likely change the way engineers design GHX Fields in the future The auto optimization tools include o The Purging Flow Rate Auto Optimizer o The GHX Header Design Optimizer Both of these tools will be explored in detail below Note that both of these tools can be activated from the following button when in Purge mode The Purging Flow Rate Auto Optimizer Calculating the purge rate for a GHX Module etc is critical to ensure that an appropriately sized purge pump is available to properly purge a system Performing these calculations in the past has been time intensive and sometimes nearly impossible and required the use of charts diagrams and a healthy dose of engineering knowhow and experience Now the Purging Flow Rate Auto Optimizer instantly calculates the optimal flow rate in gpm or L s to ensure a user defined target flow rate is maintained throughout the GHX Circuits during the purging process Note that issues related to the header
360. tion pump details regarding the circulation pump including flow rate and pressure drop are added automatically to a new circulation pump record in the Circulation Pumps panel see figure 11 99 below Notice how the linked component name the name of the component that has the circulation pump appears as well as the associated pressure drop and flow rate It is important that in the Layout Manager Workspace the designer has selected the flow type of interest peak equipment or purge prior to viewing the circulation pump details in the Circulation Pumps panel If a designer wishes to have a circulation pump sized for the equipment flow but has selected peak flow the displayed pump details will be for peak flow and not equipment flow 306 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Total Circulation Pump Power kW 0 0 Total Number of Circulation Pumps 1 Dipg B B Pump Name Pump 1 Linked Element GHX Module Runout Required Pressure Drop ft hd 6 Required Flow Rate gpm Required Input Power kW Pump Power hP Pump Motor Efficiency Fig 11 99 Details of the Added Circulation Pump In this version of GLD the user may add the pump power and pump motor efficiency for each circulation pump and then the program will calculate the required input power for the pump Future versions of the software likely will have a dynamic circulation pump performance engine included to do this final calculation au
361. tional integration with leading building energy simulation tools including the IES lt Virtual Environment gt and the Trane Trace software products e Customized logos and report inputs GLD now enables users to brand reports with their own company logos e A number of new professional reports e Borehole Thermal Resistance BTR calculations from in situ data in the Thermal Conductivity module e Export your borehole designs to AutoCAD The Design Studio The studio is the desktop work area in which the designer conducts his or her project analyses and establishes the basis for designs When additional projects are desired new windows may be opened or existing projects may be loaded The Loads modules hold and display the information for the particular installation Other windows may be opened concurrently For example one window may be used to edit or to modify heat pump data another to calculate equivalent full load hours and still others to provide easily accessible graphs or CHAPTER 1 GLD Overview charts that may be required repeatedly through the course of a design Similar design plans can be compared directly or entirely different designs can be created and varied All of the information a designer needs exists in one convenient location within GLD Besides opening and closing windows and taking care of file management the studio desktop menu and toolbar include control features which can be applied to more than one differen
362. tional Cooling Tower section of the Calculate panel Although clicking the slider control can initiate a valid calculation or recalculation the slider control generally is employed after initial calculations have been conducted The Load Balance is a slider based control that represents a percentage of the total cooling load both instantaneous peak and annual For example a 100 Load Balance would be equivalent to saying that the entire cooling load of the system would be handled by the cooling tower Conversely a 0 Load Balance would mean that a cooling tower is not employed In a typical design it is difficult to predict exactly how much load balance or what size of cooling tower is necessary to match the cooling and heating lengths However using the Load Balance slider control the designer can optimize the system to the lengths desired by directly controlling the amount of cooling load to be handled by the cooling tower In the case where the designer desires the shortest length possible the design requires a perfect balance of the heating and cooling loads to the ground The length from this perfect balance would be the minimum length required to adequately cover the heating load requirement To accomplish this the Load Balance slider needs to be adjusted to the percentage value where the calculated cooling and heating bore lengths are approximately equivalent Note As expected the Long Term Ground Temperature Change for both heat
363. tioner equipment After the users first selects a conventional system number 1 5 and then defines the equipment type and performance characteristics for that system number the program determines the energy requirements and operating costs for the system The parameters relating to the conventional system options are located in the Conventional panel as shown in figure 9 5 The Conventional panel is broken up into two sections alternate systems and system details 172 CHAPTER 9 The Financial Module Finance Module HorizontalSample Results Geothermal Conventional Utilities Other Costs Incentives System 1 COOLING HEATING TOTAL Total Annual Power 5198 1 kWh 4023 0 kwh 9221 1 kwh Water 0 0 Gallons 0 0 Gallons 0 0 Gallons Other None 2438773 0 ft 3 Natural Gas COOLING HEATING Eqv Full Load Hours 255 hr 4023 hr Equipment Type Unitary Air Conditione Boiler Power Source Electricity Natural Gas Installed Capacity 252 0 kBtu hr 500 0 kBtu hr Efficiency 13 0 EER s00 Extra Power Ea kw 10 ki Installation Area 3000 ft 2 300 0 tsz Water Usage Rate 0 00 gpm ton 0 00 gpm ton Fig 9 5 Conventional Panel Contents Alternate Systems In this section users can scroll through the alternate standard HVAC systems and see the summary of each system s energy and fuel fuel type consumption Users can scroll through and review each system by clicking o
364. tions Information Calculation Results Input Parameters Loads borehole only when linked to Average Block module Monthly Inlet Temperatures borehole only when linked to Average Block module e Comments Information This section contains the information from the design module s Information panel The project and designer s names dates client s name and address etc appear here This section is included at the top of every report Concise reports only include the project name and start date Calculation Results This section lists the results of the calculations and essentially is the same information shown on the Calculate panel of the design module The most important results such as the total length of pipe required are highlighted and boxed in order to stand out from the background The report presents results of both the heating and the cooling calculations 147 CHAPTER 7 Reports Input Parameters This section contains all of the parameters entered by the designer during the design process Parameters are placed into sections with names taken directly from the panels in the heat exchanger design modules The filename of the zone file associated with the project is listed under the Loads heading Loads This section contains all of the loads data entered in the Average Block loads module peak loads and monthly loads as well if entered This section is only available in borehole module reports since only the
365. tomatically Note that if a user manually enters a pump in the Circulation Pumps tabbed panel it will not be associated with a component in the Layout Manager Workspace Note that if a user modifies a piping design in the Layout Manager Workspace after having added a circulation pump as the fluid dynamics results update in the Layout Manager Workspace they will also update automatically in the Circulation Pumps tab as well Note that circulation pumps cannot be added to reverse return pipe pair components 307 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module Deleting a Circulation Pump To delete a circulation pump the designer can right click on a component that has a circulation pump A screen similar to the one in figure X below will appear Layout Design and Optimization Calculate El U Circuit 01 Add New Pipe Pair 2S GHX Header S Add New Reverse Return Pipe Pair U Circuit Add A New Circuit Add New Ultra Manifold Add New Manifold Add New GHX Module Pipe and Fitting Manager Copy Selection Paste Selection Delete Add Circulation Pump Remove Circulation Pump Fig 11 100 Deleting a Circulation Pump After the user deletes the circulation pump the record for the particular circulation pump will be deleted from the Circulation Pumps tabbed panel as well Note that if the user manually added a circulation pump directly into the Circulation Pumps panel and
366. tomation Circulation Pumps Manifold and GHX Module Automation Presets Manifold Ultra Manifold Pipe Sizes Return Piping Style Return Type Reverse Return Circuit Information Circuits Headers Headers f Number of Circuits One way Circuit Length ft 300 0 0 0 Circuit Pipe Size p 1in 25 mm Circuits Per Parallel Loop Circuits Per One Way Length Supply Return Runout Information Extra One Way Length ft 200 0 0 0 Pipe Size SDR11 2 in 50 mm Fig 11 5 Automation Panel Contents 210 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module GHX Module Details related to an individual GHX Module can be seen in the GHX Module sub tabbed panel in figure 11 5 Return Piping Style This section stores information related to direct and reverse return systems Return Type In this section the designer specifies whether the GHX Module has direct or reverse return routing Note that this specification has a potentially large impact on both the calculated results as well as the visual representation of the design in the Layout panel This will be discussed in more detail later on in this chapter Circuit Information The Circuit tabbed panel stores parameters related to the GHX Circuits in each GHX Module Circuit information is broken into Basic and Details tabbed panels The Basic tabbed panel can be seen in detail in figure 11 6 Circuit Information Circuits
367. ts That being said some research has been published comparing commercial geothermal system installations costs to those of more standard systems In particular data collected and analyzed by Bloomquist suggest the following for vertical closed loop commercial systems Average installation cost Maximum installation cost Minimum installation cost 100 m 9 3 ft 135 m 12 5 ft 36 m 3 3 ft Bloomquist further suggests that horizontal closed loop systems have installation costs that are less than 50 of the cost of vertical closed loop systems Below is a table adapted from Bloomquist that indicates average installation capital costs for more standard HVAC systems HVAC System Type Installation Capital Costs Rooftop DX with electric heating 52 m 4 8 ft Rooftop DX with gas heating 61 m 5 7 ft Air source heat pump 74 m 6 9 ft Rooftop variable air volume VAV 86 m 8 0 ft Water source heat pump with gas 133 m 12 4 ft boiler cooling tower Central VAV with chiller cooling tower 162 m 15 0 ft and gas perimeter heat Four pipe fan coil unit with electric chiller 171 m 15 9 ft and gas boiler The above data are included in this manual as a convenience and general reference for Ground Loop Design software users It is of course the responsibility of the designer to determine the exact installation cost parameter
368. turer s r Manufacturer Information rSeries Information Manufacturer s Name Series Name Street Filename without extension ee O City State Zip Entry Date 7 2712001 Country M Phone Proceed Cancel Fig 2 1 Pump Information Panel 28 CHAPTER 2 Adding Editing Heat Pumps After the user enters all the data and clicks the Proceed button all of the information for the series being added will be stored in the Pumplist gld file Note that the information marked with an asterisk must be included before the user is allowed to proceed Editing Pump Data Once the new pump series information is entered or an existing pump series is selected from the upper pane the Pump Edit pane will appear in the lower pane of the Edit Add Pumps module as shown in figure 2 2 There are two sub panes The left sub pane is a list of the pumps already included in the series The right sub pane is a series of tabbed panels that contain the data for each pump on the list In the case of a new series both the list and the panel section will be empty until a new pump is created The name of the current manufacturer and series are shown in the selection boxes in the upper pane Edit Add Heat Pumps WaterFurnace v Envision Large Vertical X Pump Details Pump Model NLVO80 Pump Type Water to Air Water to Water Manufacturer s Recommendations F
369. turn pipe B of GHX Header into return pipe A of GHX Module Supply Return Runout BASIC DIRECT RETURN LOOPFIELD LAYOUT 2 Figure 11 41 is an illustration of a four circuit two circuit per parallel loop direct return GHX Module While the figure looks somewhat complex because each individual piece is labeled numbered it will soon become clear that in the CFD module the layout is quite straightforward The GHX Module Supply Return Runout the GHX Header pipe pairs and their associated fittings are in black The GHX Circuits and their associated fittings are in red Between each connection a space has been added to visibly separate different sections of the system for easy comparisons with the layout structure in the CFD module To ensure clarity each individual component in the figure is listed below Supply Return Pipe Pairs GHX Circuits Arg A A A s 1 1 1u 1 1 B B B B 2r 2 28 2 2 t Cr C C C 35 3 34 3 3 D D D D Ar 4 45 4 4 Note that each supply return pipe pair consists of four subcomponents and each GHX Circuit consists of five subcomponent as mentioned above in the basic description of the two components the pipe pair and the GHX Circuit Figure 11 42 is the identical layout in the CFD module 255 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module GHX Module Supply Return Runout A A GHX Header Section 1 C C c z Pu Pipe Pair D D fu fu m H Circuit 1 Cir
370. uary 3 is approximately the coldest day of the year the value entered will be 34 31 days in January plus 3 days of February The program uses these days to determine the soil temperature at the given depth at these times of the year Corrected Temperature These are the corrected temperatures at the depth specified calculated automatically from the undisturbed temperature and the other input values provided These values are used in the heat transfer calculation between the header or branch pipes and the soil Fluid The fluid panel is identical to the one described for the Borehole Design module in Chapter 4 except for one addition That addition is the minimum required circuit flow rate in the lower Minimum Circuit Flow Rate and Solution Properties section The added section is shown in figure 6 7 As in the other 141 CHAPTER 6 The Surface Water Design Module modules the inlet temperatures can be viewed and modified from the expanded interface as seen in figure 6 8 m Minimum Circuit Flow Rate Cooling 28 gpm Heating 42 gpm Fig 6 7 Minimum Circuit Flow Rate Section of the Fluid Panel GLD uses this information in conjunction with the system flow rate to establish the maximum number of parallel circuits The flow rates required for non laminar flow for several antifreeze solutions are included as a table in the Fluid Properties set Exact values for a particular mixture may need t
371. ucing the total number of operating hours However in the same case decreasing the required flow rate is another option which would keep the condenser capacity and operating hours unchanged The only limitations are the required temperature difference and the minimum condenser capacity needed to meet the chosen design length With GLD users have the flexibility to choose the parameters that fit best in their designs Boilers In GLD boilers are similar to cooling towers except that they are added in order to reduce the overall heating load on the system In this case the user may actually reduce the peak and annual heating loads by the flat percentage defined by the slider value The required boiler capacity and the modified peak loads applied to the loop field are shown on the panel but no other inclusion electrical or fuel costs for the boiler are included in the calculation report The expected heat pump power is also reduced by the same percentage in order to estimate a real system After adjusting either the cooling tower or boiler slider the designer will notice that the program automatically recalculates the entire design For larger systems it may take several seconds to update the results For both cooling tower and boiler hybrids it is recommended that a user first uses the fixed temperature Design Day mode to calculate the required lengths based on the hybrid design Next the user is recommended to switch to Monthly mode ente
372. ulation Pumps Circulation Pump Information Total Circulation Pump Power kW 0 0 Total Number of Circulation Pumps 0 Li No circulation pump information entered Fig 11 2 Circulation Panel Contents After a designer has finalized a piping system in the Layout Panel the user can either add circulation pumps in the Circulation Pumps panel or can add circulation pumps directly in the Layout Panel as required to cover the pressure drop in the piping system Remember that these calculations in version 2010 do not include heat pump pressure drops They may be added in a future version 206 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module At the top of the panel is a summary of the total circulation pump power and the total number of circulation pumps These numbers update automatically as the user adds removes circulation pumps from his or her design Managing Circulation Pumps The buttons along the top of the Circulation Pump Manager are used to add and modify circulation pumps A closer view is shown in figure 11 3 Fig 11 3 Circulation Pump Control Buttons The five buttons on the left side are circulation pump editing controls and they include New Copy Remove Renumber and Clear A Summary view of all the pumps may be obtained by hitting the sixth or Summary View toggle button this feature note available in all versions L New and L Copy A new circulation pump may be added at any time by clicking t
373. unout AA through Circuit 1 and back through return pipe A of GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA 2 Fluid circulates from supply pipe A of GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA to supply pipe B of GHX Header Section BB through Circuit 2 and 243 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module back through return pipe B of GHX Header Section BB and back through return pipe A of GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA 3 Fluid circulates from supply pipe A of GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA to supply pipe B of GHX Header Section BB to supply pipe C of GHX Header Section CC through Circuit 3 and back through return pipe C of GHX Header Section CC and back through return pipe B of GHX Header Section BB and back through return pipe A of GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA In other words in a direct return system the flow paths get longer and longer as the GHX Circuits go out farther and farther In figure 11 30 above it is clear that a molecule of water flowing through circuit 1 travels a shorter distance and returns faster to the circulation pump than a molecule of water flowing through circuit 2 or circuit 3 Figure 11 31 is a direct return three GHX Circuit GHX Module in the Layout Manager Workspace that is identical to the GHX Module in figure 11 30 It shows how the Layout Manager Workspace displays direct return systems The flow paths have been added to enhance understanding As can be seen in figure 11 31 dire
374. uous update feature modifies the pump values due to changes in the temperature or the flow rate The partial load factor plays a small role in the heat exchanger length determination calculations Details and Clear The Details and Clear buttons and the Details panel operate in the same way as they do in the Zone Manager Loads module However one difference is that no variation of the load flow rates is permitted in the Details panel Custom Pump Customization Checking the Custom Pump check box allows an override of all automatic pump selection features The user can input any data desired although once again the COP used in the calculations is calculated from the capacity and the power not taken from the text box list Pump Continuous Update Feature The Update Reselect Current Pumps control is called automatically when changes are made to either the inlet source temperature or the system flow rate from within the Zone Manager the Average Block Loads module or the design modules In this way the designer does not have to worry about updating the pumps already matched to zones in GLD However the designer must be aware that sometimes this may result in a new pump size assignment due to capacity changes related to variations in temperature or flow If this is problematic custom pumps may be used to lock pump values into a zone However for proper modeling any customized pumps must be edited separately by the designer after the des
375. ure 3 12 je sjaja 2 Fig 3 12 Average Block Loads Module Controls The buttons on the left are zone editing controls and include only New and Clear To the right are the Open and Save buttons for opening and saving the zone files along with the Print button for printing various zone reports The last button on the right is the Import Loads button which is explained towards the end of this chapter Unlike the Zone Manager there are no Auto Select buttons 3 New A new set of loads data may be created initially by clicking the New button Since only one panel is allowed this button becomes disabled after a new set appears It is re enabled when the set is cleared amp Clear To delete all of the current information press the Clear button Entering Loads The method of entering loads data into the Average Block is nearly identical to the method used in the Zone Manager There are two main differences The first is that the summed loads values may be larger than the smaller values used in individual zones Refer to the Zone Manager Entering Zones section or the end of this chapter for specific details about the Design Day Loads Annual Equivalent Full Load Hours and Days Occupied per Week sections Note that the Annual Equivalent Full Load Hours can be calculated for the entire installation using the Equivalent Hours Calculator The second difference is that the loads data entry method has been expanded to accept monthly and
376. ure mode the entering water temperatures can be adjusted while for the fixed length mode the borehole length can be modified This can be seen in figure 4 9 Borehole Length Fig 4 9 Design Method in Expanded User Interface U Tube The U Tube panel contains information related to the pipe and bore The main purpose of the panel is to obtain a value for the borehole thermal resistance BTR Calculated according to the method of Paul and Remund Paul 1996 the thermal resistance calculation takes into account the pipe parameters and positioning the borehole diameter and the grout thermal conductivity If desired an experimentally determined value of the BTR also may be entered into the textbox which then overrides all calculations In GLD Premier 2010 the updated Thermal Conductivity module can calculate BTR from empirical data The panel contents are shown in figure 4 10 83 Fixed Length ST ae 300 Fire cure Ft CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module mu Borehole Design Project verticalsampleformanual Results Fluid Soi U Tube Pattem Extra kW Information Calculated Borehole Equivalent Thermal Resistance Borehole Thermal Resistance 0 231 h ft F Btu Pipe Parameters Pipe Resistance 0 104 h ft F Btu Check Pipe Tables Pipe Size 1 in 25 mm Outer Diameter Eaz un Inner Diameter 1 08 in Single Pipe Type SDR11 o pec Double Flow Type Turbulent
377. user can select the Review Panel Results 296 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module REVIEW PANEL RESULTS The Review Panel displays results in a classic view that is quick and easy to understand Users can access Review Panel results by using the Review icon button which is the middle button in the image below Calculate B When a user pushes the middle button a screen similar to the one in figure 11 88 will appear results expanded manually for ease of viewing Automation Circulation Pumps Layout Design and Optimization Calculate si Peak Load Pipe 1 Veloat Ripe 1 Reyn Alphabetic Categorized pe U Circuit 01 Bi Fittings Return U Grcuit 02 U Grcuit 03 amp Fittings Supply U Grcuit 04 B Flow Rate U Grcuit 05 E General U arcuit 06 Pipe 1 Supply U Orcuit 07 amp Pipe 2 Return Circuit 08 Pressure Drop Pipe 1 Pressure Drop ft hd 1 9 Pipe 2 Pressure Drop ft hd 19 Return Fitting 1 Pressure Drop 0 00 Supply Fitting 1 Pressure Drop 0 00 Total Branch Pressure Drop ft 6 8 A A lt Total Child Pressure Drop ft he 3 0 Pipe 1 Velocity Pipe 1 Reynold s Number Total Local Pressure Drop ft hy 3 7 I Circuit 01 E Reynold s Number U circuit 02 Fen Rayookfa mber TU RE 2 Reynold s Ni 07 U Circuit 03 a al EON B Velocity U circuit 04 Pipe 1 Velocity ft s 2 17 U circuit 05 Pipe 2 Velocity ft s 2 17 U Circuit
378. using the New Thermal Conductivity command from the Design Studio File menu or toolbar and the other is by opening an existing Thermal Conductivity project gtc file from within the Thermal Conductivity module In the design studio only one Thermal Conductivity module can be open at a time New Projects New Thermal Conductivity projects may be opened at any time from the Design Studio by choosing New Thermal Conductivity from either the Design Studio File menu or the toolbar The module opens directly into the Results panel t Existing Projects Existing Thermal Conductivity projects may be opened at any time from within the Thermal Conductivity module by choosing Open from the Thermal Conductivity Module toolbar Saving Projects Thermal Conductivity projects may be saved at any time by clicking the save button on the Thermal Conductivity module toolbar When the user closes the program or module the program automatically asks the user if he or she wants to save the project 189 CHAPTER 10 The Thermal Conductivity Module Importing Conductivity Data The Thermal Conductivity module can import CSV comma separated value files generated by thermal conductivity test unit data loggers The new version of the Thermal Conductivity module provides a robust CSV file reading capability If the module has trouble reading in a data set it will provide the user with guidance and instructions At present time the
379. utlet Pipe Size sbRii 2in 50mm Supply Return Runout Information Extra One Way Length ft 200 0 0 0 Pipe Size SDR11 3 in 80 mm OK Cancel Fig 11 76 The Manifold Vault Builder The Manifold Vault Builder is broken into five sections Group Name Return Piping Style Section Outlet Information Supply Return Pipe Information and the OK Cancel buttons Each section is addressed below Group Name The group name is a parameter applied to every component in a design For the Manifold Vault the user can use the default group name or select one of his or her choosing The group name becomes important during the design review process so it is therefore critical that each Manifold Vault in a system has a unique group name Return Pipe Style For Manifold Vault systems the return piping style is locked at direct return since Manifolds Vaults are always direct return systems Section Outlet Information A Manifold Vault will have two or more outlets connecting typically to GHX Modules via the GHX Modules Supply Return Runouts The Manifold Vault is a 285 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module parent to the GHX Modules Details pertaining to these outlets including the number of outlets the separation between each outlet in the Manifold Vault and the section outlet pipe size which is likely to be identical to the Supply Return Runout pipe size coming in from the GHX Modules Supply Return
380. uts are arranged in panels that relate to the type of input After the user enters all parameters the software calculates the required pipe length the circuit number the inlet and outlet temperatures and the COP etc based on the design specifications Again within this framework it is straightforward to make changes and recalculate results especially when using the expanded user interface The input information is organized into seven panels shown in figure 1 5 Results Fluid Soil Piping Surface water Extra kW Information Fig 1 5 Surface Water Design Panel List These seven panels include Results Fluid Soil Piping Surface Water Extra kW and Information The panel names and many of the panel input parameters differ from those of the Borehole Design module A more complete description about how to enter data and perform calculations in the Surface Water Design module is provided in Chapter 6 Theoretical Basis To determine the length of pipe necessary for different surface water systems experiments were conducted for different size pipes in coiled and slinky configurations for both heating and cooling modes Kavanaugh 1997 GLD uses a polynomial fit of this experimental data to determine the amount of pipe necessary for different loading conditions 19 CHAPTER 1 GLD Overview Additionally coefficients are used to take into account the effect of the heat transfer in the lengths of the header and the
381. veral additional features Metric and English unit conversion Printed reports of all input and calculated data Convenient buttons to bring up tables and calculators A Calculate button used to refresh the calculations A Monthly Data button used to calculate monthly inlet temperatures An Hourly Data button used to calculate hourly inlet temperatures For monthly and hourly simulations average annual energy consumption estimates A Graphing button used to graph inlet temperature data within the Design Studio Boiler and cooling tower hybrids 72 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module Opening Projects There are two ways to open Borehole Design projects One is by using the New Borehole command from the Design Studio File menu or toolbar and the other is by opening an existing Borehole Design project gld file Files cannot be opened if other modules with the same name are already open As many files can be opened as the system s memory permits FF New Projects New projects may be opened at any time from the Design Studio by choosing New Borehole from either the Design Studio File menu or the toolbar New projects open with standard parameter values that must be edited for new projects The module opens directly into the Information panel through which the designer enters information about the new project In new projects no loads files zon are loaded The user must create a new loads file or open
382. verse return piping systems are described below Piping Components Summary Each of the two basic components the Pipe Pair and the GHX Circuit consist of a pipe pair and two or more connection fittings Each of these two basic components in turn are comprised of multiple sub components Each of these subcomponents is fully controllable by the designer For example in a Pipe Pair the supply side pipe can be a different length or diameter than the return side pipe This fine grained control is critical for optimizing direct return and reverse return 239 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics Module GHX headers for example Also the Pipe Pair and GHX Circuit components are not limited to two and three fittings respectively Users can add as many fittings as necessary to each component This provides designers with unlimited flexibility and modeling accuracy Basic Piping Grammar Now that the two basic components have been introduced the basic piping grammar can be described The most straightforward way of doing so is by providing a general introduction via four core concepts and then studying several basic loopfield layouts FOUR CORE CONCEPTS CONCEPT ONE Component Families The first basic concept behind the grammar is that individual components are connected to one another piece by piece to form a cohesive and comprehensive system As individual components are strung together they form component families An example
383. will require at least the capacity and power data to utilize the pump properly The actual COP used in the calculations is determined from the capacity and the power not the input text box Other information may be added for the designer s reference Note When a custom pump is included its values will remain unchanged during the designing process Variations in inlet source or load temperatures or system flow rate will not affect a customized pump s data Automatic Heat Pump Selection Options for the Entire Zone Set Two controls are included with GLD that allow for an automatic selection of pumps throughout the entire set of zones This feature is useful when the pump set needs to be compared or changed or when modifications are required throughout the existing set These controls are necessary so that large sets of pumps can be changed or updated without having to step through each individual zone Auto Select All Pumps The Auto Select All Pumps control performs the same function as the Auto Select button in the pump selection section of the zone data window except it performs the selection sequentially through all of the zones It uses the active heat pump series selected on the Heat Pumps tabbed panel Note Auto Select All Pumps will overwrite all currently selected pumps including custom pumps cd Update Reselect Current Pumps The Update Reselect Current Pumps control reselects the pumps in all zones after determinin
384. ws do not react directly to metric English unit conversion Instead a report opens with the same units used by its parent design module If another system of units is required the user must first change the unit system of the design module using the Design Studio Units menu and then open a new report 146 CHAPTER 7 Reports Project Reports Project reports may be opened at any time from the Design Studio File menu by selecting Print An option dialog box appears displaying the six types of reports that are available concise detailed input data with loads concise temperature detailed temperature and full project The first two project reports are available in all three heat exchanger design modules Detailed reports contain full project information while concise reports limit the project information and exclude any comments Detailed reports generally require multiple pages while concise reports are designed for single page printouts The other four project reports are associated with monthly inlet temperatures and therefore are available only with the borehole module The user selects a preference and then clicks OK The report does not print automatically but instead creates the report preview window in which the report can be reviewed prior to printing Printing can be done by clicking on the printer icon in the upper left hand corner of the report preview window In general project reports contain several main sec
385. ximize the accuracy of the program s calculations Average Building Costs When a designer is considering the financial costs of one HVAC system versus another it is important to remember and include overall building costs A well designed decentralized geothermal system may have no 166 CHAPTER 9 The Financial Module need for a mechanical room while a central chiller boiler plant may require a thousand or more square feet of space This additional space costs money to construct In addition the space used for a central plant has an opportunity cost its lost rental or lease value For these reasons the finance module enables designers to ascertain a the building construction cost reductions if any and b the revenue generated from the additional available square footage if any of a geothermal system compared to a more traditional HVAC solution The total structure floor space enables designers to enter the total square footage floor space of the to be conditioned space Please be sure not to enter the square footage of any unconditioned floor space The average building construction cost enables designers to enter the per square foot construction costs of the building The lease value is the market lease value of the floor space in per square foot per year terms Equipment Related Costs Equipment related costs are a key ingredient in estimating overall system installation and maintenance costs as well as salvage values
386. y the chapter introduces the licensing system Introduction Typical Uses and Users GLD Premier Version 2010 is intended as a Design Studio for professional HVAC designers and engineers working in the area of geothermal applications It is primarily designed for use with light commercial or commercial installations since the calculations take into account a the long term thermal effects that often determine the necessary design requirements and b piping and flow optimization design considerations that can have a significant impact on overall system performance and cost effectiveness The program is optimized for hybrid system design that combine boilers cooling towers fluid coolers solar thermal and the like with ground heat exchangers Additionally the loads representation employed in GLD s Zone Management system allows for detailed equipment selection and specific load distribution data to maximize calculation accuracy The Premier Version of GLD includes four design modules one for vertical borehole ground heat exchanger systems one for horizontal heat exchanger systems one for surface water pond lake etc installations and the new computational fluid dynamics CFD module for piping and flow optimization design across all types of ground heat exchangers It also includes two loads PREFACE modules one for average block loads and one for the more detailed zone model The loads data can be shared between modules using GLD
387. y inlet temperature calculations in the borehole design module The mathematical model the program employs for these calculations requires the more detailed monthly and hourly loads data Design Day Loads The Design Day heat gains and losses are simply the average hourly peak demands of the installation over the different periods of the day Although the program could include all 24 hours of the day separately it instead uses three 4 hour periods and one 12 hour period to simplify input These average hourly loads can be entered directly into the corresponding entry box The soil resistance models employed by the program actually use this data to determine the daily and monthly transfer of energy into the soil This is because the model assumes that there are different resistances associated with the annual monthly and daily pulses of heat being transferred If an installation is not being used at night for example the demand for the 12 hour period might be set to 0 Annual Equivalent Full Load Hours Because complete loads entry could be extensive especially in applications with more than a few zones GLD limits the necessary data by compacting all of the monthly loads into a single number the Annual Equivalent Full Load Hours This number effectively represents all of the monthly total loads data KBtu or kWh in terms of the peak demand value KBtu hr or kW The advantage is that a single value is used instead of twelve one for
388. y reduce the peak and annual heating loads by the flat percentage defined by the slider value The required boiler capacity and the modified peak loads applied to the loop field are shown on the panel but no other inclusion electrical or fuel costs for the boiler are included in the calculation report The expected heat pump power is also reduced by the same percentage in order to estimate a real system Monthly Data Results Results Subsections Fixed Length Mode For Monthly Data calculations fixed length mode is the only option available This is because the loopfield geometry must be fully defined including borehole depth before the calculations can be performed As a result when a designer selects the Monthly Data calculation methodology the program switches to and locks in to fixed length mode GLD calculate monthly inlet temperatures for a user defined modeling time period see 4 12 Depending on the modeling time period and the computer resources this calculation may take several seconds to complete For the Monthly Data results the reporting section is separated into five subsections and one Graphing Module Results that are unique to the Monthly Data results compared to the Design Day results are displayed in purple A sample screen for Monthly Data results can be seen in figure 4 21 The two lists on the Results panel are for heating and cooling In fixed length mode both heating and cooling results are printed in bold t
389. yet oftentimes overlooked benefits of geothermal HVAC systems The Other Costs panel is divided into three sections emissions costs average building costs and equipment related costs 164 CHAPTER 9 The Financial Module S Finance Module HorizontalSample Results Geothermal Conventional Utilities Other Costs Incentives Emissions Costs CO2 Emission Rate 1 4 lbs kwh CO2 Emissions Cost 30 00 ton Effective Initiation Delay 3 yr Average Building Costs Total Structure Floor Space 14 000 ft 2 Average Building Construction Cost 100 00 ft 2 Lease Value 3 00 R 2 yr Equipment Related Costs System Type Geothermal Heat Pump Fuel Type Eecricty Installation Costs 6 50 ftr2 Maintenance Costs 0 00 ft 2 Salvage Value 0 00 ft2 Fig 9 3 Other Costs Panel Contents Emissions Costs As the global response to climate change intensifies C0 emissions regimes will likely become the norm These regimes may include cap and trade mechanisms taxes and other to be determined processes for incentivizing emissions reductions In some countries designers already are looking at geothermal HVAC systems both as a source of emissions credits that they can sell in the growing carbon markets for a profit as well as an attractive application of the Kyoto Protocol Clean Development Mechanism CDM It is likely that the Kyoto Protocol will be superseded in the next few years by a new agre
390. ype so that they stand out The reason is that in fixed length mode performance calculations for both 98 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module the dominant and non dominant sides are based on the actual designer selected length of the heat exchanger Results for both sides are therefore relevant The first subsection deals with the bores including the total length the borehole number and the borehole length for one bore A common way to adjust the borehole length to a desired value is to change the borehole number or pattern on the Pattern panel The second subsection presents the predicted long term ground temperature change with respect to the average ground temperature of the installation When calculating Monthly Data results the average ground temperature change always will be reported as N A This is because the updated theory in GLD Premier 2010 used for these calculations is not directly amenable to such soil temperature calculations Designers that need to estimate the soil temperature change can do so using the Design Day calculation described above Borehole Design Project 1 Results Fluid Soil U Tube Pattern Extra kw Information Calculate Monthly COOLING HEATING Total Length ft 15180 0 15180 0 Borehole Number 60 60 Borehole Length ft 253 0 253 0 Ground Temperature Change F N A N A Peak Unit Inlet F 81 6 43 9 Peak Unit Outlet F 90 0 37 8 Total Unit Capacity kBtu Hr

Ground Loop DesignTM

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents